Skip to main content

Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"

See other formats


F  YnOMTTO 


T      Ff.F 


Catalog  1979-80 


NOTICE  OF  NON-DISCRIMINATION  POLICY 

Lycoming  College  welcomes  applications  from  pro- 
spective students  regardless  of  age,  sex,  race,  religious 
preference,  physical  disability,  financial  resources, 
color,  national  or  ethnic  origin.  This  policy  is  in 
compliance  with  the  requirements  of  Title  VI  of  the 
Civil  Rights  Act  of  1964,  Title  IX  of  the  Educational 
Amendments  of  1972,  and  all  other  applicable  federal, 
state  and  local  statutes,  ordinances  and  regulations. 


m 


A  QUICK  LOOK  AT  LYCOMING 

Location  Williamsport,  Pennsylvania  17701 

Phone  (717)  326-1951 

Founded  1812 

Enrollment  (Fall,  1978)  1179  (689  men  and  490  women) 

Accreditation  Middle  States  Association  of  Colleges  and  Schools 

University  Senate  of  The  United  Methodist 
Church 

Church  Affiliation  United  Methodist 

Student  /Faculty  Ratio  Sixteen  to  one 

Library  Volumes  130,000;  875  current  periodical  titles 

Size  of  Campus  Main  campus:  20  acres,  plus  12-acre  Athletic  Field 

Number  of  Buildings  Nineteen  (With  a  Physical  Education/Recreation 

Center  under  construction) 

Calendar  4-4-1  (1  =  Optional  May  Term) 

1979-80  Fixed  Charges  Tuition  $3300 

Room  &  Board  $1600 

Total  $4900 

May  and  Summer  term  charges  are  not  included  in 
these  figures. 

Books  and  supplies  normally  cost  $75  to  $150  per 
year.  Allowance  must  be  made  for  laundry,  travel, 
clothing,  and  personal  needs. 

Financial  Aid  Lycoming  students  received  more  than  $1.9  mil- 

lion in  various  kinds  of  financial  assistance  last 
year.  Prospective  students  should  discuss  their 
financial  needs  with  the  Director  of  Student  Aid. 


CONTENTS 

Page 
Introduction  to  Lycoming 5 

Admission  to  Lycoming 7 

Expenses  and  Financial  Aid 9 

The  Academic  Program 15 

Student  Services 33 

The  Curriculum 39 

College  Directory 125 

The  1979-1980  Academic  Calendar 138 

Campus  Facilities 142 

Campus  Map 143 

Index 144 


CHAPTER  I 
INTRODUCTION  TO  LYCOMING 


THIS  IS  LYCOMING 

Lycoming  College  is  an  independent,  coeducational  liberal  arts  institu- 
tion related  to  The  United  Methodist  Church. 

Lycoming  is  located  in  Williamsport,  Pennsylvania,  the  gateway  to 
the  picturesque  "Endless  Mountains"  and  the  beautiful  West  Branch 
Valley  of  the  Susquehanna  River.  Greater  Williamsport  has  a  population 
of  85,000  and  is  within  200  miles  of  Washington,  D.C.,  Baltimore, 
Philadelphia,  New  York,  Syracuse,  Rochester,  Buffalo  and  Pittsburgh. 
The  campus  is  situated  on  a  slight  prominence  near  the  center  of  the 
city. 

Lycoming  welcomed  its  134th  class  in  September,  1978,  and  began 
the  year  with  an  enrollment  of  1,179,  consisting  of  490  women  and  689 
men.  These  students  came  to  the  College  from  16  states  and  the  majority 
resided  in  Pennsylvania,  New  Jersey  and  New  York. 

The  academic  significance  of  Lycoming  derives  from  its  enduring 
commitment  to  the  value  of  a  liberal  education,  carefully  designed 
mission,  and  highly  trained  faculty  of  teacher-scholars,  67%  of  whom 
have  earned  doctorates  from  the  nation's  outstanding  universities. 

The  principal  aim  of  Lycoming  College  is  to  use  its  resources  to 
provide  for  its  students  the  finest  possible  undergraduate  education. 
The  College  serves  primarily  to  help  each  student  develop  a  central  core 
of  values,  awarenesses,  strategies,  skills,  and  information  that  is  inte- 
grated and  coherent  enough  to  lead  to  a  productive  and  fulfilling  life  in 
an  enormously  complex  world,  and  at  the  same  time  is  sufficiently  open 
and  flexible  to  encourage  continuous  growth  and  development. 

Lycoming  enjoys  a  continuing  reciprocal  relationship  with  The 
United  Methodist  Church.  It  has  consistently  supported  the  Methodist 
tradition  of  providing  educational  opportunities  for  persons  of  all 
religious  faiths.  Within  this  setting  of  religious  concern,  the  search  for 
values  must  continue  to  be  an  important  function  of  this  institution. 

Lycoming  is  a  member  of  the  Association  of  American  Colleges,  the 
Pennsylvania  Association  of  Colleges  and  Universities,  the  Commission 
for  Independent  Colleges  and  Universities,  the  National  Commission  on 
Accrediting,  and  the  National  Association  of  Schools  and  Colleges  of 
The  United  Methodist  Church.  It  is  accredited  by  the  Middle  States 
Association  of  Colleges  and  Schools  and  the  University  Senate  of  The 
United  Methodist  Church. 


HISTORY 

In  1812  the  Williamsport  Academy  was  founded,  offering  an  elementary 
and  secondary  school  curriculum.  The  Academy  became  Williamsport 
Dickinson  Seminary  in  1848  under  the  patronage  of  The  Methodist 


Episcopal  Church.  The  Seminary  continued  as  a  private  boarding  school 
until  1929  when  the  curriculum  was  expanded  to  include  two  years  of 
college.  The  name  of  the  institution  was  changed  at  this  time  to 
Williamsport  Dickinson  Seminary  and  Junior  College.  In  1947  the  junior 
college  became  a  four-year  degree-granting  college  of  liberal  arts  and 
sciences  and  the  name  Lycoming  College  was  adopted.  Lycoming, 
derived  from  an  Indian  word  "lacomic"  meaning  "Great  Stream,"  has 
been  common  to  north  central  Pennsylvania  since  colonial  times. 


CHAPTER  II 
ADMISSION  TO  LYCOMING 

POLICY  AND  STANDARDS 

Lycoming  College  welcomes  applications  from  prospective  students 
regardless  of  age,  sex,  race,  religious  preference,  financial  resources, 
color,  national  or  ethnic  origin  or  physical  impairment.  Selective  ad- 
mission is  based  on  the  following  standards: 

— graduation  from  an  accredited  secondary  school; 
— completion  of  a  college  preparatory  program  that  includes  Eng- 
lish and  mathematics  plus  units  in  foreign  language,  natural 
science  and  social  science; 
— College  Entrance  Examination  Board  Scholastic  Aptitude  Test 
(SAT)  or  American  College  Test  (ACT)  scores  at  a  satisfactory 
level; 

A  secondary  school  student  of  exceptional  maturity  and  with 
significant  academic  preparation  may  apply  to  Lycoming  as  a  candidate 
for  early  admission.  If  admitted,  the  student  enters  the  College  after 
completing  the  junior  year  in  school.  Special  students  who  are  not 
enrolled  in  a  degree  program  and  who  wish  to  enroll  in  one  or  more 
courses  in  any  term  are  welcome  to  apply. 

Lycoming  is  fully  approved  for  the  educational  program  for  veter- 
ans under  Federal  Public  Laws  550,  634,  894. 

APPLICATION  AND  SELECTION  PROCESS 

The  application  for  admission  is  processed  in  the  following  manner: 

— The  application,  obtained  from  the  Admissions  Office,  and  the 

following  credentials   should  be   filed  by  April  1st  for  those 

considering  fall  term  admission.  Applications  will  be  considered 

after  April  1st  on  a  space-available  basis; 

— application  fee  of  $15  (non-refundable)  must  accompany  the 

completed  application  form, 
— official   secondary   school   transcript   forwarded  by   the   school 

guidance  office, 
— results   of  either   the   Scholastic   Aptitude  Test   (SAT)   or   the 

American  College  Test  (ACT), 
The  completed  application  is  evaluated  with  every  effort  being 
made  to  insure  individualization  of  this  process  by  identifying  the 
academic  achievement,  talents,  qualities,  and  interests  of  the  applicant. 
Lycoming  notifies  applicants  of  their  acceptance  on  a  rolling  schedule 
soon  after  all  credentials  have  been  received  and  evaluated.  In  some 
instances,  additional  information  may  be  needed  to  complete  the 
evaluation,  such  as  mid-year  grades  and  senior  SAT  or  ACT  score 
reports; 

— Applicants  who  have  been  admitted  must  notify  the  College  of 
their  intention  to  attend  by  May  1st,  the  Candidates'  Reply  Date. 


This  notification  must  be  accompanied  by  a  $100  advance  deposit 
which  is  applicable  to  the  tuition  charges  of  the  first  semester  of 
enrollment.  After  May  1st,  the  $100  deposit  is  not  refundable. 

ADVANCED  STANDING  BY  TRANSFER 

The  College  welcomes  transfer  students  from  other  accredited  colleges 

and  universities  according  to  the  following  standards  and  procedures: 

— Applicants  must  be  in  good  academic  standing  with  a  minimum 

cumulative  grade  point  average  of  2.0  at  their  current  or  previous 

college; 
— All  courses  passed  that  are  comparable  to  the  curriculum  at 

Lycoming  will  be  accepted  for  transfer; 
— The  grades  earned  in  all  transferable  courses  are  included  in  the 

computation  of  the  cumulative  grade  point  average; 
— Academic  standing  at  Lycoming  will  be  based  on  an  evaluation  of 

all  courses  attempted  at  all  other  institutions; 
— The  final  eight  courses  for  the  bachelor  of  arts  degree  must  be 

taken  at  Lycoming; 
— Official  copies  of  transcripts  from  all  institutions  attended  must 

be  submitted  as  a  part  of  the  admission  application. 

ADMISSIONS  OFFICE  LOCATION  AND  HOURS 

Prospective  students  and  their  families  are  invited  to  campus  for  a 
student-conducted  tour  and  a  meeting  with  an  Admissions  Officer  who 
will  provide  additional  information  about  the  College  and  answer  any 
questions  from  the  applicant. 

The  Admissions  Office  is  located  on  the  first  floor  of  Long  Hall.  For 
an  appointment  telephone  (717)  326-1951,  Ext.  221  or  write  Office  of 
Admissions,  Lycoming  College,  Williamsport,  PA  17701.  Office  hours 
are  as  follows: 

Weekdays    — September  through  April  9:00  a.m.  to  4:30  p.m. 

— May  through  August 9:00  a.m.  to  4:00  p.m. 

Saturdays    — September  through  April 9:00  a.m.  to  12:00  noon 

— May  through  August No  Saturday  Hours. 


CHAPTER  HI 
EXPENSES  AND  FINANCIAL  AID 

EXPENSES  FOR  THE  ACADEMIC  YEAR  1979-80 

The  following  expenses  are  effective  for  the  regular  Fall  and  Spring 
Semesters.  The  College  reserves  the  right  to  adjust  fees  at  any  time 
without  notice,  including  increasing  Spring  Semester  fees  should  there 
be  a  considerable  increase  in  the  price  of  commodities  and/or  services 
during  the  Fall  Semester.  The  fees  for  each  semester  are  payable  not 
later  than  the  second  day  of  classes  for  the  semester. 

FEES  PER  SEMESTER  PER  YEAR 

Comprehensive  Fee  $1,650  $3,300 

Board  and  Room  Rent 800  1,600 


Total  $2,450  $4,900 

One-Time  Fees  and  Deposits 

Application  Fee  $        15 

Admissions  Deposit 100 

Contingency  Deposit 50 

Part-Time  Student  Fees 

Application  Fee $        15 

Each  Unit  Course 412.50 

Additional  Charges 

Applied  Music  Fee  (half-hour  per  week  per  semester) $  75 

Cap  and  Gown  Rental prevailing  cost 

Laboratory  Fee  per  Unit  Course  5  to  30 

Late  Payment  Fee 25 

Parking  Permit  (for  the  academic  year) 10 

Parking  Permit  With  Reserved  Space  (for  the  academic  year)  ...  40 

Practice  Teaching  Fee  (Payable  in  Junior  Year) 130 

R.O.T.C.  Basic  Course  Deposit 

(Payable  at  Bucknell  University) 40 

R.O.T.C.  Advanced  Course  Deposit 

(Payable  at  Bucknell  University) 40 

Transcript  Fee  (No  charge  to  full-time  students) 3 

Medical  Questionnaire  Fee 

(Payable  to  Medical  Datamation,  Inc.) 10 

The  comprehensive  fee  covers  the  regular  course  load  of  three  to 
four  courses  each  semester.  Resident  students  must  board  at  the  College 
unless,  for  extraordinary  reasons,  authorization  is  extended  for  other 


eating  arrangements.  If  a  double  room  is  used  as  a  single  room,  an 
additional  charge  of  $75  per  semester  is  made.  The  estimated  cost  for 
books  and  supplies  ranges  from  $75  to  $150  per  year,  depending  on  the 
course  of  study  pursued.  Special  session  (May  Term  and  Summer  Term) 
charges  for  tuition,  room,  and  board  are  established  during  the  Fall 
Semester. 

ENTRY  FEES  AND  DEPOSITS 

Application  Fee — All  students  applying  for  admission  are  to  submit 
an  application  fee  of  $15  with  the  application.  This  charge  is  to  defray 
the  cost  of  processing  the  application  and  is  non-refundable. 

Admissions  Deposit — After  students  have  been  notified  of  their 
admission  to  the  College,  they  are  required  to  make  an  admissions 
deposit  to  confirm  their  intention  to  matriculate.  The  Admissions 
Deposit  of  $100  is  applied  to  the  general  charges  for  the  first  semester  of 
attendance.  After  May  1st  the  deposit  is  non-refundable  if  one  fails  to 
matriculate. 

Contingency  Deposit — A  Contingency  Deposit  of  $50  is  required  of 
all  full-time  students  as  a  guarantee  for  payment  of  damages  to  or  loss 
of  college  property,  library  fines,  parking  fines  and  similar  penalties 
imposed  by  the  College.  The  Contingency  Deposit  is  collected  along 
with  other  charges  for  the  initial  semester.  The  balance  of  this  deposit  is 
refunded  after  all  debts  to  the  College  have  been  paid,  either  upon 
graduation  or  upon  written  request  submitted  to  the  Registrar  two 
weeks  prior  to  voluntary  permanent  termination  of  enrollment  at 
Lycoming  College. 

PARTIAL  PAYMENTS 

For  the  convenience  of  those  who  find  it  impossible  to  follow  the  regular 
schedule  of  payments,  arrangements  may  be  made  with  the  College 
Business  Manager  for  the  monthly  payment  of  college  fees  through 
various  educational  plans.  Additional  information  concerning  partial 
payments  may  be  obtained  from  the  Business  Manager  or  Director  of 
Admissions. 

REFUNDS  FOR  STUDENTS  WHO  WITHDRAW 

Refunds  of  tuition  and  board  are  made  to  students  who  voluntarily 
withdraw  from  the  College  while  in  good  standing  according  to  the 
following  schedule  for  the  Fall  and  Spring  Semesters  and  the  com- 
parable period  for  the  May  and  Summer  Terms. 

Period  of  Withdrawal  Refund   %  Charge  % 

First  four  weeks  of  the  semester  70  30 

Second  four  weeks  of  the  semester  .              40  60 

Third  four  weeks  of  the  semester  ...               10  90 

After  twelve  weeks — 0 —  100 

10 


The  date  on  which  the  Dean  of  the  College  approves  the  student's 
withdrawal  form  is  considered  the  official  date  of  withdrawal. 

Room  charges,  which  are  established  on  a  semester  basis,  and 
special  charges,  such  as  laboratory  fees,  are  not  refundable  if  a  student 
leaves  the  College  prior  to  the  end  of  a  semester. 

Full-time  students  are  not  eligible  for  a  refund  of  tuition  for  an 
individual  course  if  the  course  is  dropped  after  the  first  ten  days  of  either 
regular  semester. 

DAMAGE  CHARGES 

Wherever  possible,  damage  to  dormitory  property  will  be  charged  to  the 
person  or  persons  directly  responsible.  Damage  and  breakage  occurring 
in  a  room  will  be  the  responsibility  of  students  occupying  the  room.  Hall 
and  bathroom  damage  will  be  the  responsibility  of  all  students  of  the 
section  where  damage  occurs.  Actual  costs  of  repairs  will  be  charged. 


11 


NON-PAYMENT  OF  FEES  PENALTY 

Students  will  not  be  registered  for  courses  in  a  new  semester  if  their 
accounts  for  previous  attendance  have  not  been  settled.  Diplomas, 
grade  reports,  transcripts,  and  certifications  of  withdrawals  in  good 
standing  are  issued  only  when  a  satisfactory  settlement  of  all  financial 
obligations  has  been  made  in  the  Business  Office. 

FINANCIAL  AID  POLICY  AND  PROCEDURES 

The  dominant  factor  in  determining  the  amount  of  financial  aid  awarded 
to  individual  students  is  the  establishment  of  need.  Scholarships  may  be 
awarded  on  the  basis  of  financial  need  and  academic  ability,  while 
grants  are  provided  exclusively  on  the  basis  of  financial  need.  Long- 
term,  low-cost  educational  loans  are  available  from  federal  and  state 
sources  to  most  students  who  can  demonstrate  need.  Part-time  em- 
ployment is  available  to  students  who  are  in  good  academic  standing. 

To  apply  for  financial  assistance,  obtain  the  Financial  Aid  Form 
(F.A.F.)  from  the  secondary  school  guidance  office  or  the  Student  Aid 
Office  at  Lycoming.  Submit  the  completed  form  to  the  College  Scholar- 
ship Service,  P.O.  Box  176,  Princeton,  NJ  08540,  as  early  as  possible  after 
January  1st.  Renewal  applications  are  required  annually. 

Scholarships — Freshman  Recognition  Scholarships  of  $700  each  are 
awarded  to  applicants  who  have  superior  academic  qualifications  but  do 
not  demonstrate  any  financial  need.  These  scholarships  are  renewable 
each  year  if  the  student  maintains  a  minimum  3.25  cumulative  grade 
point  average.  Other  scholarships,  ranging  from  $300  to  full  tuition,  are 
awarded  to  freshmen  who  rank  in  the  top  fifth  of  their  secondary  school 
class  and  have  a  combined  score  over  1100  on  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board  Scholastic  Aptitude  Test  (SAT).  These  scholarships 
are  renewable  each  year  if  the  student  maintains  a  minimum  3.00 
cumulative  grade  point  average. 

Grants-In-Aid — Lycoming  has  established  an  extensive  program  of 
grants-in-aid  for  worthy  students  who  do  not  qualify  for  scholarships. 
Awards  are  based  on  demonstrated  need  and  the  prospect  of  the 
student  contributing  positively  to  the  college  community.  Renewal 
requires  continued  financial  need,  maintenance  of  satisfactory  academic 
and  citizenship  standards,  and  participation  in  college  activities. 

Ministerial  Grants-In-Aid — Children  of  ministers  of  the  Central 
Pennsylvania  Annual  Conference  of  The  United  Methodist  Church 
receive  grants  equal  to  one-third  of  the  charges  for  tuition,  while 
children  of  ministers  of  other  Annual  Conferences  of  The  United 
Methodist  Church  and  of  other  denominations  receive  grants  equal  to 
one-fourth  of  the  charges  for  tuition.  Students  who  will  be  entering  the 
ministry  may  apply  for  a  preministerial  student  grant  equal  to  one- 
fourth  tuition.  Applicants  must  complete  and  submit  the  Financial  Aid 
Form  (F.A.F.)  referred  to  above  and  pre-ministerial  students  must  also 
submit  the  Application  for  Pre-Ministerial  Grant.  If  an  applicant  demon- 
strates more  need  for  financial  assistance  than  a  ministerial  grant-in-aid 

12 


I 


provides,  additional  types  of  aid  will  be  considered.  These  grants-in-aid 
are  part  of  a  total  financial  assistance  award  to  meet  demonstrated  need 
and  are  not  given  in  addition  to  awards  designed  to  meet  established 
needs. 

Federal  Basic  Educational  Opportunity  Grants  (BEOG) — These 
grants,  established  through  the  Educational  Amendments  of  1976, 
provide  up  to  $1,800  per  year  for  full-time  students  who  can  demon- 
strate financial  need.  Application  can  be  made  when  submitting  the 
Financial  Aid  Form  (F.A.F.)  or  by  separate  application  to  the  federal 
government  on  forms  which  are  available  in  secondary  school  guidance 
offices  and  the  Student  Aid  Office  at  Lycoming.  All  students  are  urged 
to  apply  for  this  program. 

Federal  Supplemental  Educational  Opportunity  Grants  (SEOG) — 
This  federal  government  program  provides  additional  assistance  to 
those  students  with  exceptional  financial  need.  Awards  are  made  in 
amounts  ranging  from  $200  to  $1,500  and  are  based  entirely  on  financial 
need.  Renewal  is  possible  if  the  applicant  has  no  reduction  in  financial 
need  in  succeeding  years. 

Federal  National  Direct  Student  Loans  (NDSL) — Federal  govern- 
ment loan  funds  are  available  through  the  National  Defense  Education 
Act  of  1958.  Low  interest  loans  of  up  to  $1,500  per  year  are  granted  on 


13 


the  basis  of  demonstrated  need.  Repayment  does  not  begin  until  after 
graduation  or  withdrawal  from  college.  Loans  are  normally  renewed 
annually  if  the  applicant  files  a  renewal  application  by  May  1st. 

Federal  College  Work-Study  Grants  (CWSP) — An  opportunity  is 
provided  through  this  program  for  students  to  earn  some  part  of  their 
college  expenses  and  to  gain  some  practical  experience  by  working  on 
campus  or  in  selected  off-campus  programs.  Federal  government  in- 
come guidelines  must  be  met  to  be  eligible  for  this  program.  Students 
who  do  not  meet  these  guidelines  should  consult  with  the  Career 
Development  Center  or  Student  Aid  Office  for  other  employment 
opportunities. 

Other  Sources  of  Financial  Assistance — 

State  Grants.  All  applicants  for  financial  aid  are  urged  to  investigate 
programs  sponsored  by  their  home  states  and  to  learn  about  and  heed 
application  deadlines.  Pennsylvania  applicants  should  apply  for  state 
aid  during  their  senior  year  in  high  school,  usually  before  April  30th.  For 
additional  information,  applicants  should  contact  their  secondary  school 
guidance  counselor  or  write:  Pennsylvania  Higher  Education  Assistance 
Agency  (PHEAA),  Towne  House,  Harrisburg,  PA  17102. 

State  Guaranteed  Loans.  Most  states,  including  Pennsylvania,  New 
Jersey,  and  New  York,  provide  state-guaranteed  loans  through  local 
banks.  This  program  provides  low  interest  loans  up  to  $2,500  per  year 
for  educational  expenses  with  repayments  extended  over  a  long-term 
payment  schedule.  Applicants  should  consult  their  local  banks  early  in 
their  senior  year. 

Community  Scholarships.  In  many  communities,  foundations  and 
organizations,  and  in  some  cases  high  schools,  provide  funds  for  worthy 
students.  Applicants  should  consult  with  their  secondary  school  gui- 
dance counselor  or  principal. 

Education  Financing  Plans.  The  Student  Aid  Office  at  Lycoming  will 
provide  information,  upon  request,  about  plans  which  enable  parents  to 
pay  college  expenses  on  a  monthly  basis  through  selected  companies. 

Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps  (ROTC)  Scholarships.  Students  who 
participate  in  the  Army  ROTC  are  eligible  for  three,  two,  and  one-year 
ROTC  scholarships  to  finance  tuition,  books,  laboratory  fees  and  other 
charges  with  the  exception  of  room  and  board.  ROTC  scholarship 
students  also  receive  $100  per  month  during  the  academic  year. 

Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps  (ROTC)  Stipends.  Students  who  partic- 
ipate in  the  Army  ROTC  program  receive  $100  per  academic  month  of 
their  junior  and  senior  years.  They  also  receive  half  of  a  second 
lieutenant's  pay  plus  travel  expenses  for  a  six-week  advanced  summer 
camp  between  the  junior  and  senior  years. 

ADDITIONAL  INFORMATION  CONCERNING  FINANCIAL  AID  CAN  BE 
OBTAINED  BY  WRITING  THE  STUDENT  AID  OFFICE,  LYCOMING  COL- 
LEGE, WILLIAMSPORT,  PA  17701  OR  BY  TELEPHONING  (717)  326-1951. 


14 


CHAPTER  IV 
THE  ACADEMIC  PROGRAM 


THE  DEGREE 

Lycoming  is  committed  to  the  principle  that  a  liberal  arts  education  is  the 
best  hope  for  an  enlightened  citizenry.  Consequently,  the  bachelor  of 
arts  degree  is  conferred  upon  the  student  who  has  completed  an 
educational  program  incorporating  the  two  principles  of  the  liberal  arts 
known  as  distribution  and  concentration.  The  objective  of  the  distribu- 
tion principle  is  to  insure  that  the  student  achieves  breadth  in  learning 
through  the  study  of  the  major  dimensions  of  human  inquiry,  namely, 
the  Humanities,  the  Social  Sciences  and  the  Natural  Sciences.  The 
objective  of  the  concentration  principle  is  to  provide  depth  of  learning 
through  completion  of  a  program  of  study  in  a  given  discipline  or 
subject  area  known  as  the  major. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE  DEGREE 

Every  degree  candidate  is  expected  to  complete  the  following  require- 
ments in  order  to  qualify  for  graduation: 

— Complete  the  Distribution  Program. 

— Complete  a  major  consisting  of  at  least  eight  courses  while 
achieving  a  minimum  grade  point  average  of  2.0  in  those  courses 
stipulated  as  comprising  the  major. 

— Earn  one  year  of  credit  in  Physical  Education.  All  students  must 
demonstrate  competence  in  swimming.  (Medical  exemptions 
may  be  granted  by  the  College  Physician  after  an  examination 
and  review  of  the  student's  medical  history  and  family 
physician's  report.) 

— Pass  a  minimum  of  128  semester  hours  (32  unit  courses)  with  a 
minimum  cumulative  average  of  2.0.  Additional  credits  beyond 
128  semester  hours  may  be  completed  provided  the  minimum  2.0 
cumulative  average  is  maintained. 

— Complete  in  residence  the  final  eight  courses  offered  for  the  degree 
at  Lycoming. 

— Satisfy  all  financial  obligations  incurred  at  the  College. 

— Complete  the  above  requirements  within  seven  years  of  con- 
tinuous enrollment  following  the  date  of  matriculation. 

All  exemptions  or  waivers  of  specific  requirements  are  made  by  the 
Committee  on  Academic  Standing. 

THE  DISTRIBUTION  PROGRAM 

A  course  can  be  used  to  satisfy  only  one  distribution  requirement. 
Courses  for  which  a  grade  of  "S"  is  recorded  may  not  be  used  toward 
the  fulfillment  of  the  distribution  requirements.  (Refer  to  page  20  for  an 
explanation  of  the  grading  system.)  A  course  in  any  of  the  following 

15 


distribution  requirements  refers  to  a  full-unit  (four  semester  hours) 
course  taken  at  Lycoming,  any  appropriate  combination  of  fractional 
unit  courses  taken  at  Lycoming  which  accumulate  to  four  semester 
hours,  or  any  single  course  of  three  or  more  semester  hours  transferred 
from  another  institution. 

English — All  students  are  required  to  pass  or  exempt  English  2, 
which  must  be  taken  no  later  than  the  second  semester  (usually  the 
Spring  Semester)  of  their  sophomore  year,  and  one  other  English 
course,  excluding  English  1.  In  addition,  all  students  who  have  not  been 
exempted  from  English  1  must  receive  a  mark  of  "Satisfactory"  in 
English  1  before  being  permitted  to  enroll  in  English  2.  Students  may  be 
exempted  from  English  1  on  the  basis  of  high  achievement  on  both 
objective  parts  of  the  CLEP  General  Examination  in  English  Composi- 
tion, which  may  be  taken  during  the  year  before  entrance  or  during 
Freshman  Orientation.  Furthermore,  some  students  may  be  eligible, 
after  consultation  with  the  English  Department,  to  exempt  English  2  on 
the  basis  of  their  CLEP  performance. 

Foreign  Language  or  Mathematics — Students  are  required  to  meet 
a  minimum  basic  requirement  in  either  a  foreign  language  or 
mathematics. 

Foreign  Language.  Students  may  choose  from  among  French,  Ger- 
man, Greek,  Hebrew,  or  Spanish  and  are  required  to  pass  two  courses 
on  the  intermediate  or  higher  course  level.  Placement  at  the  appropriate 
course  level  will  be  determined  by  the  faculty  of  the  Department  of 
Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures.  Students  who  have  completed  two 
or  more  years  of  a  given  language  in  high  school  are  not  admitted  for 
credit  to  the  elementary  course  in  the  same  foreign  language  except  by 
written  permission  of  the  chairman  of  the  department.  French  28  and 
Spanish  28  will  meet  part  of  this  requirement  only  if  the  section  taught 
in  the  language  is  completed. 

Mathematics.  Students  are  required  to  demonstrate  competence  in 
basic  algebra  and  to  pass  three  units  of  mathematics  other  than 
Mathematics  5.  Competence  in  basic  algebra  may  be  demonstrated 
either  by  passing  the  basic  algebra  section  of  the  Mathematics  Placement 
Examination  or  by  passing  Mathematics  5.  By  demonstrating  higher 
competence  on  the  Mathematics  Placement  Examination,  students  may 
reduce  the  requirement  to  two  units  of  mathematics. 

Religion  or  Philosophy — Students  are  required  to  pass  two  courses 
in  either  Religion  or  Philosophy. 

Fine  Arts — Students  are  required  to  pass  two  courses  as  indicated 
in  Art,  Literature,  Music  or  Theatre. 

Art.  Any  two  courses. 

Literature.  Any  two  literature  courses  selected  from  the  offerings  of 
the  Departments  of  English  and  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures. 

Music.  Any  of  the  following  combinations  of  music  offerings  total- 
ing the  equivalent  of  eight  semester  hours: 

— Two  courses  from  those  numbered  Music  10  through  Music  46. 
— Eight  semesters  of  applied  music  (private  lessons)  and/or  en- 

16 


semble  (choir,  band)  from  courses  numbered  60  through  69, 
earned  fractionally  as  follows: 
— (1)  For  private  lessons  (Music  60  through  66),  a  one-half  hour 
lesson  per  week  earns  one  half  hour  credit,  and  a  one-hour  lesson 
earns  one  hour  of  credit.  Note:  no  more  than  one  hour  of  private 
lessons  may  be  taken  in  one  semester,  and  there  are  extra  fees  for 
these  lessons.  (For  details  see  Music  Department  course  offerings 
described  elsewhere  in  this  catalog.) 
— (2)  Credit  may  be  earned  for  participation  in  the  college  choir 
(Music  68)  and/or  band  (Music  69);  however,  a  student  may  earn 
no  more  than  one  hour  each  semester  even  though  participating 
in  both  band  and  choir.  (For  further  details  please  see  the  Music 
Department  offerings  elsewhere  in  this  catalog.) 
Theatre.  Any  two  courses  numbered  10  and  above. 
Natural  Science — Students  are  required  to  pass  any  two  courses  in 
one  of  the  following  disciplines:  Astronomy/Physics,  Biology, 
Chemistry. 

History  and  Social  Science — Students  are  required  to  pass  two 
courses  as  indicated  in  Economics,   History,   Political  Science,   Psy- 
chology, or  Sociology/ Anthropology. 
Economics.  Any  two  courses. 
History.  Any  two  courses. 
Political  Science.  Any  two  courses. 

Psychology.  Psychology  10,  plus  one  course  usually  chosen  from 
among  Psychology  15,  16,  30,  31,  32,  or  38. 

Sociology  I  Anthropology.    Sociology/Anthropology    10    plus    another 
course. 


THE  MAJOR 

Students  are  required  to  complete  a  series  of  courses  in  one  departmen- 
tal or  interdisciplinary  (established  or  individual)  major.  Specific  course 
requirements  for  each  major  offered  by  the  college  are  listed  in  the 
Curriculum  section  of  this  catalog,  beginning  on  page  39.  Students  must 
earn  a  precise  2.0  or  better  average  in  those  courses  stipulated  as 
comprising  the  major.  (This  requirement  is  not  met  by  averaging  the 
grades  for  all  courses  completed  in  the  major  department.)  Students 
must  declare  a  major  by  the  beginning  of  their  junior  year.  Departmental 
and  established  interdisciplinary  majors  are  declared  in  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar,  whereas  individual  interdisciplinary  majors  must  be  ap- 
proved by  the  Committee  on  Curriculum  Development.  Students  may 
complete  more  than  one  major,  each  of  which  will  be  recorded  on  the 
transcript.  Students  may  be  removed  from  major  status  if  they  are  not 
making  satisfactory  progress  in  the  major.  This  action  is  taken  by  the 
Dean  of  the  College  upon  the  recommendation  of  the  department, 
coordinating  committee  (for  established  interdisciplinary  majors)  or 
Curriculum  Development  Committee  (for  individual  interdisciplinary 
majors).  The  decision  of  the  Dean  of  the  College  may  be  appealed  to  the 

17 


Academic  Standing  Committee  by  the  student  involved  or  the  recom- 
mending department  or  committee. 

Departmental  Majors — Departmental  majors  are  available  in  the 
following  areas: 


Accounting 

Art 

Astronomy 

Biology 

Business  Administration 

Chemistry 

Economics 

English 

Foreign  Languages  and 

Literatures 

French,  German,  Spanish 

Established  Interdisciplinary  Majors — The  following  Established 
Interdisciplinary  Majors  include  course  work  in  two  or  more  depart- 
ments: 


History 

Mathematics 

Music 

Philosophy 

Physics 

Political  Science 

Psychology 

Religion 

Sociology/Anthropology 

Theatre 


Accounting-Mathematics 
American  Studies 
Criminal  Justice 
International  Studies 


Literature 

Mass  Communications 

Near  East  Culture  and  Archeology 


Individual  Interdisciplinary  Majors — Students  may  design  a  major 
which  is  unique  to  their  needs  and  objectives  and  which  combines 
course  work  in  more  than  one  department.  This  major  is  developed  in 
consultation  with  the  student's  faculty  adviser  and  with  a  panel  of 
faculty  members  from  each  of  the  sponsoring  departments.  The  applica- 
tion is  acted  upon  by  the  Curriculum  Development  Committee.  The 
major  normally  consists  of  ten  courses  beyond  those  taken  to  satisfy  the 
distribution  requirements.  Students  are  expected  to  complete  at  least  six 
courses  at  the  junior  or  senior  level.  Examples  of  individual  in- 
terdisciplinary majors  are  Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities,  Illustration  In 
the  Print  Medium,  Environmental  Law,  Advertising,  Human  Behavior, 
and  Images  of  Man. 


ACADEMIC  ADVISEMENT 

One  advantage  of  a  small  college  is  the  rich  experience  gained  by  the 
close  association  of  students  and  faculty.  The  advisement  program  at 
Lycoming  enables  students  to  discuss  academic  and  other  problems  as 
well  as  opportunities  with  faculty  advisers,  instructors,  and  the  staffs  of 
the  Dean  of  the  College  and  the  Dean  of  Student  Services. 

At  the  beginning  of  their  first  semester  of  enrollment,  freshmen  are 
assigned  a  faculty  adviser  who  is  prepared  to  assist  new  college  students 
with  the  challenges  of  an  unfamiliar  social  and  academic  environment. 
All  students  are  required  to  have  a  faculty  adviser,  and  students  who 
have  declared  a  major  must  have  an  adviser  from  within  the  major 
department  or  program. 

Although  the  advisement  program  is  an  important  part  of  the 
Lycoming  academic  experience,  students  are  expected  to  accept  full 
responsibility  for  their  academic  programs,  including  satisfactory  com- 
pletion of  program  and  college-wide  requirements. 

Special  advising  for  selected  professions  is  provided  by  the  follow- 
ing faculty  advisory  groups:  Health  Professions  Advisory  Committee, 
Legal  Professions  Advisory  Committee,  Medical  Technology  Advisory 
Committee,  Theological  Professions  Advisory  Committee.  Students 
interested  in  these  professions  should  register  with  the  respective 
committee  during  their  first  semester  of  enrollment  at  Lycoming  or  as 
soon  as  they  make  a  decision  to  enter  the  respective  profession. 

REGISTRATION 

During  the  registration  period,  students  file  a  schedule  form  with  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar.  The  filing  of  this  form  by  students  and  its 
acceptance  by  the  College  is  evidence  of  a  commitment  by  students  to 
perform  in  the  courses  listed  to  the  best  of  their  abilities.  Any  change  in 
the  schedule  of  courses  listed  on  the  form,  including  changes  in 
sections,  without  the  formal  approval  of  the  Office  of  the  Registrar  will 
result  in  a  grade  of  F.  Students  may  not  receive  credit  in  courses  in 
which  they  are  not  registered.  Registration  procedures  may  not  be 
initiated  after  the  close  of  the  registration  period. 

During  the  first  ten  days  of  classes  students  may  drop  any  course 
without  any  record  of  such  enrollment  appearing  on  the  permanent 
record,  and  they  may  add  any  course  that  is  not  closed,  but  the  approval 
of  the  instructor  is  required  during  the  last  five  days.  Students  wishing 
to  drop  a  course  between  the  tenth  day  and  the  twelfth  week  of  classes 
must  secure  a  withdrawal  form  from  the  Office  of  the  Registrar,  which 
is  presented  to  the  instructor  of  the  course  in  question.  The  instructor 
assigns  a  withdrawal  grade  based  on  the  level  of  the  student's  per- 
formance from  the  beginning  of  the  course  to  the  date  of  withdrawal. 
Withdrawal  grades  are  not  computed  in  the  grade  point  average. 
Students  may  not  withdraw  from  courses  after  the  twelfth  week  of  a 
semester,  and  the  comparable  period  during  the  May  and  Summer 
Terms. 

19 


THE  UNIT  COURSE  SYSTEM 

Instruction  at  Lycoming  College  is  organized,  with  few  exceptions,  on  a 
departmental  basis.  Most  courses  are  unit  courses,  meaning  that  each 
course  taken  is  considered  to  be  equivalent  to  four  semester  hours  of 
credit.  Exceptions  occur  in  applied  Music  courses,  which  are  offered  for 
either  one-half  or  one  semester  hour  of  credit,  and  in  departments  that 
have  elected  to  offer  certain  courses  for  the  equivalent  of  two  semester 
hours  of  credit.  Further,  Independent  Studies  and  Internships  carrying 
two  semester  hours  of  credit  may  be  designed.  The  normal  student 
course  load  is  four  courses  during  the  Fall  and  Spring  Semesters. 
Students  who  elect  to  attend  the  special  sessions  may  enroll  in  one 
course  during  the  May  Term  and  one  or  two  courses  in  the  Summer 
Term.  A  student  is  considered  full  time  when  enrolled  for  a  minimum  of 
three  courses  during  the  Fall  or  Spring  Semesters,  one  course  for  the 
May  Term  and  two  courses  for  the  Summer  Term.  Students  may  enroll 
in  five  courses  during  the  Fall  and  Spring  Semesters  if  they  are 
Lycoming  Scholars  or  were  admitted  to  the  Dean's  List  at  the  end  of  the 
previous  semester.  Exceptions  may  be  granted  by  the  Dean  of  the 
College.  Overloads  are  not  permitted  during  the  May  and  Summer 
Terms. 


THE  SYSTEM  OF  GRADING  AND  REPORTING  OF  GRADES 

The  evaluation  of  student  performance  in  credit  courses  is  indicated  by 
the  use  of  traditional  letter  symbols.  These  symbols  and  their  definitions 
are  as  follows: 

A    Excellent  — Signifies  superior  achievement  through  mas- 

tery of  content  or  skills  and  demonstration  of 
creative  and  independent  thinking. 

B     High  Pass  — Signifies  better-than-average  achievement 

wherein  the  student  reveals  insight  and  un- 
derstanding. 

C     Pass  — Signifies   satisfactory   achievement  wherein 

the  student's  work  has  been  of  average  quali- 
ty and  quantity.  The  student  has  demon- 
strated basic  competence  in  the  subject  area 
and  may  enroll  in  additional  course  work. 

D    Low  Pass  — Signifies  unsatisfactory  achievement  wherein 

the  student  met  only  the  minimum  require- 
ments for  passing  the  course  and  should  not 
continue  in  the  subject  area  without  de- 
partmental advice. 

F     Failing  — Signifies  that  the  student  has  not  met  the 

minimum  requirements  for  passing  the 
course. 

I      Incomplete  Work         — Assigned  in  accordance  with  the  restrictions 

of  established  academic  policy. 

20 


S     Passing  Work,  — Converted  from  traditional  grade  of  D  or 

no  grade  assigned  better. 

U     Failing  work,  — Converted  from  traditional  grade  of  F. 

no  grade  assigned. 
X     Audit  — Work  as  an  auditor,  for  which  no  credit  is 

earned. 
W    Withdrawal  — Signifies  withdrawal  from  the  course  early  in 

the  term  when  it  cannot  be  determined  that 

the  student  is  passing  or  failing. 
WP  Withdrawal,  passing  — The   student   was   passing   at   the    time   of 

withdrawal;  no  credit  is  earned. 
WF  Withdrawal,  failing     — The    student    was    failing    at    the    time    of 

withdrawal;  no  credit  is  earned. 

Use  of  the  satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grading  option  is  limited  as 
follows  (this  does  not  apply  to  English  1): 

— Students  may  enroll  on  an  S/U  basis  in  no  more  than  one  course 
per  semester  and  no  more  than  four  courses  during  their  under- 
graduate career; 

— S/U  courses  completed  after  declaration  of  the  major  may  not  be 
used  to  satisfy  a  requirement  of  that  major,  including  courses 
required  by  the  major  department  which  are  offered  by  other 
departments.  (Instructor-designed  courses  are  excepted  from  this 
limitation.) 

— Courses  for  which  a  grade  of  S  is  recorded  may  not  be  used 
toward  fulfillment  of  any  distribution  requirement. 

— Students  may  not  enroll  in  English  2  on  an  S/U  basis. 

— A  course  selected  on  an  S/U  basis  which  is  subsequently 
withdrawn  will  not  count  toward  the  four-course  limit. 

— Instructor-designated  courses  may  be  offered  during  the  May 
Term  with  the  approval  of  the  Dean  of  the  College.  Such  courses 
are  not  counted  toward  the  four-course  limit. 

— S/U  grades  are  not  computed  in  the  grade  point  average. 

— Students  electing  the  S/U  option  may  designate  a  minimum 
acceptable  letter  grade  of  A  or  B.  If  the  letter  grade  actually  earned 
by  the  student  equals  or  exceeds  this  minimum,  that  letter  grade 
is  entered  on  the  student's  permanent  record  and  is  computed  in 
the  grade  point  average.  In  such  a  case,  the  course  does  not  count 
toward  the  four-course  limit.  If  the  student  does  not  indicate  a 
minimum  acceptable  letter  grade  or  if  the  letter  grade  actually 
earned  is  lower  than  the  minimum  designated  by  the  student,  the 
Registrar  substitutes  an  S  for  any  passing  grade  (A,  B,  C,  or  D) 
and  a  U  for  an  F  grade. 

— Students  must  declare  the  S/U  option  before  the  end  of  the  period 
during  which  courses  may  be  added  during  any  given  semester 
or  term. 

— Instructors  are  not  notified  which  of  their  students  are  enrolled 
on  an  S/U  basis. 

21 


— Students  electing  the  S/U  option  are  expected  to  perform  the 
same  work  as  those  enrolled  on  a  regular  basis. 

Incomplete  grades  may  be  given  if,  for  absolutely  unavoidable 
reasons  (usually  medical  in  nature),  the  student  has  not  been  able  to 
complete  the  work  requisite  to  the  course.  An  incomplete  grade  must  be 
removed  within  six  weeks  of  the  next  regular  semester. 

ATTENDANCE 

The  academic  program  at  Lycoming  is  based  upon  the  assumption  that 
there  is  value  in  class  attendance  for  all  students.  Individual  instructors 
have  the  prerogative  of  establishing  reasonable  absence  regulations  in 
any  course.  The  student  is  responsible  for  learning  and  observing  these 
regulations. 

ACADEMIC  STANDING  AND  ACADEMIC  HONESTY 

Students  are  in  good  academic  standing  when  their  cumulative  and 
semester  grade  point  averages  are  precisely  2.0  ("C")  or  better.  If  either 
of  these  averages  is  below  this  level,  the  student  is  considered  to  be  in 
academic  difficulty  and  is  placed  on  probation  for  one  semester,  or 
suspended  for  one  semester,  or  dismissed  from  the  College  according  to 
policies  established  by  the  faculty.  Students  are  subject  to  dismissal  at 
the  time  the  number  of  unsuccessful  course  attempts  (grades  F,  U,  W, 
WP,  WF)  exceeds  24  semester  hours  except  in  the  case  of  withdrawal  for 
medical  or  psychological  reasons.  Exceptions  to  this  maximum  may  be 
granted  by  the  Academic  Standing  Committee  in  the  case  of  readmis- 
sion  and  transfer  applicants. 

The  integrity  of  the  academic  process  of  the  College  requires 
honesty  in  all  phases  of  the  instructional  program.  The  College  assumes 
that  students  are  committed  to  the  principle  of  academic  honesty. 
Students  who  fail  to  honor  this  commitment  are  subject  to  dismissal 
from  the  College.  Procedural  guidelines  and  rules  for  the  adjudication  of 
cases  of  academic  dishonesty  are  printed  in  The  Faculty  Handbook  and  The 
Pathfinder  (the  student  academic  handbook),  copies  of  which  are  avail- 
able in  the  library. 

CREDIT  BY  EXAMINATION 

Advanced  Placement — Entering  freshmen  who  have  completed  an 
advanced  course  while  in  secondary  school  and  who  have  taken  the 
appropriate  advanced  placement  examination  of  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board  (CEEB)  are  encouraged  to  apply  for  credit  and 
advanced  placement  at  the  time  of  admission.  A  grade  of  three  or  above 
is  considered  satisfactory. 

College  Level  Examination  Program  (CLEP) — Students  may  earn 
college  credit  for  superior  achievement  through  CLEP.  By  achieving  at 
the  75th  percentile  or  above  on  the  General  Examinations  and  the  65th 
percentile  or  above  on  approved  Subject  Examinations,  students  may 

22 


earn  up  to  50  percent  of  the  course  requirements  for  a  bachelor  of  arts 
degree.  Although  these  examinations  may  be  taken  after  enrollment, 
new  students  who  are  competent  in  a  given  area  are  encouraged  to  take 
the  examinations  of  their  choice  during  the  second  semester  of  their 
senior  year  so  that  Lycoming  will  have  the  test  scores  available  for 
registration  advisement  for  the  first  semester  of  enrollment.  Further 
information  about  CLEP  may  be  obtained  through  the  secondary  school 
guidance  office  or  the  Office  of  Admissions  at  Lycoming  College. 


ACADEMIC  HONORS 

Dean's  List — Students  are  admitted  to  the  Dean's  List  at  the  end  of 
the  Fall  and  Spring  Semesters  if  they  have  completed  at  least  four 
courses  with  other  than  S/U  grades  and  have  a  minimum  grade  point 
average  of  precisely  3.50  for  the  semester. 

Graduation  Honors — Students  are  awarded  the  bachelor  of  arts 
degree  with  honors  when  they  have  earned  the  following  precise  grade 
point  averages  based  on  all  courses  attempted,  including  courses 
transferred  from  other  institutions  to  Lycoming: 

summa  cum  laude  3.90-4.00 

magna  cum  laude 3.50-3.89 

cum  laude 3.25-3.49 

Academic  Honor  Awards  and  Societies — Superior  academic 
achievement  is  recognized  through  the  conferring  of  awards  at  the 
annual  Honors  Day  Convocation  and  Commencement  and  through 
election  to  membership  in  the  following  honor  societies: 

Blue  Key  Freshman  Men 

Gold  Key  Freshman  Women 

Omicron  Delta  Epsilon Economics 

Phi  Alpha  Theta  History 

Psi  Chi Psychology 

Sigma  Pi  Sigma  Physics 

Pi  Gamma  Mu Social  Science 

Pi  Sigma  Alpha  Political  Science 

Phi  Kappa  Phi General  Academic 

Departmental  Honors — Honors  projects  are  normally  undertaken 
only  in  a  student's  major  and  are  available  only  to  exceptionally  well- 
qualified  students  who  have  a  solid  background  in  the  area  of  the  project 
and  are  capable  of  considerable  self-direction.  The  prerequisites  for 
registration  in  an  honors  program  are  as  follows: 

— A  faculty  member  from  the  department(s)  in  which  the  honors 
project  is  to  be  undertaken  must  agree  to  be  the  director  and  must 
secure  departmental  approval  of  the  project. 
— The  director,  in  consultation  with  the  student,  must  convene  a 
committee  consisting  of  two  faculty  members  from  the  depart- 
ment in  which  the  project  is  to  be  undertaken,  one  of  whom  is  the 
director  of  the  project,  and  one  faculty  member  from  each  of  two 

23 


^ 


other  departments  related  to  the  subject  matter  of  the  study. 
— The  honors  committee  must  then  certify  by  their  signatures  on 
the  application  that  the  project  in  question  is  academically  legit- 
imate and  worthy  of  pursuit  as  an  honors  project,  and  that  the 
student  in  question  is  qualified  to  pursue  the  project. 
— The  project  must  be  approved  by  the  Committee  on  Individual 

Studies. 
Students  successfully  complete  honors  projects  by  satisfying  the 
following  conditions  in  accordance  with  guidelines  established  by  the 
Committee  on  Individual  Studies: 

— The  student  must  produce  a  substantial  research  paper,  critical 
study,  or  creative  project.  If  the  end  product  is  a  creative  project, 
a  critical  paper  analyzing  the  techniques  and  principles  employed 
and  the  nature  of  the  achievement  represented  in  the  project  shall 
be  submitted. 
— The  student  must  successfully  explain  and  defend  the  work  in  a 

final  oral  examination  given  by  the  honors  committee. 
— The  honors  committee  must  certify  that  the  student  has  suc- 
cessfully defended  the  project  and  that  the  student's  achievement 
is  clearly  superior  to  that  which  would  ordinarily  be  required  to 
earn  a  grade  of  "A"  in  a  regular  independent  studies  course. 
— The   Committee  on  Individual   Studies   must  certify  that   the 

student  has  satisfied  all  of  the  conditions  mentioned  above. 
Except  in  unusual  circumstances,  honors  projects  are  expected  to 
involve  independent  study  in  two  consecutive  unit  courses.  Successful 
completion  of  the  honors  project  will  cause  the  designation  of  honors  in 
that  department  to  be  placed  upon  the  permanent  record.  Acceptable 
theses  are  deposited  in  the  college  library.  In  the  event  that  the  study  is 
not  completed  successfully,  or  is  not  deemed  worthy  of  honors,  the 
student  shall  be  re-registered  in  independent  studies  and  given  a  final 
grade  for  the  course. 

24 


SPECIAL  FEATURES 

Independent  Studies — Independent  Studies  are  available  to  any 
qualified  student  who  wishes  to  engage  in  and  receive  academic  credit 
for  any  academically  legitimate  course  of  study  for  which  he  or  she  could 
not  otherwise  receive  credit,  and  may  be  pursued  at  any  level  (introduc- 
tory, intermediate,  or  advanced)  and  in  any  department,  whether  or  not 
the  student  is  a  major  in  that  department.  Studies  projects  which 
duplicate  catalog  courses  are  sometimes  possible,  and  are  subject  to  the 
same  provisions  which  apply  to  all  studies  projects.  In  order  for  a 
student  to  be  registered  in  an  independent  study  course,  the  following 
conditions  must  be  satisfied: 

— An  appropriate  member  of  the  faculty  must  agree  to  supervise  the 
project  and  must  certify  by  signing  the  application  form  that  the 
project  is  academically  legitimate  and  involves  an  amount  of  work 
appropriate  for  the  amount  of  academic  credit  requested,  and  that 
the  student  in  question  is  qualified  to  pursue  the  project. 
— The  studies  project  must  be  approved  by  the  chairman  of  the 

department  in  which  the  studies  project  is  to  be  undertaken. 
— After  the  project  is  approved  by  the  instructor  and  by  the 
chairman  of  the  appropriate  department,  the  studies  project  must 
be  approved  by  the  Committee  on  Individual  Studies. 
In  addition,  participation  in  independent  studies  projects,  with  the 
exception  of  those  which  duplicate  catalog  courses,  is  subject  to  the 
following: 

— Students  may  not  engage  in  more  than  one  independent  studies 
project  during  any  given  semester. 

— Students  may  not  engage  in  more  than  two  independent  studies 
projects  during  their  academic  career  at  Lycoming  College. 

As  with  other  academic  policies,  any  exceptions  to  these  two  rules 
must  be  approved  by  the  Academic  Standing  Committee. 

Internship  Program — An  internship  is  a  course  jointly  sponsored 
by  the  College  and  a  public  or  private  agency  or  subdivision  of  the 
College  in  which  a  student  is  enabled  to  earn  credit  by  participating  in 
some  active  capacity  as  an  assistant,  aide,  or  apprentice.  The  objectives 
of  the  internship  program  are  (1)  to  further  the  development  of  a  central 
core  of  values,  awarenesses,  strategies,  skills,  and  information  through 
experiences  outside  the  classroom  or  other  campus  situations,  and  (2)  to 
facilitate  the  integration  of  theory  and  practice  by  encouraging  students 
to  relate  their  on-campus  academic  experiences  more  directly  to  society 
in  general,  and  to  possible  career  and  other  post-baccalaureate  objec- 
tives in  particular. 

Any  junior  or  senior  student  in  good  academic  standing  may 
petition  the  Committee  on  Individual  Studies  for  approval  to  serve  as  an 
intern  for  one  or  two  semesters.  A  maximum  of  16  credits  can  be  earned. 
Guidelines  for  program  development,  assignment  of  tasks,  and 
academic  requirements  such  as  exams,  papers,  reports,  grades,  etc.,  are 
established  in  consultation  with  a  faculty  director  at  Lycoming  and  an 

25 


agency  supervisor  at  the  place  of  internship. 

Students  with  diverse  majors  have  participated  in  a  wide  variety  of 
internships,  including  the  Allenwood  Prison  Camp,  Community  Health 
Center,  County  Commissioners  Office,  Department  of  Environmental 
Resources,  Head  Start,  Historical  Society,  business  and  accounting 
firms,  law  offices,  hospitals,  social  service  agencies,  banks  and  con- 
gressional offices. 

May  Term — The  May  Term  is  a  four-week  voluntary  session 
designed  to  provide  students  with  experimental  and  special  courses  that 
are  not  normally  available  during  the  Fall,  Spring,  and  Summer  Terms. 
Some  courses  are  offered  on  campus,  while  others  involve  travel.  A 
number  offer  interdisciplinary  credit.  Illustrations  of  the  types  of  courses 
offered  during  the  May  Term  are  as  follows:  (a)  Study-Travel:  Cultural 
Tours  of  Germany,  Spain,  France,  Ireland,  and  the  United  Kingdom; 
Archeological  Expeditions  to  the  Middle  East;  Oceanographic  Expedi- 
tions in  Bermuda;  Literature  of  the  Sea  on  location  in  the  Caribbean; 
Anthropological  Expeditions  to  New  Mexico  to  study  tri-cultural  com- 
munities; Utopian  Communities;  Photography  Workshops  in  Vermont; 
Revolutionary  and  Civil  War  Sites,  (b)  On-Campus:  Financial  Statement 
Analysis,  Silk-screen  Printing,  Field  Geology,  History  of  Astronomy, 
Field  Ornithology,  Chemical  Analysis,  Managing  the  Small  Business, 
Women  in  Management,  Energy  Economics,  Public  School  Curriculum, 
Writer's  Seminar,  Modern  American  Humor,  The  Norman  Kingdom, 
Practical  Logic,  Psychology  of  Group  Processes,  Ancient  Near  East 
Religion,  Juvenile  Delinquency.  Some  courses  offered  during  the  Fall 
and  Spring  Semesters  are  offered  during  the  May  Term  as  well. 

Although  participation  in  the  May  Term  is  voluntary,  student 
response  has  been  outstanding  with  approximately  25  to  30  percent  of 
the  student  body  enrolling.  In  addition  to  the  courses  themselves, 
attractions  include  small  and  informal  classes  and  reduced  tuition  rates. 

Study  Abroad — Students  have  the  opportunity  to  study  abroad 
under  the  auspices  of  approved  universities  and  agencies.  While  study 
abroad  is  particularly  attractive  to  students  majoring  in  foreign  lan- 
guages and  literatures,  this  opportunity  is  open  to  all  students  in  good 
academic  standing.  Mastery  of  a  foreign  language  is  desirable  but  not 
required  in  all  programs.  A  file  of  opportunities  is  available  in  the 
Library. 

NOTE:  Lycoming  College  cannot  assume  responsibility  for  the  health,  safety,  or  welfare 
of  any  student  engaged  in  or  en  route  to  or  from  any  off-campus  study  or  activity  not 
under  the  exclusive  jurisdiction  of  this  institution. 

Auditors — Any  person  may  audit  courses  at  Lycoming  at  one-half 
tuition  per  course.  Laboratory  and  other  special  fees  must  be  paid  in  full. 
Examinations,  papers  and  other  evaluation  devices  are  not  required  of 
auditors,  but  individual  arrangements  may  be  made  to  complete  such 
exercises  with  the  consent  of  the  instructor. 

As  a  special  service  to  the  Williamsport  and  surrounding  com- 

26 


munities,  Lycoming  offers  any  person  within  commuting  distance  an 
opportunity  to  audit,  tuition-free,  one  course  per  semester.  This  pro- 
gram, known  as  the  Lycoming  Experimental  Audit  Program  (LEAP),  is 
available  during  the  Fall  and  Spring  Semesters  as  well  as  the  May  and 
Summer  Terms.  Participants  pay  a  $15.00  application  fee  each  semester 
they  enroll.  Official  transcripts  are  not  maintained  for  LEAP  enrollments 
and  credit  is  not  awarded. 

Part-Time  Students — Any  person  may  take  up  to  two  courses 
during  any  semester  or  summer  term  (one  in  May  Term).  Part-time 
special  students  pay  the  $15.00  application  fee  for  the  first  registration 
and  the  part-time  tuition  rate  in  effect  at  the  time  of  each  enrollment. 

Life-Long  Learning — The  program  consists  of  short  (3-7  weeks) 
non-credit  courses  offered  throughout  the  year.  Courses  have  included: 
How  to  Listen  to  a  Symphony,  Photography,  Investment  Fundamen- 
tals, Preparation  of  Federal  Personal  Income  Tax  Forms,  Astronomy 
Today,  The  American  Revolution,  Inflation,  Rapid  Reading,  Greek  Folk 
Dancing  and  Culture. 

STUDENT  RECORDS 

The  policy  regarding  student  educational  records  is  designed  to  protect 
the  privacy  of  students  against  unwarranted  intrusions  and  is  consistent 
with  Section  438  of  the  General  Education  Provision  Act  (commonly 
known  as  the  Family  Educational  Rights  and  Privacy  Act  of  1974,  as 
amended).  The  details  of  the  college  policy  on  student  records  and  the 
procedures  for  gaining  access  to  student  records  are  contained  in  the 
current  issue  of  The  Pathfinder,  which  is  available  in  the  Library  and  the 
Office  of  the  Dean  of  the  College. 

THE  LYCOMING  COLLEGE  SCHOLAR  PROGRAM 

The  Lycoming  College  Scholar  Program  is  a  special  program  for  special 
people.  It  is  designed  to  meet  the  needs  and  aspirations  of  highly 
motivated  students  of  superior  intellectual  ability.  It  offers  such  people 
the  opportunity  to  develop  their  full  potential  through  an  innovative 
and  demanding  academic  course  of  study.  It  is  a  constantly  evolving, 
carefully  supervised  program  which  keeps  pace  with  new  trends  in 
education.  Since  it  consists  of  carefully  selected  and  supervised  stu- 
dents, it  can  incorporate  ideas  and  policies  far  in  advance  of  the 
institution  as  a  whole. 

The  present  Scholar  Program  offers  a  broadened  core  curriculum  so 
that  its  students  will  have  the  kind  of  strong  background  in  the  liberal 
arts  which  educational  leaders  throughout  the  nation  now  recognize  as 
a  fundamental  necessity  in  coping  with  a  rapidly  changing,  increasingly 
complex  world.  The  program  also  attempts  to  help  students  understand 
the  relationships  between  the  academic  disciplines  by  incorporating 
special  seminars  which  draw  together  the  specific  content  of  various 
fields  into  a  coherent  whole  so  that  the  information  can  be  applied  to 
important  issues  of  the  present  as  well  as  those  of  the  future. 

27 


In  addition,  the  program  recognizes  the  positive  aspects  of  a  major, 
which  prepares  students  to  assume  specific  roles  in  life  by  providing 
participants  the  opportunity  to  engage  in  serious  independent  study 
and  thought  culminating  in  a  major  senior  project  which  is  presented  to 
their  fellow  scholars. 

In  short,  the  Scholar  Program  represents  a  strong  commitment  on 
the  part  of  Lycoming  College  to  meet  the  needs  of  talented  students  who 
themselves  have  a  sincere  commitment  to  high  quality  scholarship  and 
intellectual  development. 

Students  are  admitted  to  the  program  through  invitation  by  the 
Scholar  Council,  a  group  which  oversees  all  aspects  of  the  program.  The 
Council  consists  of  four  students  elected  by  current  scholars  and  four 
faculty  selected  by  the  Dean  of  the  College.  The  guidelines  governing 
selection  of  new  scholars  are  flexible,  since  exceptional  individuals 
express  their  talents  in  different  ways.  Some  do  so  through  traditional 
indicators  of  academic  excellence  such  as  superior  rank  in  class,  high 
GPA,  or  superior  SAT  scores;  others  through  extracurricular  activities 
which  demand  a  high  degree  of  intellectual  curiosity,  motivation, 
imagination,  creativity,  or  desire  for  excellence,  and  still  others  through 
an  obvious  commitment  to  the  value  of  intellectual  dialogue,  indepen- 
dent thought,  and  the  concept  of  an  outstanding  liberal  arts  education. 

To  remain  in  the  program  students  must  maintain  an  average  of 
3.00  or  better.  Students  dropping  below  this  average  will  be  placed  on 
probation  until  their  average  is  again  satisfactory  or  they  are  asked  to 
leave  the  program.  To  graduate  as  a  Scholar,  students  must  have  at  least 
a  3.25  average  for  all  courses  taken  to  meet  the  curricular  requirements 
of  the  Scholar  Program  and  all  courses  in  the  major. 

To  graduate  as  a  Scholar,  students  must  take  the  First  Year  Scholar 
Seminar  during  their  first  semester  in  the  Program.  In  addition,  the 
following  core  requirements  must  be  completed. 

A.  Writing.  Scholars  must  display  above  average  writing  skills  by 
the  end  of  the  sophomore  year,  as  certified  by  the  English  Department 
and  the  Scholar  Council.  This  requirement  may  be  met  by  obtaining  a 
570  on  the  CLEP  General  Examination  in  English  or  by  a  grade  of  "B"  in 
English  2.  Students  not  meeting  the  requirement  in  either  of  these  ways 
by  the  end  of  the  freshman  year  will  be  asked  to  do  extra  work  until  this 
competency  is  reached. 

B.  Foreign  Language.  Scholars  must  demonstrate  the  competency 
of  students  who  successfully  complete  the  second  semester  of  an 
intermediate  level  course,  or  one  numbered  higher,  in  a  foreign  lan- 
guage, or  by  demonstrating  an  equivalent  proficiency  in  an  exam 
designated  by  the  Department  of  Foreign  Languages. 

C.  History.  Scholars  must  complete  History  10,  11  (Europe  1500- 
present). 

D.  Physical  Education.  Scholars  must  satisfy  the  same  physical 
education  requirements  stipulated  by  the  College  for  all  students. 
Specifically,  Scholars  must  demonstrate  competence  in  swimming  and 
earn  one  year  of  credit  in  Physical  Education  unless  exempted  for 
medical  reasons. 

28 


E.  Scholars  must  also  complete  10  courses  and  four  Scholar  Semi- 
nars in  either  of  two  tracks  in  each  of  the  four  divisions  of  study 
described  below.  In  each  track  chosen,  students  will  select  no  less  than 
two  courses  (three  in  division  D)  for  a  total  of  nine  plus  one  additional 
which  may  be  taken  in  any  of  the  four  selected  tracks.  After  work  in  a 
given  track  is  completed,  students  will  take  a  Scholar  Seminar  specifical- 
ly designed  for  that  track.  (Students  may  petition  the  Scholar  Council  if 
they  wish  to  substitute  a  course  or  courses  in  any  track). 

F.  A  Senior  Project  must  be  completed  based  on  some  aspects  of 
the  major.  Normally  this  project  will  be  done  as  either  an  independent 
or  honors  study  sponsored  by  an  instructor  from  the  major  field  and  a 
faculty  member  of  the  Council. 

G.  Scholars  must  complete  a  major  and  32  units,  exclusive  of  the 
Scholar  Seminars. 

THE  FOUR  DIVISIONS 

Division  A  Studies  in  Society 

Using  a  variety  of  methodologies,  this  division  will  study  the 
interrelationships  among  the  historic,  economic,  political,  sociological 
and  other  cultural  factors  that  contribute  to  an  understanding  of  people 
and  their  institutions  in  a  social  context. 

Track  Al.  The  Third  World 

This  track  will  concentrate  on  the  "Third"  or  developing  world. 
Perhaps  as  many  as  two-thirds  of  the  world's  population  live  in  lesser 
developed  nations.  Students  selecting  this  track  must  complete  at  least 
one  of  the  following:  Economics  45,  Political  Science  38, 
Sociology/Anthropology  16.  And  they  must  complete  another  of  those 
courses  or  one  from:  History  29,  Sociology/ Anthropology  22;  Religion 
23,  24. 

Track  Al.  The  American  Society 

Courses  in  this  track  will  primarily  concern  themselves  with  Ameri- 
can institutions  and  values  as  seen  from  historical  and  contemporary 
perspectives.  Time  will  be  spent  looking  at  the  structure  of  American 
society  and  its  origins,  problems  and  prospects.  Students  selecting  this 
track  must  complete  at  least  one  of  the  following:  American  Studies  10; 
Sociology /Anthropology  32;  Political  Science  32,  47;  Economics  31,  32. 
And  they  must  complete  another  of  those  courses  or  one  from: 
Sociology/Anthropology  34;  Political  Science  35;  Economics  24;  History 
27,  43;  Mass  Communications  10. 

Division  B  Philosophy  and  Religion 

In  this  division,  the  student  is  invited  to  explore  some  of  those 
beliefs  and  ideas  which  constitute  the  foundations  of  the  human 
conceptual  context. 

Track  Bl.  The  Western  Philosophical  Tradition 

The  primary  object  of  Track  Bl  is  to  provide  an  understanding  and 

29 


appreciation  of  the  fundamental  philosophical  foundations  of  the 
Western  intellectual  tradition.  Students  selecting  this  track  must  com- 
plete at  least  one  of  the  following:  Philosophy  21,  22,  23,  or  24.  And  they 
must  complete  another  of  those  courses  or  one  from:  Religion  33; 
History  20,  41. 

Track  B2.  Perspectives  on  Religion 

The  courses  in  Track  B2  examine  religious  belief  from  the  several 
perspectives  provided  by  different  disciplines  and  traditions,  with  the 
primary  object  of  arriving  at  a  thoughtful,  integrated  understanding  of 
the  nature  of  religion  and  its  relations  to  other  human  concerns. 
Students  selecting  this  track  must  complete  at  least  one  of  the  following: 
Religion  22,  23,  24,  25,  30,  33.  And  they  must  complete  another  of  those 
courses  or  one  from:  Philosophy  32;  Sociology/Anthropology  33,  36. 

Division  C  Literature  and  the  Fine  Arts 

Many  artists  hold  that  fiction  frequently  contains  more  truth  of  the 
"whole"  person  and  society  than  do  sermons  and  the  more  "data 
based"  disciplines;  others  see  art  as  simply  an  amusement.  Between 
these  extremes  any  number  of  views  strive  for  attention.  Using  literature 
as  a  base,  this  division  will  center  on  the  nature  and  value  of  art  for  the 
individual  and  society.  It  will  do  this  using  the  perspectives  and 
methodologies  of  the  various  arts  from  "academic"  and  "creative" 
approaches. 

Track  CI .  Art  in  the  Twentieth  Century 

The  more  "academic"  track,  this  approach  will  look  at  art  in  the 
twentieth  century  in  a  trans- disciplinary  manner  to  see  the  ways  various 
disciplines  react  and  help  create  the  visions  and  images  by  which  society 
and  the  individual  live.  Students  selecting  this  track  must  complete  at 
least  one  of  the  following:  English  17,  31,  32,  33,  48;  Foreign  Languages 
25;  French  48,  49;  German  42,  47;  Spanish  48,  49;  Theatre  35.  And  they 
must  complete  another  of  those  courses  or  one  from:  Art  31;  Music  46. 

Track  C2 .  The  Making  of  Art 

From  a  "creative"  approach,  students  will  compose  their  own 
visions  and  thereby  come  to  understand  from  the  "inside  out"  the 
nature  of  the  making  process.  This  track  will  also  study  some  of  the  art 
being  produced  by  recognized  masters  in  the  fields.  Students  selecting 
this  track  must  complete  at  least  one  of  the  following:  English  35,  36; 
Theatre  15.  And  they  must  complete  another  of  those  courses  or  one 
from:  Art  15,  20,  25,  27;  Music  28,  30,  31,  32;  Theatre  18,  26,  28. 

Division  D  Quantitative  Studies 

A  primary  objective  of  modern  science  is  the  quantitative  descrip- 
tion of  observed  phenomena.  Such  descriptions  are  often  called 
mathematical  models  because  the  descriptions  are  abstract  models  of 
reality,  and  the  language  used  in  the  description  is  mathematics. 

30 


Track  Dl.  Continuous  Models 

Observed  phenomena  in  the  natural  sciences  usually  require  con- 
tinuous mathematical  models  because  most  quantities  which  are  meas- 
ured vary  continuously  with  time.  Consequently,  differential  calculus 
provides  a  wealth  of  tools  for  working  these  models.  Students  selecting 
this  track  must  complete  Mathematics  9,  or  18;  one  of  the  following: 
Astronomy/Physics  15,  25;  Biology  21,  22,  24,  44:  Chemistry  11.  And 
they  must  complete  another  of  those  courses  or  one  from: 
Astronomy/Physics  16,  26,  28,  29,  44,  45,  46;  Chemistry  10,  30;  Econom- 
ics 30,  31;  Mathematics  19,  20,  21;  Philosophy  33. 

Track  D2.  Discrete  Models 

Observed  phenomena  in  the  social  sciences  usually  require  discrete 
mathematical  models  because  most  quantities  which  are  measured  are 
analyzed  as  functions  of  other  social  variables  (rather  than  time)  which 
assume  only  finitely  many  values.  Here  the  methods  of  finite 
mathematics,  statistics,  and  computer  science  provide  the  best  tools. 
Students  selecting  this  track  must  complete  Mathematics  13;  one  of  the 
following:  Biology  22,  24;  Chemistry  32;  Psychology  20,  21,  33,  34.  And 
they  must  complete  another  of  those  courses  or  one  from:  Accounting 
31,  40;  Business  23;  Mathematics  12,  15,  32,  33;  Psychology  10; 
Philosophy  33. 


32 


CHAPTER  V 
STUDENT  SERVICES 


ADMINISTRATION 

Designed  to  respond  to  a  diversity  of  student  development  needs,  the 
program  of  student  services  at  Lycoming  is  administered  by  the  Office  of 
the  Dean  of  Student  Services.  The  four  staff  members,  three  of  whom 
reside  on  campus,  are  each  assigned  the  following  specific  responsi- 
bilities: 

— Career  Counseling  and  Placement; 

— Residence  Life; 

— Student  Activities,  Student  Union,  Student  Government,  IFC 
and  Panhellenic  Advisor; 

— Religious  Life,  Health  Service,  Study  Skills  Program,  Reading 
Improvement  Course. 

All  members  of  the  staff  are  available  for  counseling  and  advising 
individual  students. 

PERSONAL  COUNSELING 

All  members  of  the  staff  of  the  Office  of  Student  Services  are  qualified 
and  available  to  provide  non-therapeutic  assistance  to  students  with 
adjustment  problems.  A  psychiatrist  serves  as  a  consultant  to  the  staff 
and  is  available  for  evaluation  of  individual  students  who  may  be  in 
need  of  professional  services.  Continuing  therapy  is  available  through 
referral  to  public  agencies  and  private  clinicians  in  the  Williamsport 
community.  Financial  arrangements  for  these  referral  services  are  made 
directly  by  the  student  with  the  agency  and/or  individual  clinician 
involved. 

HEALTH  SERVICES 

Normal  medical  treatment  by  the  Health  Service  staff  at  the  College  is 
provided  without  cost  to  the  student.  During  the  Fall  and  Spring 
Semesters  the  College  maintains  in  Rich  Hall  an  out-patient  service 
which  is  staffed  with  a  registered  nurse  five  days  a  week  from  9:00  a.m. 
to  5:00  p.m.  The  College  Physician  is  available  from  11:00  a.m.  to  12:00 
noon,  Monday  through  Friday.  At  other  times  emergency  care  is 
available  at  the  Emergency  Rooms  of  The  Williamsport  and  Divine 
Providence  Hospitals,  located  a  short  distance  from  the  campus.  The 
College  pays  the  emergency  room  charge  and  the  emergency  room 
physician's  fee  for  illness  when  the  Health  Service  is  closed. 

The  following  medical  services  involve  charges  which  are  paid  by 
the  student:  emergency  room  and  emergency  room  physician's  charges 
(except  as  indicated  above),  special  medications,  X-rays,  surgery,  care 
for  major  accidents,  immunizations,  examinations  for  glasses, 
physician's  visits  other  than  in  the  Health  Service,  referrals  for  treat- 

33 


ment  by  specialists,  special  nursing  services,  and  special  services. 

Entering  students  must  provide  basic  health  information  to  the 
College  between  the  time  of  admission  and  the  beginning  of  classes  of 
the  term  to  which  they  are  admitted.  This  information  is  secured 
through  college  participation  in  the  computerized  health  information 
service  provided  by  Medical  Datamation,  Inc.  New  students  complete 
the  DASH  Medical  Information  Questionnaire  that  is  mailed  to  students 
shortly  after  they  have  confirmed  their  admission  to  Lycoming.  The 
completed  form  is  sent  by  the  student  to  Medical  Datamation  together 
with  a  check  for  $10.  Both  the  student  and  the  College  receive  reports 
based  on  the  questionnaire  responses.  The  student  report  consists  of  a 
Medical  Database  Report,  a  Health  Risk  Index,  as  many  health  informa- 
tion brochures  as  requested,  and  a  Personal  Quality  of  Life  Report. 
Information  provided  by  the  student  is  confidential  and  is  available  only 
to  qualified  Health  Service  and  Student  Services  personnel. 

STUDY  IMPROVEMENT  SERVICES 

Skills  Seminars — The  seminars,  consisting  of  three  one-hour  ses- 
sions on  scheduling  of  time,  test-taking,  and  study  methods,  are 
scheduled  on  demand  for  six  to  ten  students. 

Reading  Course — Designed  to  improve  reading  speed  and  com- 
prehension, this  three-week  course  is  offered  at  various  times  during 
the  academic  year  for  a  nominal  fee  of  $15. 

CAREER  DEVELOPMENT  SERVICES 

The  Career  Development  Center  provides  services  designed  to  help 
students  recognize  their  interests  and  skills  enabling  them  to  reach  well- 
informed  decisions  regarding  academic  major  and  career/life  goals.  The 
Center  fllso  provides  information  on  preparation  for  specific  careers, 
employment  outlooks  and  career  trends.  Services  offered  by  the  Career 
Development  Center  include: 

— individual  counseling 

— career  planning  seminars  in  values  clarification,  skill  assessment, 
and  decision-making 

— 2500  volume  career  library 

— relaxation  workshops  and  assertiveness  training 

— SHARE  (Students  Having  A  Real  Experience),  a  program  in 
which  students  observe  and  work  with  a  professional  in  the  field 

— placement  services  to  aid  seniors  in  implementing  their  career 
plans 

— assistance  to  students  in  securing  internships,  summer  em- 
ployment and  part-time  employment 

— speaker's  program  which  brings  professionals  from  a  variety  of 
careers  to  campus  seminars 

— video-cassette  programs  relating  to  job  skills  and  career  informa- 
tion 

— microfiche  copies  of  graduate  and  professional  school  catalogs  for 
the  United  States  and  abroad. 

34 


RESIDENCE  AND  RESIDENCE  HALLS 

Students  who  are  single  and  who  do  not  reside  at  home  are  required  to 
live  in  residence  halls  and  eat  in  the  dining  room.  All  new  resident 
students  are  forwarded  a  room  agreement  form  to  sign  following 
confirmation  of  their  admission  to  Lycoming.  This  agreement  is  re- 
newed each  Spring.  Exceptions  to  the  residence  policy  may  be  granted 
to  those  students  who  wish  to  live  with  relatives,  and  those  over  23 
years  of  age  who  have  established  non-resident  status;  requests  for  such 
exemptions  must  be  submitted  to  the  Assistant  Dean  of  Student 
Services  for  Residence  Life  before  the  first  day  of  the  term  to  which  the 
student  has  been  admitted. 

Resident  students  assume  responsibility  for  their  rooms  and 
furnishings.  The  College  reserves  the  right  to  enter  and  inspect  any 
room  for  reasons  of  damage,  health,  or  safety  and  to  search  any  room 
when  there  is  reason  to  believe  a  violation  of  college  rules  or  the  law  is 
occurring  or  has  occurred.  Charges  are  assessed  for  damage  to  rooms, 
doors,  furniture,  and  common  areas  as  explained  in  Chapter  III  of  this 
catalog. 

Residence  Halls  are  not  available  for  occupancy  during  the  vacation 
periods.  Quiet  hours  for  study  purposes,  which  are  established  by 
residence  hall  councils  or  the  Office  of  Student  Services,  are  published 
in  the  Residence  Halls  Handbook  and  posted  on  bulletin  boards. 

Room  visitation  by  members  of  the  opposite  sex  is  permitted  in  the 
halls  under  conditions  established  by  the  College  in  cooperation  with 
the  various  residence  hall  councils,  which  share  responsibility  for 
developing  and  monitoring  regulations  and  which  are  organized  each 
Fall  Semester  before  visitation  schedules  are  established. 


35 


STANDARDS  OF  CONDUCT 

All  students  are  expected  to  accept  responsibilities  required  of  adults  in 
a  free,  democratic  society.  The  rights  of  every  member  of  the  community 
are  protected  from  encroachment  by  established  rules  and  regulations. 
Although  the  acceptance  and  observance  of  the  standards  of  behavior 
expected  by  the  College  are  individual  responsiblities,  they  are  a  group 
responsibility  as  well.  It  is  incumbent  on  all  students  to  influence  their 
peers  to  conduct  themselves  honorably  for  the  collective  good.  Accept- 
ance of  membership  in  the  Lycoming  community  assumes  a  willingness 
to  accept  these  responsibilities  and  implicit  restrictions.  Students  who 
are  unable  to  demonstrate  that  they  have  accepted  these  responsibilities 
or  who  are  antagonistic  to  the  spirit  and  general  purpose  of  the  College 
or  who  fail  to  abide  by  established  regulations  may  be  dismissed  at  any 
time  and  may  be  denied  the  privilege  of  attending  subsequent  terms. 
Further,  following  the  conclusion  of  any  term  or  semester,  the  College 
may  deny  a  student  the  privilege  of  attending  any  subsequent  term  or 
semester  when  the  administration  deems  this  to  be  in  the  best  interest  of 
the  College. 

Lycoming  College  does  not  approve  or  support  the  use  or  misuse  of 
alcoholic  beverages.  Its  historic  relationship  to  The  United  Methodist 
Church  and  its  interpretation  of  its  mission  as  an  institution  of  higher 
education  has  traditionally  supported  and  encouraged  students  who 
abstain  from  the  use  of  alcoholic  beverages. 

Students  who  enter  Lycoming  are  expected  to  honor  the  legal 
restrictions  on  alcohol  use  imposed  by  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsyl- 
vania. The  observance  of  the  law  is  the  individual  responsibility  of  each 
student,  and  failure  to  obey  the  law  may  subject  the  student  to 
prosecution  by  civil  authorities,  either  on  or  off  the  campus. 

Students  are  also  expected  to  be  aware  of  the  College's  attitude 
toward  the  use  and  misuse  of  alcohol  and  to  acknowledge  the  College's 
right  to  its  position.  The  College  will  not  tolerate  any  public  use  of 
alcohol,  and  officials  of  the  College  will  prescribe  penalties  for  the  public 
or  private  misuse  of  alcohol.  These  penalties  will  be  applied  in  a 
consistent  manner. 

The  College  also  accepts  responsibility  for  providing  students  with 
reliable  information  regarding  alcoholic  beverages  and  the  social  and 
medical  implications  of  its  use.  The  purpose  of  the  Program  on  Beverage 
Education  is  to  enable  students  to  make  a  reasoned  decision  between  the 
personal  options  of  use  or  non-use  of  alcoholic  beverages  and  to  assist 
students  who  choose  to  abstain  to  be  comfortable  with  that  decision  in 
a  larger  society  where  pressures  are  intense  to  use  alcoholic  beverages. 

The  College  will  make  every  effort  to  create  and  maintain  a 
community  in  which  individual  choice  is  coupled  with  responsible 
behavior  and  respect  for  the  rights  of  others. 

All  students  are  provided  a  copy  of  the  Guidepost  when  they  are 
admitted  to  Lycoming,  and  resident  students  are  provided  a  copy  of  the 
Residence  Halls  Handbook.  These  documents  contain  statements  of  official 
college  policies,  rules,  and  regulations,  all  of  which  are  part  of  the 

36 


contractual  agreement  students  enter  into  when  they  register  at  Lycom- 
ing. 


RELIGIOUS  LIFE 

Opportunities  for  spiritual  growth  are  provided  through  voluntary 
participation  in  the  religious  life  of  the  College  and  the  community  of 
Williamsport.  The  religious  life  program  is  intended  to  encourage  all 
students  to  sustain  their  own  particular  religious  commitment  through 
these  opportunities.  A  United  Campus  Ministry  involving  chaplains  to 
United  Methodist,  Episcopal,  Lutheran,  Baptist,  Presbyterian  and  Ro- 
man Catholic  students  and  cooperating  churches  in  the  community 
provide  the  following  services: 

— worship  program; 

— service  opportunities; 

— pastoral  counseling; 

— local  church  relationships; 

— religious  activities. 

Additional  chaplains  will  be  appointed  as  arrangements  to  expand 
the  ministry  to  other  faiths  and  denominations  are  completed. 

Regular  Protestant  and  Roman  Catholic  worship  services  are  held 
on  Sundays  in  the  College  Chapel,  and  several  ecumenical  worship 
opportunities  are  planned  for  special  seasons  of  the  church  year, 
including  Christmas,  Easter,  and  Passover. 

The  United  Campus  Ministry  Center,  containing  the  St.  John 
Neumann  Chapel,  a  social  and  meeting  area,  Chapel  Office  and  Sac- 
risty, a  lounge  and  two  offices  is  located  on  the  basement  floor  of  Clarke 
Chapel.  The  Chaplains'  office  is  located  in  the  United  Campus  Ministry 
Center. 


ORIENTATION  OF  NEW  STUDENTS 

The  purpose  of  the  orientation  program  is  to  insure  that  new  students 
begin  their  Lycoming  experience  under  the  most  favorable  circum- 
stances and  to  provide  opportunities  for  new  students  and  their  parents 
to  become  more  fully  informed  about  the  College.  Four  sessions  of  two 
and  one-half  days  each  are  organized  each  summer  and  attendance  by 
all  new  students  and  at  least  one  parent  is  required.  During  the 
orientation  program,  parents  and  students  participate  in  the  following 
activities: 

— Briefing  sessions  on  the  academic  and  co-curricular  programs; 

— Academic  advisement  and  registration  for  Fall  Semester  classes; 

— Placement  testing  in  swimming,  mathematics,  and  English; 

— Purchase  of  textboks. 

Information  pertaining  to  orientation  is  mailed  to  students  after 
they  have  confirmed  their  admission  to  Lycoming. 

37 


STUDENT  ACTIVITIES 

A  full  program  of  cultural,  professional,  athletic,  and  social  activities  is 
an  integral  part  of  college  life  at  Lycoming.  Students  will  find  a  diversity 
of  outlets  for  their  talents,  interests,  and  leadership  abilities  through 
departmental  clubs,  intercollegiate  and  intramural  athletics,  fraternities 
and  sororities,  clubs,  student  publications,  musical  organizations, 
theatre,  radio  station,  honorary  societies,  student  government,  and 
outdoor  recreation.  Information  about  these  activities  is  provided  in  the 
Guidepost  and  other  publications  of  the  College  and  is  available  through 
the  Office  of  the  Dean  of  Student  Services. 


CHAPTER  VI 

THE  CURRICULUM 

Numbers  1-9  Elementary  courses  in  departments  where  such  courses 

are  not  counted  as  part  of  the  student's  major. 
Numbers  10-19  Freshman  level  Courses 
Numbers  20-29  Sophomore  level  Courses 
Numbers  30-39  Junior  level  Courses 
Numbers  40-49  Senior  level  Courses 

Numbers  50-59  Non-catalog  Courses  (offered  on  a  limited  basis) 
Numbers  60-69  Applied  Music 
Numbers  70-79  Internships 
Numbers  80-89  Independent  Study 
Numbers  90-99  Independent  Study  for  Departmental  Honors 

Courses  not  in  sequence  are  listed  separately,  as: 

Introduction  to  Art  Art  10 

Drawing  1  Art  11 

Courses  which  imply  a  sequence  are  indicated  with  a  dash  between, 
meaning  that  the  first  semester  must  be  taken  prior  to  the  second,  as: 

Intermediate  French  French  10-11 

All  students  without  regard  to  sex  have  the  right  of  access  to  all  courses. 

ACCOUNTING 

Professor:  Richmond  (Chairman) 
Assistant  Professor:  Kuhns 

The  purpose  of  the  accounting  major  is  to  help  prepare  the  student  for  a  career 
within  the  accounting  profession,  whether  public,  private  or  governmental, 
through  a  curriculum  stressing  pre- professional  education. 

A  major  consists  of  Accounting  10,  20-21,  30,  40,  41,  45,  Math  13,  15,  and 
one  and  one-half  units  to  be  selected  from  Accounting  25,  26,  31,  42,  44,  46,  47, 
and  48  or  Internship  after  consultation  with  and  approval  of  the  department  in 
accordance  with  the  student's  professional  interests  and  objectives.  Business  10 
may  be  substituted  for  Accounting  10  if  a  student  changes  majors. 

Students  seeking  entry  into  the  public  accounting  field  are  advised  to 
investigate  the  professional  requirements  for  certification  in  the  state  in  which 
they  intend  to  practice  so  that  they  may  meet  all  educational  requirements  prior 
to  graduation.  All  majors  are  advised  to  enroll  in  Economics  10  and  11,  Business 
35,  36,  and  38,  and  one  of  the  following:  Business  33,  Economics  20  or  37. 

10    ELEMENTARY  ACCOUNTING  THEORY 

An  introductory  course  in  recording,  classifying,  summarizing,  and  in- 
terpreting the  basic  business  transaction.  Problems  of  classification  and 
interpretation  of  accounts  and  preparation  of  financial  statements  are 
studied.  Prerequisite:  Sophomore  standing  or  consent  of  instructor. 

20-21     INTERMEDIATE  ACCOUNTING  THEORY 

An  intensive  study  of  accounting  statements  and  analytical  procedures  with 

39 


emphasis  upon  corporate  accounts.  Price  level  adjustments,  partnerships, 
joint  ventures,  installments  and  consignment  sales,  branch  and  home  office 
accounting,  and  the  statement  of  affairs  are  among  topics  studied.  Prere- 
quisite: Accounting  10. 

25  FINANCIAL  STATEMENT  ANALYSIS 

Deals  with  the  analysis  of  financial  statements  as  an  aid  to  decision  making. 
The  theme  of  the  course  is  understanding  the  financial  data  which  are 
analyzed  as  well  as  the  methods  by  which  they  are  analyzed  and  in- 
terpreted. This  course  should  prove  of  value  to  all  who  need  a  thorough 
understanding  of  the  uses  to  which  financial  statements  are  put  as  well  as 
to  those  who  must  know  how  to  use  them  intelligently  and  effectively.  This 
includes  accountants,  security  analysts,  lending  officers,  credit  analysts, 
managers  and  all  others  who  make  decisions  on  the  basis  of  financial  data. 
Prerequisite:  Accounting  10  or  Business  10.  May  Term. 

26  GOVERNMENTAL  AND  FUND  ACCOUNTING 

This  course  is  designed  to  introduce  accounting  for  not-for-profit  organiza- 
tions. Municipal  accounting,  reporting  and  auditing,  and  federal  and 
institutional  accounting  and  reporting  are  studied.  Prerequisite:  Accounting 
10  or  Business  10.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

30-31     COST  AND  BUDGETARY  ACCOUNTING  THEORY 

Methods  of  accounting  for  material,  labor,  and  factory  overhead  expenses 
consumed  in  manufacturing  using  job  order,  process  and  standard  costing. 
Application  of  cost  accounting  and  budgeting  theory  to  decision  making  in 
the  areas  of  make  or  buy,  expansion  of  production  and  sales,  and  account- 
ing for  control  are  dealt  with.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  20  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

40  AUDITING  THEORY 

A  study  of  the  science  or  art  of  verifying,  analyzing,  and  interpreting 
accounts  and  reports.  The  goal  of  the  course  is  to  emphasize  concepts  which 
will  enable  students  to  understand  the  philosophy  and  environment  of 
auditing.  Special  attention  is  given  to  the  public  accounting  profession, 
studying  auditing  standards,  professional  ethics,  the  legal  liability  inherent 
in  the  attest  function,  the  study  and  evaluation  of  internal  control,  the 
nature  of  evidence,  the  growing  use  of  statistical  sampling,  the  impact  of 
electronic  data  processing,  and  the  basic  approach  to  planning  an  audit. 
Finally,  various  audit  reports  expressing  independent  expert  opinions  on 
the  fairness  of  financial  statements  are  studied.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  21, 
and  Mathematics  13  and  15. 

41  FEDERAL  INCOME  TAX  ACCOUNTING  AND  PLANNING 

Analysis  of  the  provisions  of  the  Internal  Revenue  Code  relating  to  income, 
deductions,  inventories,  and  accounting  methods.  Practical  problems  in- 
volving determination  of  income  and  deductions,  capital  gains  and  losses, 
computation  and  payment  of  taxes  through  withholding  at  the  source  and 
through  declaration  are  considered.  Planning  transactions  so  that  a  min- 
imum amount  of  tax  will  result  is  emphasized.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  10  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

40 


42    FEDERAL  INCOME  TAX  ADMINISTRATION  AND  PLANNING 

An  analysis  of  the  provisions  of  the  Internal  Revenue  Code  relating  to 
partnerships,  estates,  trusts,  and  corporations.  An  extensive  series  of 
problems  is  considered  and  effective  tax  planning  is  emphasized.  Prere- 
quisite: Accounting  41. 

44  CONTROLLERSHIP 

Control  process  in  the  organization.  General  systems  theory,  financial 
control  systems,  centralization-decentralization,  performance  measurement 
and  evaluation,  forecasts  and  budgets  and  marketing,  production  and 
finance  models  for  control  purposes.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  31  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

45  AUDITING  PRACTICE 

An  audit  project  is  presented,  solved  and  the  auditor's  report  is  written. 
THIS  COURSE  IS  LIMITED  TO  STUDENTS  WHO  HAVE  EITHER  COM- 
PLETED OR  ARE  ENROLLED  IN  ACCOUNTING  40.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

46  SEMINAR  ON  APB  OPINIONS  AND  FASB  STANDARDS 

A  seminar  course  for  accounting  majors  with  library  assignments  to  gain  a 
workable  understanding  of  the  highly  technical  opinions  of  the  Accounting 
Principles  Board  and  standards  of  the  Financial  Accounting  Standards 
Board.  One  term  paper.  Possible  trip  to  New  York  City  to  attend  a  public 
hearing  of  the  Financial  Accounting  Standards  Board.  Prerequisite:  Account- 
ing 10.  May  Term. 

47  ADVANCED  ACCOUNTING 

Certain  areas  of  advanced  accounting  theory,  including  business  combina- 
tions, consolidated  financial  statements  and  accounting  and  reporting  for 
the  Securities  and  Exchange  Commission  are  covered.  Prerequisite:  Account- 
ing 21.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

48  CONTEMPORARY  PROBLEMS  FOR  CPA  CANDIDATES 

Problems  from  the  Accounting  Practice  sections  of  past  C.P.A.  examina- 
tions which  require  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  core  courses  in  their 
solution  are  assigned.  The  course  is  intended  to  meet  the  needs  of  those 
interested  in  public  accounting  and  preparation  for  the  Certified  Public 
Accountants  Examination.  Prerequisite:  Accounting  30  or  consent  of  instructor. 
One-half  unit  of  credit. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  accounting  typically  work  off-campus  under  the  supervision  of  a 
public  or  private  accountant. 

80-89    INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Typical  examples  of  recent  studies  in  accounting  are:  computer  program  to 
generate  financial  statements,  educational  core  for  public  accountants, 
inventory  control  and  church  taxation. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

41 


ACCOUNTING— MATHEMATICS 

Professor:  Richmond  (Coordinator) 

The  Accounting-Mathematics  Interdisciplinary  Major  is  designed  to  offer, 
within  a  liberal  arts  framework,  courses  which  will  aid  in  constructing 
mathematical  models  for  business  decision  making.  Students  obtain  a  substan- 
tial background  in  mathematics  and  a  working  knowledge  in  accounting. 

Majors  will  be  only  four  courses  short  of  a  math  major  and  three  courses 
short  of  an  accounting  major.  Required  accounting  courses  are:  Accounting  10, 
20,  21,  30,  31.  In  Mathematics  they  are:  Mathematics  18,  19,  20,  and  37  plus  two 
courses  from  Mathematics  21,  31,  32,  and  33.  Business  courses  required  are: 
Business  35  and  36.  Recommended  courses  include:  Mathematics  13  and  15; 
Business  23,  34,  38,  and  39;  Economics  10  and  11;  Psychology  15  and  24;  and 
Sociology  10. 

AMERICAN  STUDIES 

Associate  Professor:  Piper  (Coordinator) 

The  American  Studies  major  offers  a  comprehensive  program  in  American 
civilization  which  introduces  students  to  the  complexities  underlying  the 
development  of  America  and  its  contemporary  life.  The  thirteen  major  courses 
include: 

FOUR-CORE  COURSES — The  primary  integrating  units  of  the  major,  these 
team-taught  courses  will  teach  you  how  to  think  of  ideas  from  different  points 
of  view  and  how  to  correlate  information  and  methods  from  various  disciplines: 
America  As  a  Civilization  (First  semester  of  major  study) 
American  Studies — Research  and  Methodology  (Second  semester) 
American  Tradition  in  the  Arts  and  Literature  (Third  semester) 
Internship  or  Independent  Study  (Junior  and/or  senior  year) 

CONCENTRATION  AREAS — Six  courses  in  one  option  and  three  in  the 
other  are  needed.  Six  primary  Concentration  Option  courses  in  American  Arts 
or  American  Society  build  around  the  insights  gained  in  the  Core  Courses.  They 
focus  particular  attention  on  areas  most  germane  to  academic  and  vocational 
interests.  The  three  additional  courses  from  the  other  option  give  further  breadth 
to  understanding  of  America.  Students  also  will  be  encouraged  to  take  elective 
courses  relating  to  other  cultures. 

American  Arts  Concentration  Option 

American  Art  — Art  24 

American  Art  of  the  20th  Century  — Art  32 

19th  Century  American  Literature  — English  16 

20th  Century  American  Literature  — English  17 

American  Music  — Music  51 

American  Theatre  — Theatre  51 

American  Society  Concentration  Option 

U.S.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  to  1877  —History  42 

U.S.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  since  1877  — History  43 

The  American  Constitutional  System  — Political  Science  30 

The  American  Political  Tradition  — Political  Science  47 

American  Economic  Development  — Economics  51 

Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities  — Sociology  34 

42 


Students  should  design  their  American  Studies  major  in  consultation  with 
the  program  co-ordinator  or  a  member  of  the  American  Studies  committee. 

10  AMERICA  AS  A  CIVILIZATION 

An  analysis  of  the  historical,  socio-cultural,  economic,  and  political  per- 
spectives on  American  civilization  with  special  attention  to  the  interrela- 
tionships between  these  various  orientations. 

11  AMERICAN  STUDIES— RESEARCH  AND  METHODOLOGY 

The  study  and  application  of  various  research  methods,  including  new 
trends  in  historical  study,  quantitative  analysis,  cross-cultural  studies  and 
on-site  inspection. 

12  AMERICAN  TRADITION  IN  THE  ARTS  AND  LITERATURE 

The  relationships  of  the  arts  and  literature  to  the  various  historical  periods 
of  American  life. 

70-79  or  80-89     INTERNSHIP  OR  INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

An  opportunity  to  relate  the  learning  in  the  Core  Courses  and  the 
Concentration  Areas  to  an  actual  supervised  off-campus  learning  situation 
or  independent  study  project. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  HONORS  (See  Index) 


43 


ART 

Associate  Professor:  Shipley  (Chairman) 

Assistant  Professor:  Bogle 

Instructor:  Lesko 

Part-Time  Instructor:  T.  Wild 

A  major  consists  of  a  balanced  program  of  history  of  art  and  studio  courses.  In 
addition  to  the  core  courses  of  the  major  program  (Art  11,  15,  or  18,  20,  21,  22, 
23,  30,  and  46),  the  student  will  elect  two  advanced  courses  in  art  history.  Art  25 
and  35,  or  Art  28  and  38  may  be  substituted  for  Art  20  and  30.  Majors  will  be 
required  to  present  their  better  work  in  a  one-person  show  during  their  senior 
year. 

10  INTRODUCTION  TO  ART 

Course  includes  basic  studio  work  in  two  and  three  dimensions  as  well  as 
lecture  and  slide  presentations.  The  goal  of  the  course  is  to  equip  the  student 
with  the  skills  and  background  necessary  to  approach  art  in  an  open  and 
receptive  manner. 

11  DRAWING  I 

Study  of  the  human  figure  with  gesture  and  proportion  stressed.  Student  is 
made  familiar  with  different  drawing  techniques  and  media.  Some  drawing 
from  nature.  Offered  in  alternate  semesters  with  Drawing  II  and  III. 

12  COLOR  THEORY 

A  study  of  the  physical  and  emotional  aspects  of  color.  Emphasis  will  be 
placed  on  the  study  of  color  as  an  aesthetic  agent  for  the  artist.  The  color 
theories  of  Johannes  Itten  will  form  the  base  for  this  course  with  some  study 
of  the  theories  of  Albert  Munsell,  Faber  Berren,  and  Wilhelm  Ostwald.  May 

Term  only. 

14  DESIGN  FOR  ELEMENTARY  TEACHERS 

A  course  designed  to  give  students  the  opportunity  to  explore,  in  their  own 
creative  style,  ideas,  techniques  and  methods  for  involving  children  in 
expressive  activities  through  the  use  of  a  wide  range  of  media  in  the  making 
of  prints,  puppets,  pictorial  and  design  projects,  simple  modeling,  mosaics, 
plaster  casting,  weaving  and  stitchery  projects,  simple  jewelry  and  gift  crafts, 
lettering  projects,  mobiles,  stabiles,  and  other  three-dimensional  designs 
created  from  scrap  materials. 

15  TWO-DIMENSIONAL  DESIGN 

The  basic  fundamentals  found  in  the  two-dimensional  arts:  line,  shape,  form, 
space,  color,  and  composition  are  taught  in  relationship  to  the  other  two- 
dimensional  arts.  Perceptual  theories  and  their  relationships  to  what  and 
why  we  see  what  we  see  in  art  are  discussed  with  each  problem. 

18     FIGURE  MODELING 

Understanding  the  figure  will  be  approached  through  learning  the  basic 
structures  and  proportions  of  the  figure.  The  course  is  conceived  as  a  three- 
dimensional  drawing  class.  At  least  one  figure  per  student  will  be  cast. 

44 


19  CERAMICS  I 

Emphasis  placed  on  pottery  design  as  it  relates  to  function  of  vessels  and  the 
design  parameters  imposed  by  the  characteristics  of  clay.  The  techniques  of 
ceramics  are  taught  to  encourage  expression  rather  than  to  dispense  merely 
a  technical  body  of  information. 

20  PAINTING  I 

An  introduction  of  painting  techniques  and  materials.  Coordination  of  color, 
value,  and  design  within  the  painting  is  taught.  Some  painting  from  the 
figure.  No  limitations  as  to  painting  media,  subject  matter  or  style. 
Prerequisite:  Art  15  or  consent  of  instructor. 

21  DRAWING  II 

Continued  study  of  the  human  figure.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  realism  and 
figure-ground  coordination  with  the  use  of  value  and  design.  Prerequisite:  Art 
11. 

22  HISTORY  OF  ART  I 

A  survey  of  Western  architecture,  sculpture,  and  painting.  Emphasis  is  on 
the  interrelation  of  form  and  content  and  on  the  relatedness  of  the  visual  arts 
to  their  cultural  environment:  Near  East,  Egypt,  Greece,  Rome,  and  Medieval 
Europe. 

23  HISTORY  OF  ART  II 

A  survey  of  Western  architecture,  sculpture,  and  painting.  Emphasis  is  on 
the  interrelation  of  form  and  content  and  on  the  relatedness  of  the  visual  arts 
to  their  cultural  environment:  Renaissance  to  Modern. 

24  AMERICAN  ART 

The  development  of  the  arts  in  America  from  Colonial  times  to  the  Armory 
Show  with  emphasis  on  the  18th  and  19th  centuries:  Copley,  Greenough, 
Bulfinch,  Homer,  Eakins,  Richardson,  and  Sloan. 

25  SCULPTURE  I 

An  introduction  to  the  techniques,  materials,  and  ideas  of  sculpture.  Clay, 
plaster,  wax,  wood,  and  other  materials  will  be  used.  The  course  will  be 
concerned  with  ideas  about  sculpture  as  expression,  and  with  giving  material 
form  to  ideas. 

27  INTRODUCTION  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY 

Objectives  of  the  course  are  to  develop  technical  skills  in  the  use  of 
photographic  equipment  (cameras,  films,  darkroom,  print  maker)  and  to 
develop  sensitivity  in  the  areas  of  composition,  form,  light,  picture  quality, 
etc.  Each  student  must  own  or  have  access  to  a  35mm  roll  film  camera. 

28  PRINTMAKING  I 

Practice  of  the  techniques  of  silk-screen,  wood-block,  and  linoleum-block 
printing.  Prerequisite:  Art  11  or  15. 

45 


29  CERAMICS  II 

Continuation  of  Ceramics  I.  Emphasis  on  use  of  the  wheel  and  technical 
aspects  such  as  glaze  making  and  kiln  firing.  Prerequisite:  Art  19. 

30  PAINTING  II 

Emphasis  is  placed  on  individual  style  and  technique.  Artists  and  move- 
ments in  art  are  studied.  No  limitations  as  to  painting  media,  subject  matter, 
or  style.  Prerequisite:  Art  20. 

31  MODERN  EUROPEAN  ART 

Stylistic  developments  in  Europe  from  1880  to  the  present,  including 
Cubism,  Fauvism,  Expressionism,  Dada,  and  Surrealism.  Picasso,  Matisse, 
Kandinsky  and  Mondrian  are  among  the  major  artists  studied. 

32  AMERICAN  ART  OF  THE  20TH  CENTURY 

Painting,  sculpture,  and  architecture  in  the  United  States  from  1900  to  the 
present  with  emphasis  on  developments  of  the  fifties  and  sixties:  an  inquiry 
into  the  meaning  and  historical  roots  of  contemporary  art. 

33  19TH  CENTURY  ART 

Emphasis  on  painting,  sculpture  and  architecture  of  Western  Europe  from 
1760  to  1900,  including  the  work  of  late  18th  century  artists  David  and  Goya 
and  19th  century  developments  from  Romanticism  to  Post-Impressionism. 

34  ART  OF  THE  RENAISSANCE 

Painting,  sculpture,  and  architecture  in  Italy  and  the  Northern  countries, 
from  the  late  13th  century  through  the  early  16th  century.  Artists  include 
Giotto,  Donatello,  Alberti,  Leonardo  da  Vinci,  Michelangelo,  Van  Eyck, 
Diirer  and  Briiegel. 

35  SCULPTURE  II 

A  continuation  of  Art  25  or  Art  16,  with  emphasis  on  independent  projects 
and  more  complex  technique.  Casting  of  bronze  and  aluminum  sculpture 
will  be  done  in  the  school  foundry.  Prerequisite:  Art  16  or  25. 

37  PHOTOGRAPHY  II 

To  extend  the  skills  developed  in  Photography  I  by  continued  growth  in 
technical  expertise,  presentation,  conceptual  ability,  and  aesthetic  sensi- 
bility. Emphasis  is  placed  upon  term  essay  in  area  of  student's  interest  and 
presented  in  booklet  format.  Prerequisite:  Art  27. 

38  PRINTMAKING  II 

Further  exploration  of  silk-screen  printing  techniques,  practice  of  the 
techniques  of  engraving,  drypoint,  etching,  and  aquatint. 

40     PAINTING  III 

Professional  quality  is  stressed.  There  is  some  experimentation  with  new 
painting  techniques  and  styles. 

46 


41     DRAWING  III 

Continued  study  of  human  figure,  individual  style  and  professional  control 
of  drawing  techniques  and  media  are  now  emphasized. 

46     STUDIO  RESEARCH 

Independent  research  in  an  elective  studio  area,  conducted  under  the 
supervision  of  the  appropriate  faculty  member,  includes  creation  of  work 
which  may  be  incorporated  in  a  one-person  senior  exhibition.  Student  works 
in  private  studio  assigned  by  the  department. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Commercial  Design,  Interior  Design,  and  photography  programs  in  local 
businesses  and  Museum  work  at  the  Historical  Museum. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Recent  studies  in  anatomy.  Aspects  of  the  Art  Noveau,  Lithography, 
Photography,  Pottery,  Problems  in  Illustration,  and  watercolor. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

47 


ASTRONOMY/PHYSICS 

Professor:  Fineman 
Associate  Professor:  W.  Smith 
Assistant  Professor:  Erickson  (Chairman) 

The  department  offers  two  majors.  The  major  in  astronomy  is  specifically 
designed  to  train  students  in  the  field  of  planetarium  education.  The  major  in 
physics  prepares  students  for  graduate  work  in  physics  or  astronomy,  for  the 
cooperative  program  in  engineering,  or  for  state  certification  as  secondary  school 
teachers  of  physics.  Juniors  and  seniors  in  both  majors  are  required  to  attend  and 
participate  in  the  weekly  departmental  colloquia. 

A  number  of  courses  in  this  department  are  offered  on  two  levels  which  differ 
in  the  degree  of  mathematical  rigor  and  sophistication  needed.  All  such  courses 
have  dual  catalog  numbers,  with  the  letters  B  (basic)  and  A  (advanced)  appearing 
after  the  course  names  to  indicate  the  level.  Both  the  B  and  A  level  of  a  course 
meet  together  for  the  same  three  hours  of  lecture  each  week,  while  the  A  level 
meets  for  one  additional  hour  each  week  of  more  advanced  mathematical 
development  of  the  material.  This  system  is  designated  as  the  "3+1"  method.  No 
student  may  earn  credit  for  both  levels  of  a  course. 

The  major  in  astronomy  requires  AsPh  11, 12,  either  15  or  25,  either  16  or  26, 
30,  either  34  or  44,  either  35  or  45,  and  either  36  or  46;  Mathematics  18  and  19 
(Calculus  I  and  II);  and  one  year  of  chemistry.  One  or  more  of  the  following  are 
recommended:  AsPh  3,  4,  5,  27,  33,  or  42;  and  Art  27  (Photography  I). 

The  major  in  physics  requires  AsPh  11,  either  12  or  13,  25,  26,  28,  29,  and 
at  least  two  courses  chosen  from  27,  33,  42,  44,  45,  46  and  48;  Mathematics  18  and 
19  (Calculus  I  and  II);  and  one  year  of  chemistry.  With  departmental  consent, 
advanced  courses  may  be  substituted  for  AsPh  11,  12,  or  13.  In  addition, 
Mathematics  20  and  21  (Multivariate  Calculus  and  Differential  Equations)  are 
required  for  graduate  school  preparation  and  the  cooperative  program  in 
engineering.  It  is  also  recommended  that  student  planning  on  graduate  study  in 
physics  or  astronomy  take  one  year  of  a  foreign  language  and  Mathematics  13  and 
15  (Introduction  to  Statistics  and  Computer  Science).  With  departmental  consent, 
advanced  courses  may  be  substituted  for  Astronomy  and  Physics  11  and  12. 

3  OBSERVATIONAL  ASTRONOMY 

A  methods  course  providing  the  opportunity  to  make  a  variety  of 
astronomical  observations,  both  visually  and  photographically,  with  and 
without  telescopes.  The  planetarium  is  used  to  familiarize  the  student  with 
the  sky  at  various  times  during  the  year  and  from  different  locations  on  earth. 

4  FIELD  GEOLOGY 

A  methods  course  introducing  the  field  techniques  needed  to  study  the 
geology  of  an  area.  May  term. 

5  HISTORY  OF  ASTRONOMY 

A  comprehensive  view  of  the  evolution  of  astronomical  thought  from  ancient 
Greece  to  the  present,  emphasizing  the  impact  that  astronomical  discoveries 
and  the  conquest  of  space  have  had  on  Western  culture.  Four  hours  of  lecture 
per  week. 

48 


11  PRINCIPLES  OF  ASTRONOMY 

A  summary  of  current  concepts  of  the  universe,  from  the  solar  system  to 
distant  galaxies.  Describes  the  techniques  and  instruments  used  in 
astronomical  research.  Presents  not  only  what  is  reasonably  well  known 
about  the  universe,  but  also  considers  some  of  the  major  unsolved  problems. 
Three  hours  of  lecture,  one  hour  of  discussion  and  planetarium  demonstration,  and 
two  hours  of  laboratory  per  week.  Fall  Semester. 

12  ENVIRONMENTAL  AND  EARTH  SCIENCE 

A  study  of  the  physical  processes  that  continually  affect  the  planet  Earth, 
shaping  our  environment.  Describes  how  past  events  and  lifeforms  can  be 
reconstructed  from  preserved  evidence  to  reveal  the  history  of  our  planet 
from  its  origin  to  the  present.  Emphasizes  the  ways  in  which  geology, 
meteorology,  and  oceanography  interrelate  with  man  and  the  environment. 
Three  hours  of  lecture,  one  hour  of  discussion  and  demonstration,  and  tzvo  hours  of 
laboratory/  per  week.  Spring  Semester. 

13  METEOROLOGY 

The  general  properties  of  the  atmosphere  and  their  measurements  will  be 
discussed  in  terms  of  basic  physical  and  chemical  laws.  Two  basic  themes  will 
guide  the  approach,  i.e. ,  the  atmosphere  behaves  like  a  giant  heat  engine  and 
weather  patterns  exist  from  a  micro- to-macroscale.  Three  lectures  and  one  tzvo 
hour  laboratory  per  week.  May  Term  only.  Alternate  years. 

15  CONCEPTS  OF  PHYSICS  B 

25  CONCEPTS  OF  PHYSICS  A 

Rather  than  presenting  an  encyclopedia  view  of  classical  physics,  this  course 
emphasizes  the  development  of  concepts  and  principles  to  be  applied  in  all 
further  courses.  The  fundamental  quantities  and  laws  of  mechanics,  electrici- 
ty and  magnetism,  and  thermodynamics  will  be  presented  and  illustrated 
with  numerous  problems.  Lectures  presented  fa/  the  "3  +  1"  method;  also  one  hour 
of  recitation  and  three  hours  of  laboratory  per  week.  Credit  may  not  be  earned  for 
both  Astronomy  and  Physics  15  and  25.  Prerequisite  for  15:  Mathematics  17 
(Precalculus) .  Corequisite  for  25:  Mathematics  18  (Calculus  I).  Fall  Semester. 

16  WAVES  AND  PARTICLES  B 

26  WAVES  AND  PARTICLES  A 

Description  of  waves,  the  wave  equation,  electromagnetic  waves.  Reflection, 
refraction,  interference,  and  diffraction.  The  constituents  of  matter  and 
radiation,  the  interaction  of  matter  and  radiation,  wave-particle  duality.  The 
Bohr  atom,  atomic  structure,  and  atomic  spectra.  Nuclear  structure,  radio- 
active decay,  and  nuclear  reactions.  Lectures  presented  fa/  the  "3  +  1"  method; 
also  one  hour  of  recitation  and  three  hours  of  laboratory  penoeek.  Credit  may  not 
be  earned  for  both  Astronomy  and  Physics  16  and  26.  Prerequisite  for 
Astronomy  and  Physics  16:  15  or  25  (Concepts  of  Physics  B  or  A).  Prerequisite  for 
Astronomy  and  Physics  26:  25  (Concepts  of  Physics  A).  Corequisite  for  Astronomy 
and  Physics  26:  Mathematics  19  (Calculus  II).  Spring  Semester. 

49 


27  ELECTRONICS 

D.C.  and  A.C.  circuit  and  network  theory,  active  devices  such  as  transistors, 
operational  amplifiers,  integrated  circuits  and  introduction  to  digital  elec- 
tronics will  be  covered.  Three  lectures  and  two  2 -hour  laboratory  sessions  per  week. 
Prerequisites:  Astronomy  I  Physics  15  or  25  and  Mathematics  9  or  18,  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

28  MECHANICS 

Kinematics  and  dynamics  of  single  particles  and  systems  of  particles.  Rigid 
bodies.  Introduction  to  the  mechanics  of  continuous  media.  Moving  refer- 
ence frames.  Lagrangian  mechanics.  Four  hours  of  lecture  and  three  hours  of 
laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisites:  Astronomy  and  Physics  25  (Concepts  of  Physics 
A)  and  Mathematics  19  (Calculus  II). 

29  ELECTRICITY  AND  MAGNETISM 

The  electromagnetic  field,  electrical  potential,  magnetic  field,  and  electric  and 
magnetic  properties  of  matter.  Electric  circuits.  Maxwell's  equations.  Labora- 
tory includes  electronics  as  well  as  classical  electricity  and  magnetism.  Four 
hours  of  lecture  and  three  hours  of  laboratory/  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Astronomy  and 
Physics  26  (Waves  and  Particles  A). 

30  PLANETARIUM  TECHNIQUES 

A  methods  course  covering  major  aspects  of  planetarium  programming, 
operation,  and  maintenance.  Students  are  required  to  prepare  and  present 
a  planetarium  show.  Upon  successfully  completing  the  course,  students  are 
eligible  to  become  planetarium  assistants.  Two  hours  of  lecture  and  demonstra- 
tion and  four  hours  of  practical  training  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Astronomy  and 
Physics  11  (Principles  of  Astronomy)  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

33  OPTICS 

Geometrical  optics  and  optical  systems;  physical  optics,  interference, 
Fraunhofer  and  Fresnel  diffraction;  and  coherence  and  lasers  will  be  covered. 

Three  lectures  and  three  hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisites:  Astronomy/Physics 
16  or  26  and  Mathematics  9  or  18,  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

32     ATMOSPHERIC  PHYSICS  B 

42     ATMOSPHERIC  PHYSICS  A 

A  survey  course  on  the  physics  of  the  upper  atmosphere.  Lectures  presented 
bx/  the  "3  +  1"  method.  Credit  may  not  be  earned  for  both  32  and  42. 
Prerequisites  for  32:  12  (Environmental  and  Earth  Science)  and  Astronomy  and 
Physics  16  or  26  (Waves  and  Particles  B  or  A).  Prerequisites  for  Astronomy  and 
Physics  42:  12  (Environmental  and  Earth  Science)  and  Astronomy  and  Physics  26 
(Waves  and  Particles  A).  Alternate  years. 

34  RELATIVITY  AND  COSMOLOGY  B 

44     RELATIVITY  AND  COSMOLOGY  A 

A  detailed  presentation  of  the  special  theory  of  relativity,  and  a  short  view 
of  the  general  theory  and  its  classical  proofs.  Man's  concepts  of  the  universe, 

50 


with  particular  attention  to  alternative  modern  cosmological  models.  Dis- 
cussion of  the  Cosmological  Principle,  its  rationale,  and  its  implications. 
Lectures  will  be  presented  by  the  "3  +  1"  method.  Credit  may  not  be  earned  for 
both  Astronomy  and  Physics  34  and  44.  Prerequisites  for  Astronomy  and  Physics 
34:  11  (Principles  of  Astronomy)  and  either  Astronomy  and  Physics  15  or  25 
(Concepts  of  Physics  B  or  A),  Mathematics  18  (Calculus  I).  Prerequisites  for 
Astronomy  and  Physics  44: 1 1  (Principles  of  Astronomy)  and  25  (Concepts  of  Physics 
A). 

35  STELLAR  EVOLUTION  AND  NUCLEOSYNTHESIS  B 

45  STELLAR  EVOLUTION  AND  NUCLEOSYNTHESIS  A 

The  physical  principles  governing  the  internal  structure  and  external 
appearance  of  stars.  Mechanisms  of  energy  generation  and  transport  within 
stars.  The  evolution  of  stars  from  initial  formation  to  final  stages.  The  creation 
of  chemical  elements  by  nucleosynthesis.  Lectures  presented  by  the  "3  +  1" 
method.  Credit  may  not  be  earned  for  both  Astronomy  and  Physics  35  and 
45.  Prerequisites  for  Astronomy  and  Physics  35:  11  (Principles  of  Astronomy)  and 
either  Astronomy  and  Physics  16  or  26  (Waves  and  Particles  B  or  A).  Corequisite 
for  Astronomy  and  Physics  35:  Mathematics  19  (Calculus  II)  or  consent  of  the 
instructor.  Prerequisites  for  Astronomy  andPhysics45: 11  (Principles  of  Astronomy) 
and  26  (Waves  and  Particles  A).  Alternate  years. 

36  STELLAR  DYNAMICS  AND  GALACTIC  STRUCTURE  B 

46  STELLAR  DYNAMICS  AND  GALACTIC  STRUCTURE  A 

The  motion  of  objects  in  gravitational  fields.  Introduction  to  the  n-body 
problem.  The  relation  between  stellar  motions  and  the  galactic  potential.  The 
large  scale  structure  of  galaxies  in  general  and  of  the  Milky  Way  Galaxy  in 
particular.  Lectures  presented  by  the  "3  +  1 "  method.  Credit  may  not  be  earned 
for  both  Astronomy  and  Physics  36  and  46.  Prerequisites  for  36: 11  (Principles 
of  Astronomy)  and  either  15  or  25  (Concepts  of  Physics  B  or  A).  Corequisite  for 
Astronomy  and  Physics  36:  Mathematics  19  (Calculus  II)  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Prerequisites  for  Astronomy  and  Physics  46:  11  (Principles  of  Astronomy)  and  25 
(Concepts  of  Physics  A).  Corequisite  for  Astronomy  and  Physics  46:  28  (Mechanics) 
or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

48  INTRODUCTION  TO  QUANTUM  MECHANICS 

Basic  concepts  and  formulation  of  quantum  theory.  The  free  particle,  the 
simple  harmonic  oscillator,  the  hydrogen  atom,  and  central  force  problems 
will  be  discussed.  Both  time  independent  and  time  dependent  perturbation 
theory  will  be  covered.  Four  hours  of  lecture  and  recitation.  Prerequisite:  either 
Astronomy  and  Physics  26  (Waves  and  Particles  A)  or  Chemistry  31  (Physical 
Chemistry  11),  and  Mathematics  21  (Differential  Equations). 

49  ASTRONOMY  AND  PHYSICS  COLLOQU1A 

Active  scientists  in  astronomy,  physics,  and  related  areas  are  invited  to  present 
lectures  on  their  own  research  or  other  professional  activities.  In  addition,  seniors 
majoring  in  astronomy  or  physics  present  the  results  of  a  literature  survey  or 
individual  research  project.  One  hour  per  week.  Majors  in  this  department  must 
attend  three  semesters  without  credit  during  junior  and  senior  years  (register 

51 


for  non-credit  00,  Colloquia).   Credit  may  be  earned  during  the  senior 
semester  in  which  the  student's  presentation  is  given. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  physics  work  off-campus  under  the  supervision  of  professional 
physicists  employed  by  local  industries  or  hospitals. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Independent  studies  may  be  undertaken  in  most  areas  of  astronomy  and/or 
physics. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


BIOLOGY 

Associate  Professor:  Angstadt  (Chairman) 

Assistant  Professor:  Diehl,  Gabriel,  D.  King,  Zaccaria 

A  major  consists  of  eight  Biology  courses  including  10-11,  21,  22,  23,  24,  and  25. 
In  addition,  three  units  of  chemistry  and  two  units  of  mathematics  are  required. 
The  chemistry  requirement  must  include  at  least  one  unit  of  organic  chemistry 
chosen  from  Chemistry  5,  20  or  21.  The  mathematics  courses  must  be  chosen 
from  courses  numbered  9,  13,  14,  15,  17  or  above  or  their  equivalent.  Certain 
specific  exceptions  to  the  core  program  will  be  made  for  three-year  students 
enrolled  in  cooperative  programs.  Such  exceptions  are  noted  under  the  particu- 
lar cooperative  program  described  in  the  last  section  of  the  Curriculum  Chapter 
of  the  catalog  and  students  interested  in  these  programs  should  contact  the 
Program  Director  before  finalizing  their  individual  programs.  Credit  may  not  be 
earned  for  both  Biology  1  and  10  or  for  both  Biology  2  and  11.  Consent  of 
instructor  may  replace  Biology  10-11  as  a  prerequisite  for  all  Biology  courses. 

1-2     PRINCIPLES  OF  BIOLOGY 

An  investigation  of  biological  principles,  including  ecological  systems,  form 
and  function  in  selected  representative  organisms  (especially  man),  cell 
theory,  molecular  biology,  reproduction,  inheritance,  adaptation,  and  evolu- 
tion. The  course  is  designed  primarily  for  students  not  planning  to  major  in 
the  biological  sciences.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  two-hour  laboratory  per 
week. 

3     FIELD  BIOLOGY  FOR  TEACHERS 

A  methods  course  for  students  preparing  to  teach  biology.  Sources  and 
methods  of  collecting  and  preserving  various  plant  and  animal  materials. 
Summer  Term  only. 

5-6     HUMAN  ANATOMY— PHYSIOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  physics  and  chemistry  relative  to  biological  systems. 
Human  anatomy,  physiology,  and  developmental  biology  will  be  surveyed. 
An  introduction  to  microbiology  with  emphasis  given  to  host-pathogen 

52 


relationships  and  the  immune  response.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  three- 
hour  laboratoni  per  week. 

10-11     INTRODUCTION  TO  BIOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  study  of  biology  designed  for  students  planning  to 
major  in  the  biological  sciences.  Major  topics  considered  include  the  origin 
of  life,  cellular  respiration  and  photosynthesis,  genetics,  development, 
anatomy  and  physiology,  ecology,  behavior  and  evolution.  Three  hours  of 
lecture  and  one  three-hour  laboratoni  per  week. 

21  MICROBIOLOGY 

A  study  of  microorganisms.  Emphasis  is  given  to  the  identification  and 
physiology  of  microorganisms  as  well  as  to  their  role  in  disease,  their 
economic  importance  and  industrial  applications.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  tzvo 
two-hour  laboratoni  periods  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11. 

22  GENETICS 

A  general  consideration  of  the  principles  governing  inheritance  including 
treatment  of  classical,  molecular,  cytological,  physiological,  microbial,  hu- 
man and  population  genetics.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  tico  tzco-hour  laboratory 
periods  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11. 

23  ANIMAL  PHYSIOLOGY 

The  mechanisms  and  functions  of  animal  systems  including  the  autonomic, 
endocrine,  digestive,  cardio-vascular,  respiratory,  renal,  nervous,  and 
reproductive  systems.  Mammalian  physiology  is  stressed.  Three  hours  of 
lecture  and  one  three-hour  laboratoni  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11. 

24  ECOLOGY 

The  study  of  the  principles  of  ecology  with  emphasis  on  the  role  of  chemical, 
physical,  and  biological  factors  affecting  the  distribution  and  succession  of 
plant  and  animal  populations  and  communities.  Included  will  be  field  studies 
of  local  habitats  as  well  as  laboratory  experimentation.  Two  hours  of  lecture  and 
one  four-hour  laboratoni  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11. 

25  PLANT  SCIENCES 

A  survey  of  the  structure,  development,  function,  classification  and  use  of 
plants,  with  emphasis  on  flowering  plants.  The  study  will  comprise  four 
general  topic  areas:  Form,  including  morphology  and  anatomy  of  plants  in 
growth  and  reproduction;  Function,  concentrating  on  nutrition  and 
metabolism  peculiar  to  photosynthetic  organisms;  classification  systems  and 
plant  identification;  and  human  uses  of  plants.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one 
three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11 

30     COMPARATIVE  ANATOMY  OF  VERTEBRATES 

Detailed  examination  of  the  origins,  structure,  and  functions  of  the  principal 
organs  of  vertebrates.  Special  attention  is  given  to  the  progressive  mod- 
ification of  organs  from  lower  to  higher  vertebrates.  Three  hours  of  lecture  ami 
one  four-hour  laboratory  per  iceek.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

53 


31     HISTOLOGY 

A  study  of  the  basic  body  tissues  and  the  microscopic  anatomy  of  the  organs 
and  structures  of  the  body  which  are  formed  from  them.  Focus  is  on  normal 
human  histology.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  per  week. 
Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

33  ECONOMIC  AND  SYSTEMATIC  BOTANY 

Structure  and  classification  of  plants,  with  emphasis  on  those  species, 
particularly  food  and  drug  plants,  having  significance  for  human  affairs. 
Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisites:  Biology 
10-11.  Biology  25.  Alternate  years. 

34  INVERTEBRATE  ZOOLOGY 

Comparative  study  of  the  invertebrate  phyla  with  emphasis  on  phylogeny, 
physiology,  morphology  and  ecology.  Two  three-hour  lecture/laboratory  periods 
per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11. Alternate  years. 

35  CELLULAR  PHYSIOLOGY 

Physico-chemical  background  of  cellular  function:  functions  of  membrane 
systems  and  organelles;  metabolic  pathways;  biochemical  and  cellular  bases 
of  growth;  development  and  responses  of  organisms.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and 
one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11,  and  a  year  of 
Chemistry.  Alternate  years. 

36  INTRODUCTION  TO  MARINE  BIOLOGY  AND  BIOLOGICAL 
OCEANOGRAPHY 

The  study  of  major  marine  habitats  and  the  adaptations  of  marine  organisms 
as  well  as  the  physical  and  chemical  characteristics  of  oceans.  This  field 
oriented  course  is  held  at  a  major  Marine  Biological  Station,  and  includes 
diving  and  collecting  from  boats.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  May  term  only. 

37  FIELD  ORNITHOLOGY 

A  field  oriented  course,  with  in-the-field  discussions,  demonstrations  and 
exercises  dealing  with  the  systematics  and  identification  of  the  birds  of  the 
Northern  U.S.,  their  behavior,  migration,  habitat  selection  and  populations 
dynamics.  Studies  will  stress  experimental  techniques  used  in  the  field, 
including  banding,  recording  and  playback  methods,  territorial  mapping  and 
population  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  May  term  only. 

38  CLINICAL  MICROBIOLOGY 

A  rigorous  introduction  to  Clinical  Microbiology  with  emphasis  given  to 
rapid  identification  of  human  bacterial  pathogens.  Laboratory  to  include 
such  diagnostic  procedures  as  antibiotic  sensitivity  testing,  serological 
diagnosis,  anaerobic  culture  techniques  and  hemolytic  reactions.  Field  trips 
will  be  taken  to  several  clinical  labs.  Prerequisites:  Biology  10-11,  Biology  21. 
May  term  only. 

54 


41  VERTEBRATE  EMBRYOLOGY 

A  study  of  the  development  of  vertebrates  from  fertilization  to  the  fully 
formed  fetus.  Particular  attention  is  given  to  the  chick  and  human  as 
representative  organisms.  Two  three-tour  lecture/laboratory  periods  per  week. 
Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

42  ANIMAL  BEHAVIOR 

A  study  of  the  causation,  function,  evolution,  and  biological  significance  of 
animal  behaviors  in  their  normal  environment  and  social  contexts.  Three 
hours  of  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  each  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10- 
11.  Alternate  years. 


44    BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis  is  given  to  the  metabolism  of  carbohydrates,  lipids,  amino  acids, 
proteins,  and  nucleic  acids;  integration  of  metabolism;  and  biochemical 
control  mechanisms  including  allosteric  control,  induction,  repression,  as 
well  as  the  various  types  of  inhibitive  control  mechanisms.  Three  hours  of 
lecture,  one  three  hour  laboratory  and  one  hour  of  arranged  work  per  week. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  20-21  or  Chemistry  5 ,  or  consent  of  instructor .  Cross-listed 
as  Chemistry  44.  Alternate  years. 

46  PLANT  ANATOMY  AND  PHYSIOLOGY 

A  study  of  plant  physiology  as  a  function  of  plant  anatomy.  Metabolic 
relationships  and  environmental  factors  will  be  examined  from  a  background 
of  the  structure  and  development  of  cells,  tissues,  organs,  and  whole  plants. 
Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  three-hour  laboratory  per  week.  Prerequisites:  Biology 
10-11,  Biology  25.  Alternate  years. 

47  IMMUNOLOGY 

The  course  introduces  concepts  concerning  how  pathogens  cause  disease 
and  host  defense  mechanisms  against  infectious  diseases.  Characterization 
of  and  relationships  between  antigens,  haptens,  and  antibodies  are  pre- 
sented. Serological  assays  will  include:  agglutination  precipitations,  im- 
munofluorescence, immunoelectrophoresis,  and  complement  fixation.  Oth- 
er topics  are:  immediate  and  delayed  hypersensitivities  (i.e.  allergies  such  as 
hay  fever  and  poison  ivy),  immunological  renal  diseases,  im- 
munohematology  (blood  groups,  etc.)  the  chemistry  and  function  of  comple- 
ment autoimmunity  and  organ  graft  rejection  phenomena.  Three  hours  of 
lecture,  one  three-hour  laboratory  and  one  hour  of  arranged  work  per  week. 
Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

48  ENDOCRINOLOGY 

This  course  begins  with  a  survey  of  the  role  of  the  endocrine  hormones  in 
the  integration  of  body  functions.  This  is  followed  by  a  study  of  the  control 
of  hormone  synthesis  and  release,  and  a  consideration  of  the  mechanisms 
by  which  hormones  accomplish  their  effects  on  target  organs.  Two  three-hour 
lecture /laboratory  periods  per  week.  Prerequisite:  Biology  10-11.  Alternate  years. 

55 


70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Recent  samples  of  internships  in  the  department  include  ones  with  the 
Department  of  Environmental  Resources,  nuclear  medicine  or  rehabilitative 
therapies  at  the  local  hospital. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Departmental  Studies  are  experimentally  oriented  and  may  entail  either  lab 
or  field  work. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

Examples  of  recent  Honors  Projects  have  involved  stream  analysis,  gypsy 
moth  research,  drug  synthesis  and  testing. 


BUSINESS  ADMINISTRATION 

Professor:  Hollenback  (Chairman) 

Assistant  Professor:  E.  King,  Shareef,  Weaver 

Lecturer:  Larrabee 

The  major  is  designed  to  train  students  in  analytical  thinking  and  verbal  and  oral 
communication,  in  addition  to  educating  them  in  the  principal  disciplines  of 
business.  To  accomplish  this,  ten  courses  are  required:  Business  10-11,  23,  28-29, 
38-39,  40,  and  41  and  Mathematics  13.  Business  32,  43,  or  44  may  be  substituted 
for  Business  29,  and  Business  33  may  be  substituted  for  Business  39.  Accounting 
10  may  be  substituted  for  Business  10  if  a  student's  major  changes.  Majors  also 
are  urged  to  enroll  in  Economics  10,  11;  Business  35  and  36;  Mathematics  12  and 
15,  and  are  encouraged  to  take  a  foreign  language.  The  additional  elective 
offerings  are  intended  to  add  depth  in  the  areas  of  finance,  marketing,  and 
management. 

10-11     MANAGERIAL  ACCOUNTING 

The  business  firm  is  a  decision-making  institution  adapting  to  a  constantly 
changing  environment.  Future  administrators  and  managers  are  introduced 
to  their  stewardship  responsibilities  by  use  of  accounting  and  statistical 
techniques  as  tools  in  planning  and  controlling  the  organization. 

23     QUANTITATIVE  BUSINESS  ANALYSIS 

Techniques  of  quantitative  analysis  useful  in  business  management.  Topics 
include:  sampling,  hypothesis  testing,  index  numbers,  analysis  of  time 
series,  linear  programming,  and  decision  theory.  Prerequisite:  Math  13  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

28-29     MARKETING  MANAGEMENT 

Planning,  organization,  and  control  of  the  distribution  activities  of  the  firm, 
and  an  analysis  and  evaluation  of  the  marketing  system,  its  institutions  and 
processes.  Application  of  marketing  principles  and  the  development  of 
strategies  for  specific  marketing  problems.  Product,  channel  flow,  promotion 
and  pricing  strategies  explored.  Readings,  cases,  and  games. 

56 


32  ADVERTISING 

Nature,  scope,  methods,  and  effects  of  promotion.  Techniques  of  analysis 
and  control  in  the  use  of  advertising  and  publicity  as  tools  in  developing 
business  strategy. 

33  INVESTMENTS 

Analysis  of  the  leading  types  of  investments  available  to  the  individul  and 
the  firm.  Use  of  forecasting  methods,  financial  reports,  and  financial 
indicators.  Methods  of  buying  and  selling  securities  with  a  discussion  of  the 
agencies  involved  including  brokerage  houses  and  stock  exchanges. 

34  INSURANCE 

Analysis  of  the  major  insurance  methods  of  overcoming  risk,  including:  life, 
accident,  health,  marine,  and  social  insurance.  Fidelity  and  surety  bonds. 
Commercial  and  government  plans. 

35  LEGAL  PRINCIPLES  I 

Lectures  and  analysis  of  cases  on  the  nature,  sources,  and  fundamentals  of 
the  law  in  general,  and  particularly  as  relating  to  contracts,  agency,  and 
negotiable  instruments.  Open  only  to  juniors  and  seniors. 

36  LEGAL  PRINCIPLES  II 

Lectures  on  the  fundamentals  and  history  of  the  law  relating  to  legal 
association,  real  property,  wills,  and  estates.  Open  only  to  juniors  and  seniors. 

38-39     FINANCIAL  MANAGEMENT 

Planning,  organization,  and  control  of  the  financial  aspects  of  the  firm. 
Development  of  financial  principles  and  application  to  specific  situations. 
Sources  and  uses  of  funds,  costs  of  funds,  profit  determination,  expansion, 
reorganization  and  liquidation.  Prerequisite:  Business  11  or  Accounting  20,  and 
Business  23. 

40  MANAGEMENT  CONCEPTS 

Structural  characteristics  and  functional  relationships  of  a  business  organiza- 
tion as  well  as  the  problems  encountered  in  coordinating  the  internal 
resources  of  a  firm.  Emphasis  on  administrative  efficiency  and  procedures. 

41  BUSINESS  POLICIES 

Planning,  organization,  and  control  of  business  operations;  setting  of  goals; 
coordination  of  resources;  development  of  policies.  Analysis  of  strategic 
decisions  encompassing  all  areas  of  a  business,  and  the  use  and  analysis  of 
control  measures.  Emphasis  on  both  the  internal  relationship  of  various 
elements  of  production,  finance,  marketing,  and  personnel  and  the  rela- 
tionship of  the  business  entity  to  external  stimuli.  Readings,  cases,  and 
games.  Prerequisites:  Business  23,  28-29,  38-39,  and  40  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Seniors  only. 

57 


42  PERSONNEL  MANAGEMENT 

An  introduction  to  the  managerial  problems  of  recruiting,  selecting,  training, 
and  retraining  the  human  resources  of  the  firm.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the 
interrelationship  of  personnel  policies  with  management  objectives  and 
philosophies  in  such  areas  as  fringe  benefits,  wage  and  salary  policies,  union 
activities,  and  health  and  safety. 

43  RETAIL  MANAGEMENT  I 

Planning,  organization,  and  control  of  the  retailing  firm.  Competitive 
strategy  development  through  store  location,  layout,  administrative  or- 
ganization, buying  and  pricing.  Cases,  reading,  and  papers.  Alternate  years. 

44  RETAIL  MANAGEMENT  II 

Inventory  control,  retail  sales,  promotion,  and  financial  analysis  of  the 
enterprise.  Survey  of  current  issues  and  government,  social,  and  economic 
forces  of  concern  to  the  retailer.  Retailing  principles  applied  to  specific 
management  situations  through  cases,  games,  and  reading.  Prerequisite: 
Business  43  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

46  PRODUCTION  MANAGEMENT 

An  introduction  to  the  production  function  in  industry.  Topics  include: 
product  design,  plant  location  and  layout,  operational  analysis,  performance 
standards,  line  balance  theory,  inventory  control,  and  the  impact  of 
automation  through  technological  change.  Alternate  years. 

47  CREATIVE  ADVERTISING 

A  workshop  concerned  with  theme,  copy,  and  effective  presentation  of 
advertisements  for  print  media,  radio,  and  direct  mail.  Primarily  an 
exploration  of  creativity  through  analysis  of  works  of  artists  and  writers  with 
application  to  practical  advertising  and  tailored  to  the  interests  of  individual 
students.  May  Term. 

48  SALES  SEMINAR 

The  role  of  selling  in  the  economy.  The  art  of  creative  selling;  application  of 
theories  from  the  behavioral  sciences  to  selling  through  the  analysis  of  sales 
situations  and  techniques.  Alternate  years. 

49  MANAGING  THE  SMALL  BUSINESS 

How  the  potential  businessman  proceeds  in  establishing,  operating,  and 
profiting  from  a  small  business  operation.  Considered  and  analyzed  are  such 
aspects  as  marketing,  managing,  financing,  promoting,  insuring,  establish- 
ing, developing,  and  staffing  the  small  retail,  wholesale  service,  and 
manufacturing  firm.  May  term. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Typical  examples  are  marketing  analysis  for  a  paper  products  firm,  planning 
a  branch  store,  hotel  and  real  estate  management,  banking  and  insurance. 

58 


80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Examples  of  recent  studies  are:  The  economic  impact  of  a  college  on  a 
community;  a  marketing  strategy  for  a  local  firm  entering  the  consumer 
market. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

A  recent  project  was  a  study  of  the  evolution  of  anti-trust  legislation  in  the 
United  States. 


CHEMISTRY 

Professor:  Hummer,  Radspinner 
Associate  Professor:  Franz  (Chairman) 
Part-Time  Instructor:  Baggett 

A  major  consists  of  eight  Chemistry  courses:  Chemistry  10-11,  20-21,  30-31,  32, 
and  33;  Mathematics  18, 19,  20,  and  Astronomy  and  Physics  25,  26.  Mathematics 
15  and  21,  and  French  or  German  are  highly  recommended.  To  be  certified  in 
secondary  education,  chemistry  majors  must  also  pass  two  biology  courses 
numbered  10  or  higher. 

10  GENERAL  CHEMISTRY  I 

An  introduction  to  the  concepts  and  models  of  chemistry  which  are 
necessary  for  an  understanding  of  the  fabric  and  dynamics  of  the  material 
world.  These  principles  include  stoichiometry,  atomic  and  molecular  struc- 
ture and  properties,  the  states  of  matter,  solutions,  kinetics,  equilibrium, 
and  nomenclature.  A  study  of  the  chemistry  of  representative  elements  and 
their  compounds  is  made  through  the  application  of  fundamental  prin- 
ciples. The  laboratory  work  introduces  the  student  to  methods  of  separa- 
tion, purification,  and  identification  of  compounds  according  to  their 
physical  properties.  Three  hours  lecture,  one  hour  discussion,  and  one  three-hour 
laboratory  period  each  week.  Prerequisite:  Placement  in  Chemistry  10  is  determined 
in  part  by  a  student's  score  on  the  mathematics  examination  taken  by  all  incoming 
Freshmen  during  orientation. 

11  GENERAL  CHEMISTRY  II 

Continuation  of  Chemistry  10,  with  emphasis  on  the  foundations  of 
analytical,  inorganic,  and  physical  chemistry.  The  principal  unifying  con- 
cepts of  chemical  systems  are  examined  in  both  Chemistry  10  and  11.  The 
laboratory  treats  aspects  of  quantitative  and  qualitative  analysis.  Three  hours 
lecture,  one  hour  discussion,  and  one  three-hour  laboratory  period  each  week. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  10. 

15     BRIEF  ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 

This  course  is  designed  for  those  non-chemistry  majors  who  elect  a  single 
semester  course  only  in  organic  chemistry.  The  material  will  illustrate 
principles  and  concepts  of  organic  chemistry  supported  by  that  descriptive 
material  which  would  find  application  for  students  of  medical  technology, 

59 


biology,  nursing,  forestry,  education,  and  the  humanities.  Topics  included 
are  bonding  and  structure,  alcanes,  arenes,  and  their  functional  derivatives, 
amino  acids  and  proteins,  carbohydrates,  and  other  naturally  occurring 
compounds.  Three  hours  of  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  period  each  week. 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  10.  Not  open  for  credit  to  students  who  have  received  credit 
for  Chemistry  20. 

20-21     ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 

A  systematic  study  of  the  compounds  of  carbon  including  both  aliphatic  and 
aromatic  series.  The  laboratory  work  introduces  the  student  to  simple 
fundamental  methods  of  organic  synthesis,  isolation,  and  analysis.  Three 
hours  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  period  each  week.  Prerequisite: 
Chemistry  11. 

26     CLINICAL  ANALYSIS 

A  presentation  of  selected  wet-chemical  and  instrumental  methods  of 
quantitative  analysis  with  an  orientation  toward  clinical  applications  in 
medical  technology.  Topics  include:  general  methods  and  calculations; 
solutions;  titrations;  photometric  analyses  (colorimetric,  atomic  absorption, 
flame  emission);  electrochemical  methods  (ion-selective  electrodes, 
coulometry);  automation.  Lecture,  recitation,  and  laboratory  daily.  Prerequisite: 
Chemistry  10-11,  or  consent  of  the  instructor.  May  not  be  taken  for  credit  following 
Chemistry  32.  May  Term  only. 

30-31     PHYSICAL  CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  the  fundamental  principles  of  theoretical  chemistry  and  their 
applications.  The  laboratory  work  includes  techniques  in  physiochemical 
measurements.  Three  hours  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  period  each 
week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  11,  Mathematics  20,  and  one  year  of  Physics  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

32  ANALYTICAL  CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  the  fundamental  methods  of  gravimetric,  volumetric,  and 
elementary  instrumental  analysis  together  with  practice  in  laboratory  techni- 
ques and  calculations  of  these  methods.  Two  hours  lecture  and  two  three-hour 
laboratori/  periods  each  week.  Prerequisite:  Cliemistry  11  or  consent  of  instructor. 

33  ADVANCED  INORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  modern  theories  of  atomic  and  molecular  structure  and  their 
relationship  to  the  chemistry  of  selected  elements  and  their  compounds. 
Three  hours  lecture  and  one  four-hour  laboratory  period  each  week.  Prerequisite: 
Cliemistry  30,  Mathematics  20,  and  one  year  of  Physics  or  consent  of  instructor. 

39     INTRODUCTION  TO  QUANTUM  MECHANICS 

After  presenting  the  origin,  basic  concepts  and  formulation  of  Quantum 
Mechanics  with  emphasis  on  its  physical  meaning,  the  free  particle,  simple 
harmonic  oscillator  and  central  force  problems  will  be  investigated.  Both  time 
independent  and  time  dependent  perturbation  theory  will  be  covered.  The 
elegant  operator  formalism  of  quantum  mechanics  will  conclude  the  course. 
Four  hours  of  lecture  and  recitation.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  21,  either  Chemistry 

60 


31  or  Astronomy  and  Physics  26,  and  consent  of  instructor.  Cross-listed  as 
Astronomy  and  Physics  48. 

40  ADVANCED  ORGANIC  CHEMISTRY 

Selected  topics,  which  may  include  mechanisms  of  organic  reactions, 
synthesis,  detailed  structure  and  chemistry  of  natural  products,  polynuclear 
hydrocarbons,  and  aromatic  heterocyclics.  Three  hours  lecture.  Prerequisite: 
Chemistry  22. 

41  QUALITATIVE  ORGANIC  ANALYSIS 

Theory  and  application  of  the  systematic  identification  of  pure  organic 
compounds  and  mixtures.  Two  hours  lecture  and  tzoo  three-hour  laboratory 
periods  each  week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  21. 

43  ADVANCED  ANALYTICAL  CHEMISTRY 

A  study  of  advanced  analytical  methods  with  emphasis  on  chromatographic, 
electrochemical,  and  spectroscopic  methods  of  analysis.  Three  hours  lecture 
and  one  four-lwur  laboratory  period  each  week.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  31  and  32. 

44  BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis  is  given  to  the  metabolism  of  carbohydrates,  lipids,  amino  acids, 
proteins,  and  nucleic  acids;  integration  of  metabolism;  and  biochemical 
control  mechanisms  including  allosteric  control,  induction,  repression,  as 
well  as  the  various  types  of  inhibitive  control  mechanisms.  Prerequisite: 
Chemistry  21  or  5  or  consent  of  instructor.  Cross-listed  as  Biology  44. 

45  SPECTROSCOPY  AND  MOLECULAR  STRUCTURE 

Theory  and  practice  of  molecular  structure  determination  by  spectroscopic 
methods.  Three  hours  lecture.  Pre  or  co- requisites:  Chemistry  31,  33,  or  consent 
of  instructor. 

48    CHEMISTRY  COLLOQUIUM 

A  seminar  in  which  faculty,  students,  and  invited  professional  chemists 
discuss  their  own  research  activities  or  those  of  others  which  have  appeared 
in  the  recent  chemical  literature.  Prerequisite:  Three  semesters  of  non-credit 
Chemistry  Colloquium  taken  during  the  junior  and  senior  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

The  student  will  ordinarily  work  under  supervision  in  an  industrial  labora- 
tory and  submit  a  written  report  on  his  project. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

The  student  will  ordinarily  work  on  a  laboratory  research  project  and  will 
write  a  thesis  on  his  work. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

The  student  will  ordinarily  work  on  a  laboratory  research  project  with 
emphasis  being  on  the  student's  showing  initiative  and  making  a  scholarly 
contribution.  A  thesis  will  be  written. 

61 


CRIMINAL  JUSTICE 

Assistant  Professor:  Strauser  (Coordinator) 

This  major  is  designed  to  acquaint  students  with  the  American  criminal  justice 
system  and  to  provide  an  understanding  of  the  social,  psychological, 
philosophical,  and  political  contexts  within  which  the  system  of  criminal  justice 
functions.  Its  aim  is  to  develop  students'  intellectual  and  scientific  skills  in  raising 
and  attempting  to  answer  important  questions  about  the  system  of  justice  and 
its  place  in  society.  The  program  offers  opportunity  for  intern  experience  in  the 
field  and  prepares  for  careers  in  the  areas  of  law  enforcement,  probation  and 
parole,  prisons,  and  treatment  services. 

The  major  has  two  tracks.  Track  I  prepares  for  careers  in  Law  Enforcement. 
Track  II  prepares  for  careers  in  Corrections. 

Track  I — Law  Enforcement.  The  major  consists  of  ten  courses,  distributed 
as  follows: 

A.  Professional  courses  in  criminal  justice  (three  courses) 

Introduction  to  the  Criminal  Justice  System  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  15) 
Introduction  to  Law  Enforcement  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  23) 
The  American  Prison  System  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  39) 

B.  Courses  in  the  social,  psychological,  philosophical,  and  political  context  of, 
the  justice  system  (seven  courses) 

Criminology  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  30)  and  either  Juvenile  Delin- 
quency (Sociology  and  Anthropology  21)  or  Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities 
(Sociology  and  Anthropology  34)  (two  courses) 
Abnormal  Psychology  (Psychology  16)  (one  course) 

America  as  a  Civilization  (American  Studies  10).  Afro- American  History 
(History  28),  or  United  States  Social  and  Intellectual  History  Since  1877 
(History  43)  (one  course) 

Law  and  Society  (Political  Science  35)  and  Civil  Rights  and  Liberties  (Political 
Science  31)  (two  courses) 
Philosophical  Issues  in  Criminal  Justice  (Philosophy  18)  (one  course) 

C.  Internship   or   practicum   in   law   enforcement.    (Recommended  but  not 
required  for  the  major) 

Track  II — Corrections.  The  major  consists  of  ten  courses,  distributed  as 
follows: 

A.  Professional  courses  in  criminal  justice  (three  courses) 

Introduction  to  the  Criminal  Justice  System  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  15) 
The  American  Prison  System  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  39) 
Introduction  to  Social  Work  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  42) 

B.  Courses  in  the  social,  psychological,  philosophical,  and  political  context  of 
the  justice  system  (seven  courses) 

Criminology  (Sociology  and  Anthropology  30)  and  either  Juvenile  Delin- 
quency (Sociology  and  Anthropology  21)  or  Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities 
(Sociology  and  Anthropology  34)  (two  courses) 
Abnormal  Psychology  (Psychology  16)  (one  course) 

America  as  a  Civilization  (American  Studies  10).  Afro-American  History 
(History  28),  or  United  States  Social  and  Intellectual  History  Since  1877 
(History  43)  (one  course) 

62 


Law  and  Society  (Political  Science  35)  and  Civil  Rights  and  Liberties  (Political 

Science  31)  (two  courses) 

Philosophical  Issues  in  Criminal  Justice  (Philosophy  18)  (one  course) 

C.  Internship  or  practicum  in  corrections.  (Recommended  but  not  required  for 
the  major)  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  13,  Psychology  21,  and  Psychology  39. 
These  prerequisites  may  be  waived  in  certain  cases  by  the  Coordinating 
Committee. 

Majors  should  seek  advice  concerning  course  selection  from  members  of  the 
coordinating  committee  and  should  note  course  prerequisites  in  planning  their 
programs. 


ECONOMICS 

Professor:  Opdahl  (Chairman),  Rabold 

The  major  has  two  tracks.  Track  I  is  designed  for  the  student  whose  primary 
interest  lies  in  business  management;  Track  II  is  designed  for  students  with  an 
interest  in  graduate  work,  teaching,  government,  or  non-business  careers  and  for 
those  with  less  well  defined  interests. 

Track  I — Managerial  Economics  requires:  Economics  10,  11,  32,  and  41; 
Business  10-11,  or  Accounting  10  and  20;  Business  38  and  39;  plus  two  electives 
from  the  following:  Economics  20,  31,  35,  37,  43  and  Business  40. 

Track  II — Political  Economy  requires:  Economics  10,  11,  30,  31,  40,  and  five 
electives  of  which  three  must  be  in  economics  and  two  in  political  science,  all 
selected  with  the  advice  and  consent  of  the  student's  advisor  or  department 
chairman. 

In  addition,  the  following  courses  are  recommended:  All  majors — Math  13 
and  Business  23;  Majors  planning  graduate  work — Math  12  and  18;  Track  II 
majors — Business  10-11. 


63 


2     CONSUMER  ECONOMICS 

A  course  in  "family"  or  "practical"  economics,  designed  to  teach  students 
how  they  and  their  families  can  be  intelligent  consumers:  that  is,  how  they 
can  spend,  save,  and  borrow  so  as  to  maximize  the  value  they  receive  for  the 
income  they  have.  Treats  subjects  such  as  intelligent  shopping;  the  uses  and 
abuses  of  credit;  investing,  savings;  buying  insurance,  automobiles  and 
houses;  medical  care  costs;  estates  and  wills;  etc.  Alternate  years. 

10  PRINCIPLES  OF  POLITICAL  ECONOMY  I 

Macroeconomics.  Deals  with  problems  of  the  economic  system  as  a  whole. 
What  influences  the  level  of  national  income  and  employment?  What  is 
inflation  and  why  do  we  have  it?  What  is  the  role  of  government  in  a  modern 
capitalistic  system?  How  does  business  organize  to  produce  the  goods  and 
services  we  demand?  How  are  the  American  financial  and  banking  systems 
organized?  What  is  the  nature  of  American  unionism?  What  are  the  elements 
of  government  finance  and  fiscal  policy? 

11  PRINCIPLES  OF  POLITICAL  ECONOMY  II 

This  course  focuses  upon  microeconomics  and  selected  current  economic 
problems.  It  deals  with  the  relatively  small  units  of  the  economy  such  as  the 
firm  and  the  family.  Analyzes  demand  and  supply.  Discusses  how  business 
firms  decide  what  and  how  much  to  produce  and  how  goods  and  services 
are  priced  in  different  types  of  markets.  Also  considers  such  problems  as 
economic  growth,  international  trade,  poverty,  discrimination,  ecology,  and 
alternative  economic  systems. 

20     MONEY  AND  BANKING 

Covers  business  fluctuations  and  monetary  and  fiscal  policy;  the  financial 
organization  of  society;  the  banking  system;  credit  institutions;  capital 
markets;  and  international  financial  relations.  Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and 
11.  Alternate  years. 

22  ECONOMIC  SYSTEMS  OF  THE  WEST:  Capitalism  and  Socialism 

A  comparative  analysis  of  the  underlying  ideologies,  the  basic  institutions 
and  the  performance  of  selected  economic  systems  extant  in  the  West. 
Alternate  years. 

23  SOVIET-TYPE  ECONOMIES 

An  analysis  of  the  ideologies,  institutions,  and  performance  of  Soviet-type 
economies,  with  emphasis  upon  Marxian  theory  and  the  economy  of  the 
U.S.S.R.;  comparison  of  selected  Eastern  European  and  Chinese  approaches 
to  Communism.  Alternate  years. 

24  URBAN  PROBLEMS 

The  application  of  economic  theory  to  the  study  of  significant  social,  political, 
and  economic  problems  associated  with  urbanization,  including  poverty, 
employment,  education,  crime,  health,  housing,  land  use  and  the  environ- 
ment, transportation,  and  public  finance.  Analysis  of  solutions  offered. 

Alternate  years. 

64 


25     ENVIRONMENTAL  ECONOMICS 

A  study  of  the  relationship  between  environmental  decay  and  economic 
growth,  with  particular  reference  to  failures  of  the  price  and  property  rights 
systems;  application  of  cost/benefit  analysis;  measures  aimed  at  the  creation 
of  an  ecologically  viable  economy.  Alternate  years. 

30  INTERMEDIATE  MICROECONOMICS 

An  advanced  analysis  of  contemporary  theory  regarding  consumer  demand, 
production  costs  and  theory,  profit  maximization,  market  structures,  and  the 
determinants  of  returns  to  the  factors  of  production.  Prerequisite:  Economics 
10  and  11. 

31  INTERMEDIATE  MACROECONOMICS 

An  advanced  analysis  of  contemporary  theory  and  practice  with  regard  to 
business  fluctuations,  national  income  accounting,  the  determination  of 
income  and  employment  levels,  and  the  use  of  monetary  and  fiscal  policy. 
Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  11. 

32  GOVERNMENT  AND  THE  ECONOMY 

An  analytical  survey  of  government's  efforts  to  maintain  competition 
through  antitrust  legislation;  to  supervise  acceptable  cases  of  private 
monopoly  through  public  utility  regulation  and  via  means  of  regulatory 
commissions;  and  to  encourage  or  restrain  various  types  of  private  economic 
activities.  Alternate  years.  Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  11,  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

35     LABOR  PROBLEMS 

The  history  of  organized  labor  in  the  United  States,  including  the  structure 
of  unions;  employers'  opposition  to  unions;  the  role  of  government  in  labor- 
management  relations;  the  economic  impact  of  unions.  Alternate  years. 

37     PUBLIC  FINANCE 

An  analysis  of  the  fiscal  economics  of  the  public  sector,  including  the 
development,  concepts,  and  theories  of  public  expenditures,  taxation,  and 
debt  at  all  levels  of  American  government.  Includes  also  the  use  of  fiscal 
policy  as  an  economic  control  device.  Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  11  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

40  HISTORY  OF  ECONOMIC  THOUGHT 

A  discussion  of  the  origins,  development,  and  significance  of  the  economic 
ideas  embodied  in  the  works  of  Smith,  Marx,  Schumpeter,  Keynes,  and 
others.  Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  11  or  consent  of  instructor. 

41  MANAGERIAL  ECONOMICS 

The  application  of  economic  theory  and  methodology  to  the  solution  of 
business  problems.  Subjects  include:  optimizing  techniques,  risk  analysis, 
demand  theory,  production  theory,  cost  theory,  linear  programming,  capital 
budgeting,  market  structures,  and  the  theory  of  pricing.  Prerequisite:  Econom- 
ics 10  and  11. 

65 


43     INTERNATIONAL  TRADE 

A  study  of  the  principles,  theories,  development,  and  policies  concerning 
international  economic  relations,  with  particular  reference  to  the  United 
States.  Subjects  covered  include:  U.S.  commercial  policy  and  its  develop- 
ment; international  trade  theory;  tariffs  and  other  protectionist  devices; 
international  monetary  system  and  its  problems;  balance  of  payments  issues. 
Alternate  years.  Prerequisite:  Economics  10  and  11. 

45     DEVELOPMENT  OF  UNDERDEVELOPED  NATIONS 

A  study  of  the  theories  and  problems  of  capital  accumulation,  allocation  of 
resources,  technological  development,  growth,  planning  techniques  and 
institutions,  and  international  relations  encountered  by  the  developing 
nations.  Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Typically  off-campus  in  business,  banking,  or  government,  supervised  by 
assigned  employee  of  sponsoring  organization. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Superior  students  may  select  independent  study  in  various  courses,  particu- 
larly in  preparation  for  graduate  school. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


EDUCATION 

Associate  Professor:  Keesbury  (Chairman) 
Assistant  Professor:  Conrad,  Studier 

Lycoming  believes  that  the  liberal  arts  provide  the  best  preparation  for  future 
teachers,  thus  all  education  students  complete  a  liberal  arts  major  in  addition  to 
the  certification  requirements.  Students  can  be  certified  in  elementary  education 
or  one  or  more  of  the  following  secondary  areas:  biology,  chemistry,  English, 
French,  general  science  (with  biology  and  astronomy/physics  tracks),  German, 
mathematics,  physics,  social  studies,  and  Spanish.  All  teacher  education  pro- 
grams are  approved  by  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of  Education  and  Pennsyl- 
vania certificates  are  recognized  in  most  other  states  either  through  reciprocal 
agreements  or  by  transcript  evaluation. 

Education  20  and  Psychology  38  are  prerequisites  to  all  other  offerings  in  the 
Education  Department.  Education  20  should  be  taken  at  least  two  (2)  semesters 
before  the  Professional  Semester. 

Students  seeking  elementary  certification  must  complete  Mathematics  7, 
Physical  Education  A  (Elementary  Games),  Education  40,  41,  42,  43  as  prere- 
quisites to  the  Professional  Semester  (Education  45,  47,  and  48). 

Students  interested  in  the  teacher  education  program  must  register  with  the 
Education  Department  not  later  than  the  first  semester  of  the  sophomore  year. 

66 


Application  for  the  Professional  Semester  must  be  made  before  October  1  of  the 
junior  year.  The  Education  Department  will  admit  to  the  Professional  Semester 
those  applicants  who  have  a  minimum  cumulative  grade  point  average  of  2.00; 
are  in  good  academic  standing;  have  satisfactorily  completed  the  junior  year 
participation  requirements  (secondary  students  only);  have  paid  the  student 
teaching  fee;  have  had  a  satisfactory  interview  with  a  member  of  the  faculty  of 
the  Education  Department;  and  are  recommended  by  their  major  department  and 
the  Education  Department.  Since  major  departments  have  different  criteria  for 
their  recommendations,  students  should  consult  with  the  chairman  of  their  major 
department  about  those  requirements  as  soon  as  they  begin  to  study  for 
certification. 

20     INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  STUDY  OF  EDUCATION 

A  study  of  teaching  as  a  profession  with  emphasis  on  the  economic,  social, 
political,  and  religious  conditions  which  influence  American  schools  and 
teachers.  Consideration  is  given  to  the  school  environment,  the  curriculum, 
and  the  children  with  the  intention  that  the  students  will  examine  more 
rationally  their  own  motives  for  entering  the  profession.  Not  open  to  freshmen. 

32     INSTRUCTIONAL  MEDIA  AND  COMMUNICATIONS 

A  study  of  the  value,  design,  construction,  and  application  of  the  visual  and 
auditory  aids  to  learning.  Practical  experience  in  the  handling  of  audio- visual 
equipment  and  materials  is  provided.  Application  of  Audio-Visual  Techni- 
ques. Application  of  the  visual  and  auditory  aids  to  learning.  Students  will 
plan  and  carry  out  actual  teaching  assignments  utilizing  various  A- V  devices. 

39  PUBLIC  SCHOOL  CURRICULUM 

An  examination  of  the  various  curricula  of  the  public  schools  and  their 
relationships  to  current  practices.  Special  attention  will  be  given  to  the 
meaning  and  nature  of  the  curriculum;  the  desirable  outcomes  of  the 
curriculum;  conflicting  and  variant  conceptions  of  curricular  content;  modern 
techniques  of  curricular  construction;  criteria  for  the  evaluation  of  curricula; 
the  curriculum  as  a  teaching  instrument.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  upon  the 
curriculum  work  within  the  teaching  field  of  each  individual. 

40  TEACHING  LANGUAGE  ARTS  AND  CHILDREN'S  LITERATURE  IN  THE 
ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 

A  course  designed  to  consider  the  principal  means  of  communication,  oral 
and  written,  including  both  practical  and  creative  uses.  Attention  will  be 
given  to  listening,  speaking,  written  expression,  linguistics  and  grammar, 
spelling  and  handwriting.  Stress  will  be  placed  upon  the  interrelatedness  of 
the  language  arts.  Children's  literature  will  be  explored  as  a  vehicle  for 
developing  creative  characteristics  in  children  and  for  ensuring  an  apprecia- 
tion of  the  creative  writing  of  others.  Observation  and  participation  in  the 
Greater  Williamsport  Area  Elementary  Schools.  Prerequisites:  Education  20  and 
Psychology  38  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

41  TEACHING  THE  SOCIAL  STUDIES  IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 

Studies  and  experiences  to  develop  a  basic  understanding  of  the  structure, 
concepts,  and  processes  of  anthropology,  economics,  geography,  history, 

67 


political  science,  and  sociology  as  these  relate  to  the  elementary  school  social 
science  curriculum.  Practical  applications,  demonstrations  of  methods,  and 
the  development  of  integrated  teaching  units  using  tests,  reference  books, 
films,  and  other  teaching  materials.  Observation  and  participation  in  the 
elementary  schools  of  the  Greater  Williamsport  Area.  Prerequisites:  Education 
20  and  Psychology  38  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

42  TEACHING  SCIENCE  IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 

Science  methods  and  materials  interpreting  children's  science  experiences 
and  guiding  the  development  of  their  scientific  concepts.  A  study  of  the 
science  content  of  the  curriculum,  its  material  and  use.  Observation  and 
participation  in  the  elementary  schools  of  the  Greater  Williamsport  Area. 
Prerequisites:  Education  20  and  Psychology  38  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

43  TEACHING  READING  IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 

A  basic  course  in  the  philosophy  and  rationale  for  and  the  implementation 
of  an  elementary  developmental  reading  program  from  kindergarten 
through  sixth  grade.  Emphasis  is  upon  designing  a  reading  instructional 
program  which  reflects  the  nature  of  the  learning  process  and  recognizes 
principles  of  child  development  through  examination  of  the  principles, 
problems,  methods  and  materials  used  in  elementary  reading  programs. 
Observation  and  participation  in  the  Greater  Williamsport  Area  Elementary 
Schools.  Prerequisites:  Psychology  38,  Education  20,  40,  41,  and  42  or  consent  of 
the  instructor. 

45  METHODS  OF  TEACHING  IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 
(PART  OF  THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 

The  course  emphasizes  the  relationship  between  the  theoretical  studies  of 
physical,  social,  and  cognitive  development  and  the  elementary  classroom 
environment.  Particular  consideration  will  be  given  to  the  appropriate  age 
and  developmental  level  of  the  students  with  an  emphasis  upon  the  selection 
and  utilization  of  methods  in  all  the  elementary  subject  areas  including  art 
and  music.  Specific  attention  will  be  given  to  the  development  of  strategies 
for  structuring  lesson  plans;  for  maintaining  classroom  control;  and  for 
overall  classroom  management.  Direct  application  will  be  made  to  the 
individual  student  teaching  experience.  Prerequisites:  Math  7,  Education  40,41, 
42,  and  43  or  consent  of  the  instructor. 

46  METHODS  OF  TEACHING  IN  THE  SECONDARY  SCHOOL 
(PART  OF  THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 

A  study  of  materials,  methods,  and  techniques  of  teaching  with  emphasis  on 
the  student's  major.  Stress  is  placed  on  the  selection  and  utilization  of  visual 
and  auditory  aids  to  learning.  Students  will  teach  demonstration  lessons  in 
the  presence  of  the  instructor  and  the  members  of  the  class  and  will  observe 
superior  teachers  in  the  secondary  schools  of  the  Greater  Williamsport  Area. 
Prerequisites:  Education  20,  Psychology  38,  and  the  Participation  Experience. 

47  PROBLEMS  IN  CONTEMPORARY  AMERICAN  EDUCATION 
(PART  OF  THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 


Seminar  in  the  issues,  problems  and  challenges  encountered  by  teachers  in 


68 


the  American  public  schools,  especially  those  related  to  the  student  teaching 
experience. 

48  PRACTICE  TEACHING  IN  THE  ELEMENTARY  SCHOOL 
(PART  OF  THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 

Two  Units.  Exceeds  state  mandated  minimum  requirements.  Professional 
laboratory  experience  under  the  supervision  of  a  selected  cooperating  teacher 
in  a  public  elementary  school  of  the  Greater  Williamsport  Area.  Organized 
learning  experience.  Actual  classroom  experience.* 

49  PRACTICE  TEACHING  IN  THE  SECONDARY  SCHOOL 
(PART  OF  THE  PROFESSIONAL  SEMESTER) 

Two  Units.  Exceeds  state  mandated  minimum  requirements.  Professional 
laboratory  experience  under  the  supervision  of  a  selected  cooperating  teacher 
in  a  public  elementary  school  of  the  Greater  Williamsport  Area.  Organized 
learning  experience.  Emphasis  on  actual  classroom  experience,  responsi- 
bility in  the  guidance  program  and  out-of-class  activities.* 


'Practice  teachers  are  required  to  follow  the  calendar  of  the  school  district  to  which  they  are 
assigned. 


ENGLISH 

Professor:  Van  Marter 

Associate  Professor:  Jensen,  Madden,  Rife  (Chairman) 

Assistant  Professor:  Ford,  F.  Wild 

Visiting  Instructor:  Koehler,  Stone 

A  major  consists  of  nine  courses  not  including  English  1  or  English  2.  These  nine 
courses  must  include  English  14,  15,  16,  17  and  one  writing  course  from  the 
following:  English  18,  22,  23,  24,  35  and  36. 

The  four  electives  may  include  any  course  from  English  12  and  above  not 
already  taken  to  satisfy  the  preceding  requirements.  With  the  consent  of  the 
English  Department,  an  appropriate  course  from  the  offerings  of  other  depart- 
ments may  be  substituted  for  an  English  elective. 

Majors  seeking  secondary  certification  in  English  are  required  to  take 
English  38  and  to  complete  successfully  in  the  junior  or  senior  year  an 
experience  in  the  teaching  of  English  composition. 

The  English  Department  is  one  of  six  cooperating  in  the  interdisciplinary 
program  in  Mass  Communications,  and  would  be  an  appropriate  department  for 
the  four-course  specialization  required  for  the  Communications  major.  The 
department  also  participates  with  seven  others  in  the  American  Studies  in- 
terdisciplinary major,  in  which  American  literature  courses  constitute  an  impor- 
tant part  of  the  American  arts  concentration  area. 

1     INDIVIDUALIZED  LABORATORY  INSTRUCTION  IN  COLLEGE  READ- 
ING AND  WRITING 

Vocabulary  building  and  reading  for  the  main  idea;  review  of  spelling  and 
grammar;  organizing  and  writing  the  detailed  paragraph  and  illustrative 
expository  theme.   Individualized  instruction  through  tutorial  and  pro- 

69 


grammed  materials  to  ensure  mastery  of  the  student's  special  problems  in 
writing  and  reading. 

One-half  unit  and  grade  of  "S"  will  be  assigned  when  the  student  has 
passed  all  of  the  mastery  tests  in  reading  and  writing.  For  all  students  who 
have  not  been  exempted  from  English  1  through  their  CLEP  test  scores  or 
through  their  scores  on  an  approved  writing  test  taken  prior  to  enrolling  at 
Lycoming  College. 

2    COMPOSITION 

Extensive  practice  in  either  report  and  evaluative  writing  or  in  analytic  and 
argumentative  writing.  This  may  be  accomplished  by  taking  one  of  the 
following  sequences: 

Reading  and  Writing  about  Technology  and  Human  Life — Extensive  practice 
in  report  and  evaluative  writing.  Readings  dealing  with  problems  and 
issues  in  business,  in  the  natural  and  physical  sciences,  and  in  the  related 
professions. 

Reading  and  Writing  about  Humanities  and  Human  Life — Extensive  practice 
in  analytic  and  argumentative  writing.  Readings  dealing  with  problems  and 
issues  in  the  liberal  arts,  in  law  and  the  social  sciences,  and  in  the  non- 
scientific  helping  professions. 

12     INTRODUCTION  TO  LITERATURE 

An  introduction  to  the  study  of  literature,  designed  primarily  for  freshmen. 
Lectures  and  discussions  focusing  on  the  major  literary  genres. 

14     BRITISH  LITERATURE  I 

Literary  forms,  themes  and  authors  from  the  Anglo-Saxon  through  the  Neo- 
classical periods.  Such  writers  as  Chaucer,  Spenser,  Shakespeare,  Milton, 
Swift,  Pope,  and  Johnson;  representative  works  from  Beowulf  to  Sheridan's 
The  Rivals. 


15  BRITISH  LITERATURE  II 

Literary  movements  and  authors  from  the  Romantic  Period  to  the  present. 
Particular  emphasis  on  such  writers  as  Blake,  Wordsworth,  Shelley,  Mill, 
Tennyson,  Browning,  Rossetti,  Arnold,  Hardy,  Yeats,  Eliot. 

16  19TH  CENTURY  AMERICAN  LITERATURE 

Brief  survey  of  American  literature  and  thought  before  1800,  followed  by 
more  intensive  study  of  the  literature  and  thought  of  the  period  1800-1900. 
Bryant,  Cooper,  Emerson,  Thoreau,  Poe,  Hawthorne,  Melville,  Whitman, 
Dickinson,  Twain,  Howells,  and  others. 

17  20TH  CENTURY  AMERICAN  LITERATURE 

Major  writers,  movements,  and  tendencies  in  American  literature  during  the 
present  century.  Such  forces  as  naturalism,  realism,  and  modernism;  and 
such  writers  as  James,  Dreiser,  Hemingway,  Faulkner,  Frost,  Eliot,  and 
Stevens. 

70 


18     ADVANCED  COMPOSITION 

Practical  training  in  the  writing  of  more  extended  essays  of  the  kinds  written 
in  English  I,  and  other  kinds  of  expository  and  argumentative  prose, 
including  such  forms  as:  essays  of  opinion  and  personal  essays;  critical 
commentaries  and  reviews;  synopses,  reports,  and  research  papers. 

20  THE  NATURE  OF  FICTION 

Study  of  either  the  novel  or  the  short  story;  one  or  the  other  in  a  given 
semester,  not  both  in  the  same  semester.  Novel:  representative  novels  from 
the  18th  Century  to  the  present  with  emphasis  on  the  development  of  the 
genre.  Short  story:  emphasis  on  points  of  view  of  the  authors  studies. 

21  THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  DRAMA 

Discussion  of  typical  plays  of  the  Eastern  World  emphasizing  conventions 
of  form  and  performance.  Varying  focus  and  content  ranging  from  classical 
to  modern  playwrights  and  periods. 

22  CRITICAL  WRITING 

Introduction  to  the  various  ways  of  thinking  and  writing  about  literature  and 
film,  designed  for  people  who  wish  to  improve  their  understanding  and 
enjoyment  of  the  books  and  poems  they  read  and  the  plays  and  films  they 
see. 


23     NEWS  WRITING  FOR  THE  PRINT  MEDIA 

Analysis  and  practice  of  the  basic  forms  of  news  reporting  and  feature 
writing.  The  elements  of  news,  the  lead,  style  and  structure,  and  types  of 
stories.  Students  who  have  taken  English  24  may  take  only  writing  workshop 
sessions  of  this  course  for  V2  unit. 

71 


24     NEWS  WRITING  FOR  RADIO  AND  TV 

Offered  in  conjunction  with  English  23.  Separate  workshop  sessions  to 
analyze  and  practice  the  basic  forms  of  news  reporting  as  they  apply  to  radio 
and  TV.  Students  who  have  taken  English  23  may  take  only  workshop 
sessions  of  this  course  for  l/i  unit.  Alternate  years. 

30  SHAKESPEARE 

Study  of  representative  plays  drawn  from  the  four  sub-genres  of 
Shakespeare's  dramas:  comedy,  history,  tragedy,  and  romance.  Some 
attention  to  Shakespeare's  life  and  times,  but  primary  focus  on  the  work 
itself. 

31  MODERN  FICTION 

Study  of  the  techniques,  development,  and  major  tendencies  of  modern 
fiction,  from  the  last  quarter  of  the  19th  Century  to  the  1950's.  Primary 
attention  to  representative  works  of  such  major  writers  as  James,  Conrad, 
Joyce,  Lawrence,  Hemingway,  and  Faulkner. 

32  MODERN  POETRY 

Introduction  to  the  themes  and  structures  of  20th  Century  poetry.  Beginning 
with  Pound,  Eliot,  and  Yeats,  and  moving  through  the  century  to  the  most 
recent  accomplishments  of  contemporary  poets.  Alternate  years. 

33  WOMEN  AND  LITERATURE 

Study  of  women  writers  alternating  with  study  of  the  image  of  women  in 
literature  written  by  men  and  women.  Possible  focuses:  major  women 
writers  of  19th  and  20th  Century  British  and  American  literature;  contem- 
porary women  writers;  traditional  images  of  women  in  literature.  Alternate 
years. 

34  FILM  AND  LITERATURE 

Analysis  of  the  techniques  of  two  different  forms  of  communication — cinema 
and  novel  or  play — by  comparing  the  same  story  in  both  mediums.  Attention 
to  both  "clasic"  and  modern  films  and  literature.  Alternate  years. 

35  FICTION  WRITING 

Beginning  course  in  the  writing  of  short  fiction.  Some  study  of  the  sources 
and  techniques  of  modern  and  contemporary  writers,  but  chief  focus  on 
student  writing.  Alternate  years. 

36  POETRY  WRITING 

A  first  course  in  poetry  writing.  Attention  to  the  "closed"  and  "open"  formal 
traditions  of  current  poetry.  In-class  emphasis  on  student  writing.  Alternate 
years. 

37  PUBLIC  RELATIONS  AND  PUBLICITY  WRITING 

Communication  and  publicity  techniques  in  the  field  of  public  relations 
focused  on  writing  for  the  media;  some  attention  to  speeches,  letters,  and 

72 


house  organs.  Prerequisite:  English  23  or  English  24  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Alternate  years. 

38     STRUCTURE  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE 

Study  of  the  historical  origins  of  the  language  and  a  modern  language  theory. 
Alternate  years. 

40  THE  HERO  IN  MEDIEVAL  LITERATURE 

Study  of  the  literature  of  the  period  as  it  reveals  a  transition  from  the  concept 
of  the  epic  hero  to  that  of  the  chivalric  hero,  with  the  attendant  shifts  in 
literary  forms,  in  codes  for  heroic  behavior,  and  in  philosophic  world  view. 
Prerequisite:  English  14  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

41  ROMANCE  AND  EPIC  IN  THE  RENAISSANCE 

Study  of  major  writers  from  Malory  to  Milton.  Emphasis  on  such  works  as 
Le  Morte  D'Arthur,  Don  Quixote,  The  Faerie  Queene,  and  Paradise  Lost,  with 
other  selected  prose  and  dramatic  works.  Prerequisite:  English  14  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

42  POETRY  OF  THE  ROMANTIC  PERIOD 

Study  of  the  literary,  philosophical,  and  historical  significance  of  the 
Romantic  Movement.  Emphasis  on  the  poetry  of  Blake,  Wordsworth, 
Coleridge,  Byron,  Shelley,  and  Keats.  Prerequisite:  English  14  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

43  DICKENS  AND  THE  VICTORIAN  NOVEL 

Comparison  and  contrast  of  four  or  five  of  Dickens'  novels  with  other  novels 
from  the  1830's  through  the  1870's  by  such  authors  as  Thackeray,  the  Brontes, 
Meredith,  Trollope,  and  Hardy.  Alternate  years. 

44  THE  IRISH  RENAISSANCE 

Analysis  of  the  sudden  flowering  of  Irish  literature  in  the  early  years  of  the 
20th  Century  as  witnessed  in  the  works  of  Yeats,  Joyce,  Synge,  O'Casey,  and 
others.  Prerequisite:  English  15  or  17  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

45  AMERICAN  DRAMA  FROM  O'NEILL  TO  MILLER 

Study  of  the  development  of  the  first  significant  American  drama  in  the 
decades  following  World  War  I,  especially  the  experimental  drama  of  the 
1920's  and  the  social  drama  of  the  1930's.  O'Neill,  Anderson,  Rice,  Behrman, 
Saroyan,  Wilder,  Odets,  Hellman,  and  others.  Prerequisite:  English  17  or  21 
or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

46  THE  AMERICAN  RENAISSANCE 

Concentrated  study  of  the  American  poets  and  novelists  who  revolutionized 
literary  form  and  idea  at  the  middle  of  the  19th  Century.  One  or  two  writers 

73 


from  each  of  the  following  two  groups:  Emerson,  Thoreau,  and  Whitman; 
Poe,  Hawthorne,  and  Melville.  Prerequisite:  English  16  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Alternate  years. 

47  AMERICAN  NOVELISTS  AND  POETS  OF  THE  JAZZ  AGE  AND 
DEPRESSION 

Concentrated  study  of  two  or  three  major  writers  in  the  social  context  of  this 
period  in  modern  American  literature.  Such  combinations  as 
Hemingway/Fitzgerald/Eliot  and  Faulkner/Frost  are  likely.  Prerequisite:  Eng- 
lish 17  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

48  CONTEMPORARY  LITERATURE 

Consideration  of  representative  British,  American,  and  some  continental 
works,  primarily  fiction,  written  after  World  War  II  by  such  writers  as  Barth, 
Bellow,  Updike,  Burgess,  Murdoch,  Fowles,  and  Nabokov.  Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  typically  work  off  campus  in  a  profession  related  to  their  career 
interest  such  as  law,  public  relations,  journalism  and  others. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Recent  studies  include  Chaucer,  D.  H.  Lawrence,  The  Creative  Process  in 
Literature  and  Art,  the  Arthurian  Legend,  and  Existentialism  in  Literature. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

Recent  projects  were  Communication  Models  and  the  Feedback  Principle, 
and  Images  of  Women  in  the  1890's. 


FOREIGN  LANGUAGES  AND  LITERATURES 

Associate  Professor:  Flam,  Maples,  MacKenzie  (Chairman) 
Assistant  Professor:  Toscano 

Study  of  foreign  languages  and  literatures  offers  opportunity  to  explore  broadly 
the  varieties  of  human  experience  and  thought.  It  contributes  both  to  personal 
and  to  international  understanding  by  providing  competence  in  a  foreign 
language  and  a  critical  acquaintance  with  the  literature  and  culture  of  foreign 
peoples.  A  major  can  serve  as  entree  to  careers  in  business,  industry,  govern- 
ment, publishing,  education,  journalism,  social  agencies,  translating,  and 
writing.  It  prepares  for  graduate  work  in  literature  or  linguistics  and  the 
international  fields  of  politics,  commerce,  law,  health,  and  area  studies. 

FRENCH,  GERMAN  and  SPANISH  are  offered  as  major  fields  of  study.  The 
major  consists  of  at  least  eight  courses  numbered  10  or  above.  Majors  seeking 
teacher  certification  and  students  planning  to  enter  graduate  school  are  advised 
to  begin  study  of  a  second  foreign  language.  The  department  encourages  the 
development  in  breadth  of  programs  including  allied  courses  from  related  fields 
or  a  second  major,  and  also  individual  or  established  interdisciplinary  majors 
combining  interest  in  several  literatures  or  area  or  cross-cultural  studies,  for 
example:  International  Studies,  20th  Century  Studies,  the  Major  in  Literature, 
Majors,  teacher  certification  candidates,  and  in  fact  all  college  students  are 
encouraged  to  spend  at  least  a  semester  of  study  abroad  by  applying  to  one  of 
the  many  programs  available.  The  department  maintains  a  file  of  such  programs. 

Courses  taught  in  English:  Foreign  Languages  and  Literature  25,  French  28, 
and  Spanish  28. 

FOREIGN  LANGUAGES  AND  LITERATURES 

25     CONTINENTAL  LITERATURE 

A  study  of  such  major  continental  authors  as  Cervantes,  Dostoevsky, 
Chekhov,  Dante,  Ibsen,  Proust,  Gide,  Kafka,  Hesse,  Goethe,  Sartre,  Camus, 
Brecht,  and  Ionesco.  Works  read  in  English  translation  will  vary  and  be 
organized  around  a  different  theme  or  topic;  recent  topics  have  been 
existentialism,  modernism,  and  drama.  Prerequisite:  None.  May  be  repeated  for 
credit  with  consent  of  instructor.  May  be  accepted  toward  the  English  major  with 
consent  of  the  English  Department. 

38     FOREIGN  LANGUAGE:  SYSTEMS  AND  PROCESS 

Study  of  basic  linguistic  concepts  as  a  tool  for  language  learning  and 
teaching.  Discussion  and  application  of  language  teaching  techniques, 
including  work  in  the  language  laboratory.  Designed  for  future  teachers  of 
one  or  more  languages  and  normally  taken  in  the  Junior  year.  Students 
should  arrange  through  the  Education  Department  to  fulfill  in  the  same 
semester  the  requirements  of  a  participation  experience  in  area  schools. 
Prerequisite:  Consent  of  instructor. 

FRENCH 

A  major  consists  of  at  least  eight  courses  numbered  10  or  above,  including  at  least 
one  numbered  40  or  above.  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  25  and  38  may  be 
included  in  the  major. 

All  majors  who  wish  to  be  certified  for  teaching  must  pass  courses  23,  31, 

75 


Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  38,  and  at  least  two  courses  numbered  40  or 
above.  A  language  proficiency  test  is  required  of  these  students  during  their 
senior  year. 

1-2     ELEMENTARY 

The  aim  of  the  course  is  to  acquire  the  fundamentals  of  the  language  with 
a  view  to  using  them.  Regular  practice  in  speaking,  understanding,  and 
reading. 

10-11     INTERMEDIATE 

Review  and  development  of  the  fundamentals  of  the  language  for  immediate 
use  in  speaking,  understanding,  and  reading  with  a  view  to  building 
confidence  in  self-expression.  Prerequisite:  French  2  or  equivalent. 

20     CONVERSATION 

Designed  to  develop  conversational  fluency  and  comprehension  through 
small  group  discussions  focusing  on  topics  from  readings  in  modern  French 
culture,  such  as  French  social  attitudes  and  French-American  cultural 
differences.  Some  attention  to  grammar  and  writing.  Prerequisite:  French  11 
or  equivalent. 

23     INTRODUCTION  TO  LITERARY  STUDIES 

Studies  in  French  literature,  with  emphasis  on  critical  reading  and  interpreta- 
tion. Discussions,  lectures,  oral  exposes,  papers.  Prerequisite:  French  20  or 
equivalent. 

28    MODERN  FRANCE 

A  course  designed  to  familiarize  students  with  political  and  social  structures 
and  cultural  attitudes  in  contemporary  French  society.  Materials  studied  may 
include  such  documents  as  newspaper  articles,  interviews,  and  sociological 
surveys,  and  readings  in  history,  religion,  anthropology  and  the  arts.  Some 
attention  to  the  changing  education  system  and  the  family  and  to  events  and 
ideas  which  have  shaped  French  society.  May  include  some  comparative 
study  of  France  and  the  United  States. 

English  Section:  Not  applicable  toward  satisfying  the  Foreign  Language 
distribution  requirement.  Prerequisite:  None. 

French  Section:  Offers  readings,  papers,  and  interviews  in  French  for 
students  with  sufficient  language  skill.  Can  be  applied  toward  the  Foreign 
Language  distribution  requirement.  Prerequisite:  French  10  or  equivalent 
competency  as  determined  b\)  the  department. 

31     FRENCH  GRAMMATICAL  STRUCTURE 

Study  of  phonetics  and  grammatical  rules  and  their  practical  application  in 
speaking  and  writing.  Recommended  for  all  majors. 

41     FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  MIDDLE  AGES  AND  THE  RENAISSANCE 

A  study  of  selected  works  from  La  Chanson  de  Roland  to  Montaigne. 
Prerequisite:  French  23  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

76 


43     FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  17TH  CENTURY 

A  study  of  major  texts  of  the  period:  preciosite,  the  origins  and  theories  of 
French  classicism,  Corneille,  Pascal,  Descartes.  Classical  tragedy  and  com- 
edy: Racine,  Moliere.  LaFontaine,  Mme  de  La  Fayette,  La  Bruyere.  Prere- 
quisite: French  23  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

45     FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  18TH  CENTURY 

The  literary  expression  of  ideas:  Montesquieu,  Voltaire,  Rousseau,  and  the 
Encyclopedists.  Prerequisite:  French  23  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

47  FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  19TH  CENTURY 

The  dimensions  of  the  Romantic  sensibility:  Musset,  Hugo,  Vigny,  Balzac, 
Stendhal.  Realism  and  Naturalism  in  the  novels  of  Haubert  and  Zola. 
Reaction  in  the  poetry  of  Baudelaire,  Rimbaud,  Verlaine,  and  Mallarme. 
Prerequisite:  French  23  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

48  MODERN  FRENCH  THEATRE 

Major  trends  in  French  drama  from  the  turn  of  the  century  to  Existentialism 
and  the  Theatre  of  the  Absurd.  Giraudoux,  Anouilh,  Sartre,  Camus,  Beckett, 
Ionesco,  Genet,  Adamov,  and  others.  Prerequisite:  French  23  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

49  FRENCH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  20TH  CENTURY 

Representative  poets  and  novelists  of  modern  France.  Readings  selected 
from  the  works  of  authors  such  as  Proust,  Gide,  Aragon,  Giono,  Mauriac, 
Celine,  Malraux,  Saint-Exupery,  Camus,  the  "new  novelists"  (Robbe- 
Grillet,  Butor,  Sarraute,  LeClezio),  and  the  poetry  of  Apollinaire,  Valery,  the 
Surrealists  (Breton,  Reverdy,  Eluard,  Char),  Saint-John  Perse,  Supervielle, 
Prevert,  and  others.  Some  attention  to  works  of  French-speaking  African 
writers.  Prerequisite:  French  23  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Examples  of  recent  studies  in  French  include  translation,  existentialism,  the 
classical  period,  enlightenment  literature,  and  Saint-Exupery. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


GERMAN 

A  major  consists  of  eight  courses  numbered  10  or  above.  Foreign  Languages  and 
Literatures  38  and  one  unit  of  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  25  may  be 
included  in  the  major. 

All  majors  who  wish  to  be  certified  for  teaching  must  pass  courses  31,  33,  34, 
and  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  38.  A  language  proficiency  test  is  required 
of  these  students  during  their  senior  year. 

77 


1-2     ELEMENTARY 

Aim  of  course  is  to  acquire  the  fundamentals  of  the  language  with  a  view  to 
using  them.  Regular  practice  in  speaking,  understanding  and  reading. 

10-11     INTERMEDIATE 

Review  and  development  of  fundamentals  of  the  language  for  immediate  use 
in  speaking,  understanding,  and  reading  with  a  view  to  building  confidence 
in  self-expression.  Prerequisite:  German  2  or  equivalent. 

20     CONVERSATION 

Designed  to  develop  aural  comprehension  and  conversational  fluency. 
Readings  and  discussions  on  topics  of  contemporary  society  in  Germany, 
Switzerland,  and  Austria.  Some  attention  to  grammar  and  writing.  Prere- 
quisite: German  11  or  equivalent. 

31     GERMAN  GRAMMATICAL  STRUCTURE 

Study  of  intonation,  complex  grammatical  rules  and  their  practical  applica- 
tion, stylistics,  and  a  brief  survey  of  the  development  of  the  language. 

Recommended  for  all  majors. 

33  SURVEY  OF  GERMAN  LITERATURE  AND  CIVILIZATION  I 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  important  periods  of  German 
Literature,  representative  authors,  and  major  cultural  developments  in 
Germany,  Austria,  and  Switzerland.  The  course  deals  with  literature  from 
the  Early  Middle  Ages  through  the  18th  Century.  Prerequisite:  German  20  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

34  SURVEY  OF  GERMAN  LITERATURE  AND  CIVILIZATION  II 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  important  periods  of  German 
literature,  representative  authors,  and  major  cultural  developments  in 
Germany,  Austria,  and  Switzerland.  The  course  deals  with  the  literature 
from  the  19th  Century  to  the  present.  Prerequisite:  German  20  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

40  GOETHE 

A  study  of  the  life  and  works  of  Goethe.  Goethe's  significance  in  the  Classical 
period  and  later.  Readings  in  the  major  works.  Prerequisite:  German  33  or  34 
or  consent  of  instructor. 

41  CLASSICAL  GERMAN  DRAMA 

The  development  of  das  klassische  Drama  with  emphasis  on  works  of  Lessing, 

Goethe,  and  Schiller.  Prerequisite:  German  20. 

i 

42  MODERN  GERMAN  DRAMA 

The  emergence  of  modern  Drama  commencing  with  Buchner  and  leading  to 
Brecht.  Prerequisite:  German  20. 

78 


43     THE  NOVELLE 

The  German  Novelle  as  a  genre  relating  to  various  literary  periods. 
Prerequisite:  German  20. 

45     GERMAN  POETRY 

A  study  of  selected  poets  or  the  poetry  of  various  literary  periods.  Prerequisite: 
German  33  or  34  or  consent  of  instructor. 

47    MODERN  GERMAN  LITERATURE 

A  study  of  the  major  movements  and  writers  from  Naturalism,  Ex- 
pressionism, and  the  postwar  period.  Hauptmann,  Rilke,  Mann,  Hesse, 
Kaiser,  and  others.  Prerequisite:  German  33  or  34  or  consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Examples  of  recent  studies  in  German  include  Classicism,  Germanic 
Mythology,  Hermann  Hesse,  the  dramas  of  Frisch  and  Durrenmatt. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


79 


GREEK 

Greek  is  not  offered  as  a  major. 

1-2     NEW  TESTAMENT  GRAMMAR  AND  READINGS 

Fundamentals  of  New  Testament  Greek  grammar  and  readings  of  selected 
passages  of  the  Greek  text.  Alternate  years. 

11  THE  GOSPEL  ACCORDING  TO  ST.  MARK 

A  critical  reading  of  the  Greek  text  with  special  attention  to  exegetical 
questions.  Alternate  years. 

12  THE  EPISTLE  TO  THE  ROMANS 

A  critical  reading  of  the  Greek  text  with  special  attention  being  given  to  the 
theology  of  St.  Paul.  Alternate  years. 


HEBREW 

Hebrew  is  not  offered  as  a  major. 

1-2     OLD  TESTAMENT  GRAMMAR  AND  READINGS 

Fundamentals  of  Old  Testament  Hebrew  grammar  and  readings  of  selected 
passages  of  the  Hebrew  text.  Alternate  years. 

11-12     INTERMEDIATE  OLD  TESTAMENT  HEBREW 

A  critical  reading  of  the  Greek  text  with  special  attention  being  given  to  the 
to  exegetical  questions.  The  text  read  varies  from  year  to  year.  Alternate  years. 


RUSSIAN 

Russian  is  not  offered  as  a  major.  Russian  1,  2, 10, 11  are  offered  occasionally  upon 
sufficient  demand. 

1-2     ELEMENTARY  I  and  II 

The  aim  of  the  course  is  to  acquire  the  fundamentals  of  the  language  with 
a  view  to  using  them.  Regular  practice  in  speaking,  understanding  and 
reading. 

10  INTERMEDIATE  I 

Review  and  development  of  the  fundamentals  of  the  language  for  immediate 
use  in  speaking,  understanding  and  reading  with  a  view  to  building 
confidence  in  self-expression.  Prerequisite:  Russian  2  or  equivalent. 

11  INTERMEDIATE  II 

Intensive  reading  of  selected  short  stories  or  other  works:  outside  reading, 
oral  and  written  reports  on  everyday  topics.  Prerequisite:  Russian  10  or 
equivalent. 

80 


SPANISH 

A  major  consists  of  eight  courses  numbered  10  or  above,  including  at  least  one 
numbered  40  or  above.  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  38  may  be  included. 
Normally,  Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures  25  does  not  count  toward  the 
major. 

All  majors  who  wish  to  be  certified  for  teaching  must  pass  Foreign  Languages 
and  Literatures  38,  Spanish  31,  and  one  from  33,  34,  or  35.  A  language  proficiency 
test  is  required  of  these  students  during  their  senior  year. 

1-2     ELEMENTARY 

Aim  of  course  is  to  acquire  the  fundamentals  of  the  language  with  a  view  to 
using  them.  Regular  practice  in  speaking,  understanding,  and  reading. 

10-11     INTERMEDIATE 

Review  and  development  of  fundamentals  of  the  language  for  immediate  use 
in  speaking,  understanding,  and  reading  with  a  view  to  building  confidence 
in  self-expression.  Prerequisite:  Spanish  2  or  equivalent. 

20     ADVANCED 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  improve  the  student's  ability  in  spontaneous 
conversations,  focusing  on  everyday  activities  and  matters  of  current  concern 
as  suggested  in  readings  from  Latin  American  and  peninsular  sources. 
Vocabulary  building  is  stressed.  Prerequisite:  Spanish  11  or  equivalent. 

28    CONTEMPORARY  HISPANIC  LIFE 

To  introduce  students  to  the  Spanish  people — their  values,  customs,  and 
institutions,  with  reference  to  the  major  socio-economic,  political,  and  artistic 
forces  governing  present-day  Spain.  Readings  will  include  selections  from 
periodical  literature  as  well  as  historical  and  literary  texts.  Lectures  in 
English. 

English  Section:  Not  applicable  toward  satisfying  the  Foreign  Language 
Distribution  requirement.  Prerequisite:  None. 

Spanish  Section:  Students  with  sufficient  language  skill  wishing  to  take 
this  course  for  credit  towards  the  Foreign  Language  distribution  requirement 
will  be  given  special  readings  and  other  assignments  in  Spanish.  Prerequisite: 
Spanish  11  or  equivalent  competency  as  determined  by  the  department . 

31     SPANISH  GRAMMATICAL  STRUCTURE 

Study  of  intonation,  complex  grammatical  rules  and  their  practical  applica- 
tion, and  a  brief  survey  of  the  development  of  the  language.  Recommended  for 
all  majors. 

33     SURVEY  OF  SPANISH  LITERATURE  AND  CIVILIZATION  I 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  important  periods  of  Spanish 
literature,  representative  authors,  and  major  socio-economic  developments. 
The  course  deals  with  the  literature  from  the  beginning  through  the  17th 
Century.  Open  to  students  majoring  in  other  departments  after  consultation  with 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

81 


34  SURVEY  OF  SPANISH  LITERATURE  AND  CIVILIZATION  II 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  important  periods  of  Spanish 
literature,  representative  authors,  and  major  socio-economic  developments. 
The  course  deals  with  the  literature  from  the  18th  Century  to  the  present. 
Open  to  students  majoring  in  other  departments  after  consultation  with  the 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

35  SURVEY  OF  SPANISH  AMERICAN  LITERATURE  AND  CIVILIZATION 

Designed  to  acquaint  the  student  with  important  periods  of  Spanish- 
American  literature,  representative  authors,  and  major  socio-economic 
developments.  The  course  deals  with  the  literature,  especially  the  essay  and 
poetry,  from  16th  Century  to  present.  Prerequisite:  Consent  of  instructor. 
Alternate  years. 

44     SPANISH  LITERATURE  OF  THE  GOLDEN  AGE 

A  study  of  representative  works  and  principal  literary  figures  in  the  poetry, 
prose,  and  drama  of  the  16th  and  17th  Centuries,  from  Fernando  de  Rojas 
to  Calderon.  Prerequisite:  Consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

47  19TH  CENTURY  NOVEL 

Regionalism,  realism,  and  naturalism  in  prose  fiction,  with  emphasis  on  the 
works  of  Galdos.  Prerequisite:  Consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

48  THE  GENERATION  OF  '98 

Principal  literary  figures  of  the  early  20th  Century:  Unamuno,  Azorin,  Valle 
Inclan,  Baroja,  Benavente,  Machado,  Jimenez,  etc.  Prerequisite:  Consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

49  SPANISH  AMERICAN  NOVEL 

Twentieth  Century  novelists  from  Azuela  to  Garcia  Marquez.  Prerequisite: 
Consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Recent  studies  include  literary,  linguistic,  and  cultural  topics,  and  themes 
such  as  urban  problems  as  reflected  in  the  modern  novel. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


HISTORY 

Associate  Professor:  Larson  (Chairman),  Piper 
Assistant  Professor:  Morris 

A  major  consists  of  ten  courses,  including  10,  11  and  45.  At  least  seven  courses 
must  be  taken  in  the  department.  The  following  courses  may  be  counted  toward 
fulfilling  the  major  requirements:  American  Studies  10,  Political  Science  39, 

82 


Religion  28  and  46.  Other  appropriate  courses  outside  the  department  may  be 
counted  upon  departmental  approval.  For  History  majors  who  student  teach  in 
history,  the  major  consists  of  nine  courses.  In  addition  to  the  courses  listed  below, 
special  courses,  independent  study  and  honors  are  available.  Special  courses 
recently  taught  and  anticipated  include  a  biographical  study  of  European 
Monarchs,  the  European  Left,  the  Industrialization  and  Urbanization  of  Modern 
Europe,  Utopian  Movements  in  America,  the  Peace  Movement  in  America,  The 
Vietnam  War,  and  American  Legal  History.  History  majors  are  encouraged  to 
participate  in  the  internship  program. 

10  EUROPE  1500-1815 

An  examination  of  the  political,  social,  cultural  and  intellectual  history  of 
Europe  and  its  relations  with  other  areas  of  the  world  from  1500  to  1815. 

11  EUROPE  1815-Present 

An  examination  of  the  political,  social,  cultural,  and  intellectual  history  of 
Europe  and  its  relations  with  other  areas  of  the  world  from  1815  to  the 
present. 

12  UNITED  STATES  HISTORY  1603-1877 

A  study  of  the  men,  measures,  and  movements  which  have  been  significant 
in  the  development  of  the  United  States  between  1603  and  1877.  Attention 
is  paid  to  the  problems  of  minority  groups  as  well  as  to  majority  and  national 
influences. 


83 


13     UNITED  STATES  HISTORY  1877-present 

A  study  of  the  men,  measures,  and  movements  which  have  been  significant 
in  the  development  of  the  United  States  since  1877.  Attention  is  paid  to  the 
problems  of  minority  groups  as  well  as  to  majority  and  national  influences. 

20     ANCIENT  HISTORY 

A  study  of  the  ancient  western  world,  including  the  foundations  of  the 
western  tradition  in  Greece,  the  emergence  and  expansion  of  the  Roman 
state,  its  experience  as  a  Republic,  and  its  transformation  into  the  Empire. 
The  course  will  focus  on  the  social  and  intellectual  life  of  Greece  and  Rome 
as  well  as  political  and  economic  changes.  Alternate  years. 

22  MEDIEVAL  EUROPE  AND  ITS  NEIGHBORS 

The  history  of  Europe  from  the  dissolution  of  the  Roman  Empire  to  the  mid- 
fifteenth  century.  The  course  will  deal  with  the  growing  estrangement  of 
western  Catholic  Europe  from  the  Byzantium  and  Islam,  culminating  in  the 
Crusades;  the  rise  of  the  Islamic  Empire  and  its  later  fragmentation;  the 
development  and  growth  of  feudalism;  the  conflict  of  empire  and  papacy, 
and  the  rise  of  towns.  Alternate  years. 

23  20TH  CENTURY  EUROPE  TO  1929 

An  intensive  study  of  various  aspects  of  the  political,  economic,  social,  and 
intellectual  history  of  Europe  from  1900  to  1929.  Topics  include  the 
irrationalist  movement,  the  causes  of  imperialism,  the  origins  of  the  First 
World  War,  the  Russian  Revolution  and  establishment  of  the  Soviet  Regime, 
and  the  attempts  at  peacemaking  after  1918.  Prerequisite:  History  11  or  consent 
of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

24  20TH  CENTURY  EUROPE  SINCE  1929 

An  intensive  study  of  various  aspects  of  the  political,  economic,  social,  and 
intellectual  history  of  Europe  from  1929  to  the  present.  Topics  include  the 
nature  of  fascism,  development  of  Stalinist  Russia,  outbreak  of  World  War 
II,  origins  of  the  Cold  War,  and  the  economic  reconstruction  and  integration 
of  Western  Europe  since  1945.  Prerequisite:  History  11  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Alternate  years. 

25  FRENCH  REVOLUTION  AND  NAPOLEON 

An  analysis  of  the  political,  social,  and  intellectual  background  of  the  French 
Revolution,  a  survey  of  the  course  of  revolutionary  development,  and  an 
estimate  of  the  results  of  the  Napoleonic  conquests  and  administration. 

Prerequisite:  History  10  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

26  COLONIAL  AMERICA  AND  THE  REVOLUTIONARY  ERA 

The  establishment  of  British  settlements  on  the  American  continent,  their 
history  as  colonies,  the  causes  and  events  of  the  American  Revolution,  the 
critical  period  following  independence,  and  proposal  and  adoption  of  the 
United  States  Constitution.  Alternate  years. 

84 


27  20TH  CENTURY  UNITED  STATES 

This  course  begins  with  the  Progressive  Era  and  includes  the  political, 
economic,  and  social  developments  in  the  20th  Century.  Emphasis  will  be 
placed  on  the  domestic  and  international  demands  which  have  faced  the 
United  States  in  the  period  following  World  War  II. 

28  AFRO-AMERICAN  HISTORY 

A  study  of  the  experiences  and  participation  of  Afro- Americans  in  the  United 
States.  The  course  includes  historical  experiences  such  as  slavery,  abolition, 
reconstruction,  and  urbanization.  It  also  raises  the  issue  of  the  development 
and  growth  of  white  racism,  and  the  effect  of  this  racism  on  contemporary 
Afro- American  social,  intellectual  and  political  life.  Alternate  years. 

29  LATIN  AMERICAN  HISTORY 

An  examination  of  the  native  civilization,  the  age  of  discovery  and  conquest, 
Spanish  colonial  policy,  the  independence  movements,  and  the  develop- 
ment of  modern  institutions  and  governments  in  Latin  America.  Alternate 
years. 

31  HISTORY  OF  RUSSIA 

A  survey  of  Russian  history  emphasizing  the  rise  of  Mosco  vy  and  the  reasons 
for  the  failure  of  the  Tzarist  regime  to  overcome  successfully  the  challenge 
of  the  modern  world.  Prerequisite:  History  11  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate 
years. 

32  HISTORY  OF  THE  SOVIET  UNION 

An  intensive  study  of  the  political,  economic,  and  social  history  of  the  Soviet 
Union  emphasizing  the  reasons  for  the  Bolshevik  victory,  1917-21,  the  origins 
and  nature  of  the  Stalinist  regime,  Soviet  industrialization,  and  the  develop- 
ment of  post-Stalinist  Russia.  Prerequisite:  History  11  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Alternate  years. 

33  CONFLICT  IN  WESTERN  CIVILIZATION 

An  in-depth  study  of  the  changing  nature  of  war  and  its  relationship  to  the 
development  of  Western  Civilization  since  the  end  of  the  Middle  Ages. 
Particular  emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  role  of  war  in  the  development  of 
the  modern  nation  state  and  the  origins  and  nature  of  total  war.  Alternate 
years. 

34  DIPLOMATIC  HISTORY  OF  EUROPE  SINCE  1789 

A  survey  of  the  development  of  the  European  states  system  and  the  relations 
between  the  European  states  since  the  beginning  of  the  French  Revolution. 

Prerequisite:  History  11  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

35  THE  CRISIS  OF  LIBERALISM  AND  NATIONALISM,  EUROPE  1848-1870 

An  in-depth  investigation  of  the  crucial  "Middle  Years"  of  Nineteenth 
Century  Europe  from  the  revolutions  of  1848  through  the  unification  of 
Germany.  The  course  centers  on  the  struggles  for  power  within  the  major 

85 


states  of  Europe  at  this  time  and  how  the  vehicle  of  nationalism  was  used 
to  bring  about  one  type  of  solution.  Alternate  years. 

37  AGE  OF  JEFFERSON  AND  JACKSON 

The  theme  of  the  course  is  the  emergence  of  the  political  and  social 
characteristics  that  shaped  modern  America.  The  personalities  of  Thomas 
Jefferson,  John  Marshall,  John  Randolph,  Aaron  Burr,  and  Andrew  Jackson 
receive  special  attention.  Special  consideration  is  given  to  the  first  and  second 
party  systems,  the  decline  in  community  cohesiveness,  the  westward 
movement,  and  the  growing  importance  of  the  family  as  a  unit  of  social 
organization.  Alternate  years. 

38  CIVIL  WAR  AND  RECONSTRUCTION 

The  problems  and  events  leading  to  war,  the  political  and  military  history  of 
the  war,  and  the  bitter  aftermath  to  the  Compromise  of  1877. 

39  20TH  CENTURY  UNITED  STATES  RELIGION 

The  study  of  historical  and  cultural  developments  in  American  society  which 
relates  to  religion  or  is  commonly  called  religion.  This  involves  consideration 
of  the  institutional  and  intellectual  development  of  several  faith  groups  as 
well  as  discussion  of  certain  problems,  such  as  the  persistence  of  religious 
bigotry  and  the  changing  modes  of  Church-State  relationships.  Alternate 
years. 

40  HISTORY  OF  RENAISSANCE  THOUGHT 

A  study  of  the  classical,  humanist,  and  scholastic  elements  involved  in  the 
development  of  the  Renaissance  outlook  views,  and  values,  both  in  Italy  and 
in  Northern  Europe.  The  various  combinations  of  social  and  political 
circumstances  which  constitute  the  historical  context  of  these  intellectual 
developments  will  be  noted.  Alternate  years. 

41  HISTORY  OF  REFORMATION  THOUGHT 

A  study  of  the  ideas  and  systems  of  ideas  propounded  prior  to  the 
Reformation  but  which  are  historically  related  to  its  inception  and  of  the  ideas 
and  systems  of  ideas  involved  in  the  formation  of  the  major  Reformation, 
Protestant  traditions  and  in  the  Catholic  Reformation.  Included  are  the  ideas 
of  the  humanists  of  the  Reformation  Era.  Alternate  years. 

42  UNITED  STATES  SOCIAL  AND  INTELLECTUAL  HISTORY  TO  1877 

A  study  of  the  social  and  intellectual  experience  of  the  United  States  from 
its  colonial  antecedents  through  reconstruction.  Among  the  topics  con- 
sidered are  Puritanism,  Transcendentalism,  Community  Life  and  Organiza- 
tion, Education  and  Social  Reform  Movements.  Prerequisite:  2  courses  from 
History  12,  13,  28  or  consent  of  instructor. 

43  UNITED  STATES  SOCIAL  AND  INTELLECTUAL  HISTORY  SINCE  1877 

A  study  of  the  social  and  intellectual  experience  of  the  United  States  from 
reconstruction  to  the  present  day.  Among  the  topics  considered  are  Social 
Darwinism,  Pragmatism,  Community  Life  and  Organization,  Education  and 

86 


Social  Reform  Movements.  Prerequisite:  2  courses  from  History  12,  13,  28  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

45     HISTORICAL  METHODS 

This  course  focuses  on  the  nature  and  meaning  of  history.  It  will  open  to  the 
student  different  historical  approaches  and  will  provide  the  opportunity  to 
explore  these  approaches  in  terms  of  particular  topics  and  periods.  Majors 
are  required  to  enroll  in  this  course  in  either  their  Junior  or  Senior  year.  The 
course  is  open  to  other  students  who  have  two  courses  in  history  or  consent 
of  the  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Typically,  history  interns  work  for  local  government  agencies  engaged  in 
historical  projects  or  in  the  County  Historical  Museum. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Recent  topics  include  studies  of  the  immigration  of  American  blacks,  political 
dissension  in  the  Weimer  Republic,  Indian  relations  before  the  American 
Revolution  and  the  history  of  Lycoming  County. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

Two  recent  projects  were  the  Germans  in  Pennsylvania  Politics,  1878-1938 
and  the  Reign  of  Tiglath  Pileser  I  (1116-1075B.C). 


INTERNATIONAL  STUDIES 

Associate  Professor:  Larson  (Coordinator) 

This  major  in  International  Studies  is  designed  to  integrate  an  understanding  of 
the  changing  social,  political,  and  historical  environment  of  Europe  today  with 
study  of  Europe  in  its  relations  to  the  rest  of  the  world,  particularly  the  United 
States.  It  stresses  the  international  relations  of  the  North  Atlantic  Community  and 
offers  the  student  opportunity  to  emphasize  either  European  studies  or  interna- 
tional relations.  The  program  provides  multiple  perspectives  on  the  cultural  traits 
that  shape  popular  attitudes  and  institutions.  Study  of  a  single  country  is 
included  as  a  data-base  for  comparisons,  and  study  of  its  language  as  a  basis  for 
direct  communication  with  its  people. 

The  program  is  intended  to  prepare  a  student  either  for  graduate  study  or 
for  careers  which  have  an  international  component.  International  obligations  are 
increasingly  assumed  by  governmental  agencies  and  a  wide  range  of  business, 
social,  religious,  and  educational  organizations.  Opportunities  are  found  in  the 
fields  of  journalism,  publishing,  communications,  trade,  banking,  advertising, 
management,  and  tourism.  The  program  also  offers  flexible  career  preparation  in 
a  variety  of  essential  skills,  such  as  research,  data  analysis,  report  writing, 
language  skills,  and  the  awareness  necessary  for  dealing  with  people  and 
institutions  of  another  culture.  Preparation  for  related  careers  can  be  obtained 
through  the  guided  selection  of  courses  outside  the  major  in  the  areas  of  Business, 
Economics,   Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures.   Government,   History,   and 

87 


International  Relations;  or  through  a  second  major.  Students  should  design  their 
programs  in  consultation  with  members  of  the  committee  on  International 
Studies. 

By  completing  6-8  additional  courses  in  the  social  sciences  (which  include 
those  courses  needed  to  complete  a  major  in  Economics,  History,  Political, 
Science  or  Sociology/Anthropology)  and  the  required  program  in  Education, 
students  can  be  certified  for  the  teacher  education  program  in  Social  Studies.  By 
completing  a  major  in  the  foreign  language  (5  or  more  courses)  and  the  Education 
program,  students  can  be  certified  to  teach  that  language.  The  International 
Studies  program  also  encourages  participation  in  study  abroad  programs,  as  well 
as  the  Washington  International  Semester,  and  the  United  Nations  Semester. 

The  major  includes  eleven  courses  selected  as  follows: 
International  Relations  Courses — Four  or  two  courses  (if  two,  then  four  must  be 
taken  from  Area  Courses).  Courses  within  this  group  are  designed  to  provide  a 
basic  understanding  of  the  international  system  and  of  Europe's  relations  with 
the  rest  of  the  world.  Political  Science  25  is  required. 

Political  Science  25  World  Politics 

Economics  43  International  Trade 

History  34  European  Diplomatic  History 

Political  Science  39  American  Foreign  Policy 

Area  Courses — Four  or  two  courses  (if  two,  then  four  must  be  taken  from 
International  Relations  Courses).  Courses  within  this  group  are  designed  to 
provide  a  basic  understanding  of  the  European  political,  social,  and  economic 
environment.  History  11  and  Economics  22  are  required. 

History  11  Europe  1815-Present 

Economics  22  Economic  Systems  of  the  West 

Political  Science  20  European  Politics 

History  23  20th  Century  Europe  to  1929 

History  24  20th  Century  Europe  Since  1929 

National  Courses 

Language — Two  courses  in  one  language. 

French  20,  plus  one  course  numbered  23  or  above  (except  28) 
German  20,  plus  one  course  numbered  31  or  above 
Spanish  20,  plus  one  course  numbered  31  or  above 

Country — One  course.  The  student  must  select,  according  to  his  or  her 
language  preparation,  one  European  country  which  will  serve  as  a  special  interest 
area  throughout  the  program.  The  country  selected  will  serve  as  the  base  for 
individual  projects  in  the  major  courses,  wherever  possible. 

France — French  28  Modern  France 

Germany — History  80  Topics  in  German  History 

Spain — Spanish  28  Contemporary  Hispanic  Life 

Elective  Course — One  course  which  should  involve  further  study  of  some  aspect 
of  the  program.  Appropriate  courses  are  any  Area  or  International  Relations 
Courses  not  yet  taken:  History  10,  32,  33;  Economics  23,  45;  Political  Science  26, 
27,  38,  46;  related  foreign  literature  courses  counting  toward  the  Fine  Arts 
requirement,  and  internships. 

49     SENIOR  SEMINAR 

A  one-semester  seminar,  taken  in  the  senior  year,  in  which  students  and 


several  faculty  members  will  pursue  an  integrative  topic  in  the  field  of 
International  Studies.  Students  will  work  to  some  extent  independently. 
Guest  speakers  will  be  invited.  The  seminar  will  be  open  to  qualified  persons 
from  outside  the  major  and  the  college.  Prerequisite:  Consent  of  the  instructor. 


LITERATURE 

Associate  Professor:  Maples  (Coordinator) 

This  major  recognizes  literature  as  a  distinct  discipline  beyond  national  bound- 
aries and  combines  the  study  of  any  two  literatures  in  the  areas  of  English,  French, 
German  and  Spanish.  Students  can  thus  explore  two  literatures  widely  and 
intensively  at  the  upper  levels  of  course  offerings  within  each  of  the  respective 
departments  while  developing  and  applying  skills  in  foreign  languages.  The 
major  prepares  students  for  graduate  study  in  either  of  the  two  literatures  studied 
or  in  Comparative  Literature. 

The  major  requires  at  least  six  literature  courses,  equally  divided  between  the 
two  literatures  concerned.  The  six  must  be  at  the  advanced  level  as  determined 
in  consultation  with  advisors  (normally  courses  numbered  20  and  above  in 
English  and  40  and  above  in  Foreign  Languages).  In  general,  two  of  the  advanced 
courses  in  each  literature  should  be  period  courses.  The  third  course,  taken  either 
as  a  regular  course  or  as  independent  study,  may  have  as  its  subject  another 
period,  a  particular  author,  genre,  or  literary  theme,  or  some  other  unifying 
approach  or  idea.  Beyond  these  six,  the  major  must  include  at  least  two  additional 
courses  from  among  those  counting  toward  a  major  in  the  departments  involved. 
Any  prerequisite  courses  in  the  respective  departments  (for  example,  English  14, 
15,  16,  17,  French  23,  German  33,  34)  should  be  taken  during  the  Freshman  and 
Sophomore  years.  Students  should  design  their  programs  in  consultation  with 
a  faculty  member  from  each  of  the  literatures  concerned.  Programs  for  the  major 
must  be  approved  by  the  departments  involved. 


MASS  COMMUNICATIONS 

Associate  Professor:  Madden  (Coordinator) 

The  major  in  Mass  Communications  offers  a  liberal  arts  background  and  a 
professional  sequence  through  a  combination  of  courses  from  the  departments 
of  Art,  Business  Administration,  English,  Political  Science,  Sociology-An- 
thropology and  the  Broadcasting  and  Graphic  Arts  departments  of  the  Williams- 
port  Area  Community  College.  The  program  assures  a  broadly  based  academic 
foundation  with  special  competency  in  a  selected  concentration,  plus  career 
orientation  in  a  specific  area. 

Students  must: 
1.     Successfully  complete  one  of  the  following  sequences: 

Advertising 

Advertising  Design-Photography 

Broadcast  Journalism 

Newspaper 

Public  Relations 

89 


2.  Take  a  concentration  of  at  least  four  courses  related  to  the  student's  program 
in  a  single  department  of  the  college,  in  consultation  with  the  chairman  of 
that  department.  If  the  student  concentrates  in  a  department  represented  in 
the  sequence  chosen,  the  student  must  take  at  least  three  courses  which  are 
not  included  in  that  sequence. 

3.  Successully  complete  an  internship  or  independent  study  related  to  the 
sequence  chosen. 

Advertising  Sequence: 

Comm.  10  Introduction  to  Mass  Communications 

Bus.  28-29  Marketing  Management 

Bus.  32  Advertising 

Bus.  47  Creative  Advertising 

P.S.  48  Public  Opinion  and  Polling  or 

Soc.  47  Research  Methods 

GCO  511  Layout  and  Design 

GCO  512  Typographic  Composition 

Choose  two  courses  from  the  following  with  consent  of  advisor: 

Art  11,  Art  27,  Eng.  18  or  22,  Eng.  35  or  Eng.  36,  Eng.  34  or  Theatre  11. 

Advertising  Design-Photography  Sequence: 

Comm.  10  Introduction  to  Mass  Communications 

Art  11  Drawing 

Art  15  Two-dimensional  Design 

Art  12  Color  Theory 

Art  27  Photography 

Bus.  32  Advertising  Principles 

GCO  511  Layout  and  Design 

GCO  512  Typographic  Composition 

GCO  521  Process  Camera 

Choose  two  courses  from  the  following  with  consent  of  advisor: 

Art  18,  Art  37,  Art  21,  Bus.  47,  Eng.  35  or  Eng.  36,  Eng.  34  or  Theatre  11. 

Broadcast  Journalism  Sequence: 

Comm.  10  Introduction  to  Mass  Communications 

Eng.  24  News  Writing  for  Radio  and  TV 

P.S.  34  Political  News  Writing 

P.S.  48  Public  Opinion  and  Polling 

Thea.  1  Principles  of  Oral  Communication 

BRC  242  Station  Management  and  Community  Responsibility 

BRC  112  Basic  Electronics  and  FCC  Licensing 

Choose  two  courses  from  the  following  with  consent  of  advisor: 
Art  27,  P.S.  11,  P.S.  32,  Psych.  24,  Soc.  34,  Eng.  34  or  Theatre  11. 

Newspaper  Sequence: 

Comm.  10  Introduction  to  Mass  Communications 

Eng.  23  News  Writing  for  the  Print  Media 

P.S.  34  Political  News  Writing 

P.S.  11  State  and  Local  Government 

P.S.  48  Public  Opinion  and  Polling 

Art  27  Photography 

GCO  512  Typographic  Composition 

90 


Choose  two  courses  from  the  following  with  consent  of  advisor: 

Art  37,  Eng.  18  or  Eng.  22,  Eng.  24,  P.S.  32,  Psych.  24,  Soc.  34,  Eng.  34 

or  Theatre  11. 

Public  Relations  Sequence: 

Comm.  10  Introduction  to  Mass  Communications 

Eng.  23  News  Writing  for  the  Print  Media 

Eng.  37  Public  Relations  and  Publicity 

Bus.  28-29  Marketing  Management 

P.S.  48  Public  Opinion  and  Polling  or 

Soc.  47  Research  Methods 

Art  27  Photography 

Choose  two  courses  from  the  following  with  consent  of  advisor: 

Art  37,  Bus.  32,  Eng.  18  or  Eng.  22,  Eng.  24,  Psych.  24,  Eng.  34  or  Thea.  11. 

10    INTRODUCTION  TO  MASS  COMMUNICATIONS 

Part  I:  Theories  of  the  process  of  mass  communications  and  introduction  to 
the  mass  media;  attention  will  be  given  to  problems  of  censorship  and 
media  ethics.  Part  2:  Analysis  of  the  mass  media's  impact  on  society; 
emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  social,  psychological  and  political  implica- 
tions of  the  media's  shaping  influence  on  man  and  institutions. 

70-79    INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  usually  work  off  campus  in  a  field  related  to  their  communications 
sequence;  some  may  work  with  the  student  newspaper  or  radio  station. 

80-89    INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Studies  involve  research  related  to  the  communications  sequence  of  the 
student. 

90-99    INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

Through  special  arrangement,  the  following  courses  offered  at  the  Williamsport 
Area  Community  College  are  available  to  students  in  the  Mass  Communications 
major  only.  The  WACC  courses  are  taken  as  part  of  the  student's  semester 
schedule  and  are  listed  with  Lycoming  offerings  during  registration  periods. 


GRAPHIC  ARTS 

511  LAYOUT  AND  DESIGN 

Analysis  of  materials,  tools,  and  techniques  used  in  preparation  of  copy  for 
reproduction;  Paste-up  and  color  separation  overlays.  4  Cr. 

512  TYPOGRAPHIC  COMPOSITION 

Fundamentals  of  typesetting.  Theory  and  practice  in  the  care  and  use  of 
composing  machines,  both  hot  and  cold  (mechanical)  and  cold  (photo). 
4  Cr. 

91 


521     PROCESS  CAMERA 

Concepts  and  techniques  of  darkroom  procedure  for  reproduction  of  line 
and  halftone  copy  on  process  camera.  4  Cr. 

BROADCASTING 

112     BASIC  ELECTRONICS  AND  FCC  LICENSING 

Fundamental  mechanics  of  operation  of  tape  recorders,  turntables, 
network  facilities  and  multispeaker  systems;  mechanics  necessary  to 
obtain  FCC  licensing;  field  visits  to  at  least  five  different  stations.  3  Cr. 

242     STATION  MANAGEMENT  AND  COMMUNITY  RESPONSIBILITY 

Study  of  problems  related  to  serving  community  needs  while  making  a 
profit;  ratio  of  advertising  to  program  time;  character  of  station;  meeting 
community  responsibility  through  community  interest  programs;  respon- 
sible use  of  editorial  privilege.  3  Cr. 


MATHEMATICS 

Associate  Professor:  Getchell,  Hubbard  (Chairman) 

Assistant  Professor:  Foreman,  Henninger 

Instructor:  Troxel 

Visiting  Instructor:  Murphy 

Part-time  Instructor:  Somers 

A  major  consists  of  ten  courses  numbered  10  or  above:  Mathematics  18,  19,  20, 
24,  34,  42  and  three  other  courses  numbered  above  20  must  be  included. 
Students  seeking  secondary  certification  in  mathematics  are  required  to  com- 
plete Mathematics  30  and  36  and  are  advised  to  enroll  in  Philosophy  17.  In 
addition,  all  majors  are  advised  to  elect  Mathematics  15,  Philosophy  20  and  33, 
and  Physics  25  and  26.  In  addition  to  the  courses  listed  below,  special  courses 
are  occasionally  available — recent  topics  include:  Graph  Theory,  Number  Theo- 
ry, Discrete  Probability,  Data  Structures,  Computer  Graphics,  Operations 
Research,  and  Finite  Differences. 

1  CONTINUOUS  MODELS 

A  survey  of  the  central  ideas  of  the  infinitesimal  calculus,  its  historical 
development,  and  some  of  its  modern  applications.  Students  with  credit  for 
Mathematics  9  or  18  may  not  receive  credit  for  this  course.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

2  COMPUTERS  IN  SOCIETY 

A  study  of  the  role  of  digital  computers  in  society  today  with  primary 
emphasis  on  what  can  be  done,  rather  than  how  to  do  it.  The  main  goal  of 
the  course  is  to  make  the  student  aware  of  the  growing  influence  which 
digital  computers  are  likely  to  have  on  society  in  the  near  future.  Students 
with  credit  for  Mathematics  15  may  not  receive  credit  for  this  course.  One-half  unit 
of  credit. 

5    INDIVIDUALIZED  LABORATORY  INSTRUCTION  IN  BASIC  ALGEBRA 
A  self- paced  study  of  arithme'tic  and  decimal  numerals,  fractions,  the  real 
92 


number  line,  factoring,  solutions  to  linear  and  quadratic  equations,  graphs 
of  linear  and  quadratic  functions,  expressions  with  rational  exponents, 
algebraic  functions,  exponential  functions,  and  inequalities.  THIS  COURSE 
IS  LIMITED  TO  STUDENTS  PLACED  THEREIN  BY  THE  MATHEMATICS 
DEPARTMENT.  One-half  unit  of  credit. 

7     MODERN  ELEMENTARY  GEOMETRY  AND  NUMBER  THEORY 

This  course  is  intended  for  prospective  elementary  school  teachers  and  is 
required  of  all  those  seeking  elementary  certification.  Topics  include  the 
development  of  the  real  number  system  and  its  larger  subsystems,  computa- 
tional algorithms,  axiomatic  systems,  measurement,  shape  and  symmetry. 
Co-requisite:  Any  Education  course  numbered  30  or  above  which  is  specifically 
required  for  Elementary  Certification  and  application  to  the  Elementary  Professional 
Semester,  or  consent  of  instructor. 

9     INTRODUCTION  TO  CALCULUS 

An  intuitive  approach  to  the  calculus  concepts  with  applications  to  business, 
biology,  and  social  science  problems.  Not  open  to  students  who  have 
completed  Mathematics  18.  Prerequisite:  Credit  for  or  exemption  from  Mathe- 
matics 5.  Alternate  years. 

12  FINITE  MATHEMATICS  FOR  DECISION  MAKING 

An  introduction  to  some  of  the  principal  mathematical  models,  not  involving 
calculus,  which  are  used  in  Business  Administration,  social  sciences,  and 
operations  research.  The  course  will  include  both  deterministic  models,  such 
as  graphs,  networks,  linear  programming  and  voting  models  and  probabil- 
istic models  such  as  Markov  chains  and  games.  Prerequisite:  credit  for  or 
exemption  from  Mathematics  5. 

13  INTRODUCTION  TO  STATISTICS 

Describing,  distributions  of  measurements,  probability  and  random  vari- 
ables, binomial  and  normal  probability  distributions,  statistical  inference 
from  small  samples,  linear  regression  and  correlation,  analysis  of  enumer- 
ative  data.  Prerequisite:  credit  for  or  exemption  from  Mathematics  5. 

14  MULTIVARIATE  STATISTICS 

The  study  of  statistical  techniques  used  in  experimental  designs  involving 
more  than  two  random  variables.  Techniques  would  include  analysis  of 
variance,  analysis  of  covariance,  multiple  regression  and  correlation,  in- 
troduction to  factor  analysis  and  introduction  to  discriminative  analysis. 
Extensive  use  of  the  IBM  1130  Computer  as  a  problem  solving  tool  will  be 
included.  One-half  unit  of  credit.  Prerequisite:  Math  13. 

15  COMPUTER  SCIENCE 

Study  of  mathematics  relevant  to  computing.  A  survey  of  machine  and 
symbolic  programming.  Introduction  to  FORTRAN  IV  programming.  In- 
cludes laboratory  experience  on  an  IBM  1130.  Prerequisite:  credit  for  or 
exemption  from  Mathematics  5. 

93 


17  PRECALCULUS  MATHEMATICS 

The  study  of  logarithmic,  exponential,  trigonometric,  polynomial  and 
rational  functions,  their  graphs  and  elementary  properties.  Prerequisite:  credit 
for  or  exempt  ion  from  Mathematics  5. 

18  CALCULUS  WITH  ANALYTIC  GEOMETRY  I 

Differentiation  of  algebraic  functions,  graphing  plane  curves,  applications  to 
related  rate  and  extremal  problems,  integration  of  algebraic  functions,  areas 
of  plane  regions,  volumes  of  solids  of  revolution,  and  other  applications. 
Prerequisite:  A  grade  of  C  or  better  in  Mathematics  17  or  its  equivalent,  or  consent 
of  instructor. 

19  CALCULUS  WITH  ANALYTIC  GEOMETRY  II 

Differentiation  and  integration  of  transcendental  functions,  parametric 
equations,  polar  coordinates,  the  conic  sections  and  their  applications, 
infinite  sequences  and  series  expansions.  Prerequisite:  A  grade  ofC  or  better  in 
Mathematics  18  or  consent  of  instructor. 

20  MULTIVARIATE  CALCULUS  WITH  MATRIX  ALGEBRA 

Vectors,  linear  transformations  and  their  matrix  representations,  determi- 
nants, matrix  inversion,  solutions  to  systems  of  linear  equations,  differentia- 
tion and  integration  of  multivariate  functions,  vector  field  theory  and 
applications.  Prerequisite:  A  grade  of  C  or  better  in  Mathematics  19,  or  consent  of 
instructor. 

21  DIFFERENTIAL  EQUATIONS 

A  study  of  ordinary  differential  equations  and  their  applications:  first  order 
linear  differential  equations,  the  Picard  Existence  Theorem,  solution  by 
separation  of  variables,  solution  by  numerical  methods;  second  order  linear 
differential  equations,  solution  by  variation  of  parameters,  solution  by  power 
series,  solution  by  Laplace  transforms;  systems  of  first  order  equations, 
solutions  by  eigenvalues;  qualitative  theory,  stability  theory,  asymptotic 
behavior,  and  the  Poincare-Bendixon  theorem.  Besides  the  usual  applica- 
tions in  physics  and  engineering,  considerable  attention  will  be  given  to 
modern  applications  in  the  social  and  life  sciences.  Prerequisite:  A  grade  of  C 
or  better  in  Mathematics  19,  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

23  COMPLEX  VARIABLES 

Complex  numbers,  analytic  functions,  complex  integration,  Cauchy's  the- 
orems, and  their  applications.  Co-requisite:  Mathematics  20.  Alternate  years. 

24  FOUNDATIONS  OF  MATHEMATICS 

Topics  regularly  included  are  the  nature  of  mathematical  systems,  essentials 
of  logical  reasoning,  and  axiomatic  foundations  of  set  theory.  Other  topics 
frequently  included  are  approaches  to  the  concepts  of  infinity  and  continuity, 
and  the  construction  of  the  real  number  system.  The  course  serves  as  a  bridge 
from  the  elementary  calculus  to  advanced  courses  in  algebra  and  analysis. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  19,  or  consent  of  instructor. 

94 


30  TOPICS  IN  GEOMETRY 

An  axiomatic  treatment  of  Euclidean  geometry,  and  an  introduction  to 
related  geometries.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  18.  Alternate  years. 

31  INTRODUCTION  TO  NUMERICAL  ANALYSIS 

Study  and  analysis  of  tabulated  data  leading  to  interpolation,  numerical 
integration,  numerical  solutions  of  differential  equations  and  systems  of 
equations.  Co-requisite:  Mathematics  20.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  15.  Alternate 
years. 

32-33     MATHEMATICAL  STATISTICS  I-II 

A  study  of  probability,  discrete  and  continuous  random  variables,  expected 
values  and  moments,  sampling,  point  estimation,  sampling  distributions, 
interval  estimation,  test  of  hypotheses,  regression  and  linear  hypotheses, 
experimental  design  models.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  19.  Alternate  years. 

34    MODERN  ALGEBRA 

An  integrated  approach  to  groups,  rings,  fields  and  vector  spaces,  and 
functions  which  preserve  their  structure.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  24. 

36  CONCEPTS  OF  MATHEMATICS  IN  SECONDARY  EDUCATION 

A  course  designed  for  mathematics  majors  who  are  planning  to  teach  at  the 
secondary  level.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  mathematics  that  forms  the 
foundation  of  secondary  mathematics.  Ideas  will  be  presented  to  familiarize 
the  student  with  various  curriculum  proposals,  to  provide  for  innovation 
within  the  existing  curriculum  and  to  expand  the  boundaries  of  the  existing 
curriculum.  Open  only  to  junior  and  senior  math  majors  enrolled  in  the  secondary 
education  pirogram.  Alternate  years. 

37  COMPUTATIONAL  MATRIX  ALGEBRA 

An  introduction  to  some  of  the  algorithms  which  have  been  developed  for 
producing  numerical  solutions  to  such  linear  algebraic  problems  as  solving 
systems  of  linear  equations,  inverting  matrices,  computing  the  eigenvalues 
of  a  matrix,  and  solving  the  linear  least  squares  problem.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  15  and  20  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

42     REAL  ANALYSIS 

A  rigorous  analysis  of  the  basic  concepts  of  real  variable  calculus;  the  real 
number  system  as  a  complete,  ordered  field;  the  topology  of  Euclidean  space, 
compact  sets,  the  Heine-Borel  Theorem;  continuity;  the  Intermediate  Value 
Theorem;  derivatives,  the  Mean  Value  Theorem;  Riemann  integrals,  the 
Fundamental  Theorem  of  Calculus;  infinite  series,  and  Taylor's  theorem. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  24. 

48     SEMINAR 

Topics  in  modern  mathematics  of  current  interest  to  the  instructor.  A 
different  topic  is  selected  each  semester.  This  seminar  is  designed  to  provide 
junior  and  senior  mathematics  majors  and  other  qualified  students  with  more 

95 


than   the   usual  opportunity   for  concentrated  and  cooperative   inquiry. 

Prerequisite:  Consent  of  the  instructor.  One-half  unit  of  credit.  This  course  may  be 
repeated  for  credit. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  with  computer  science  and  statistics  background  have  helped  other 
institutions  do  research  on  their  data. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

The  department  will  consider  any  topic  of  interest  to  a  qualified  student. 
Recently  completed  studies  focused  on  data  structures,  computer  graphics, 
designs  of  geodesic  domes  and  integer  programming. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

One  student  produced  an  Honors  paper  entitled  "Construction  of  Rings  from 
Bounded  Modular  Lattices."  This  project  helped  prepare  the  student  for 
graduate  study  in  mathematics. 


MUSIC 

Assistant  Professors:  Boerckel,  Jex,  Thayer  (Chairman) 

Part-Time  Instructors:  Mclver,  Nacinovich,  Nagel,  Russell,  Serang,  Veley 

The  music  major  is  required  to  take  a  balanced  program  of  theory,  applied 
music,  music  history,  and  music  ensemble.  A  minimum  of  eight  courses 
(exclusive  of  applied  music  and  ensemble)  is  required,  and  these  must  include 
Music  10,  11,  15,  32,  and  any  two  from  35,  36,  45,  46.  Each  major  must 
participate  in  an  ensemble  (Music  68  and/or  69)  and  take  one  hour  of  applied 
music  per  week.  (See  Music  60-66)  The  major  must  include  piano  in  the  applied 
program  unless  a  piano  proficiency  test  is  requested  and  passed. 

10-11     MUSIC  THEORY  I  AND  II 

A  two-semester  course  for  the  major  or  non-major  wishing  to  develop 
musicianship  through  the  study  of  harmony,  ear-training,  and  sight- 
singing.  (Music  10  is  prerequisite  to  Music  11) 

15    INTRODUCTION  TO  MUSIC 

An  introduction  to  traditional  serious  music  for  those  with  or  without  music 
training.  This  is  basically  a  non-technical  course  for  majors  and  non-majors, 
and  is  concerned  with  representative  composers,  compositions,  style  peri- 
ods, and  forms.  Class  time  is  largely  devoted  to  guided  listening,  and 
outside  assignments  consist  mostly  of  readings  with  some  listening. 

18    AMERICAN  MUSIC  I 

For  the  major  or  non-major  interested  in  studying  all  types  of  American 
music,  from  pre-Revolutionary  days  through  World  War  I.  Areas  explored 
will  include  Indian,  African,  and  European  roots  influencing  the  serious 
music  for  small  and  large  ensembles,  the  development  of  show  music  from 

96 


minstrels  to  Broadway  musicals,  the  evolution  of  "Tin  Pan  Alley",  and  the 
beginnings  of  jazz.  Alternate  years. 

19    AMERICAN  MUSIC  II 

For  the  major  or  non-major  interested  in  studying  all  types  of  American 
Music.  American  Music  II  will  cover  post-World  War  I  days  to  the  present. 
Areas  explored  will  include  indigenous  serious  music  for  small  and  large 
ensembles,  the  mature  Broadway  musical,  the  evolution  of  jazz,  the 
development  of  rock,  and  the  fusion  of  musical  styles  in  the  1970's.  Alternate 
years. 

20-21     MUSIC  THEORY  III  AND  IV 

A  continuation  of  the  integrated  theory  course  moving  toward  newer  uses 
of  music  materials.  Prerequisite:  Music  11.  Alternate  years. 

28  COUNTERPOINT 

A  study  of  the  five  species  in  two,  three,  and  four-part  writing.  Alternate 
years. 

29  ORCHESTRATION 

A  study  of  modern  orchestral  instruments,  and  examination  of  their  use  by 
the  great  masters  with  practical  problems  in  instrumentation.  Alternate 
years. 

30  COMPOSITION 

Creative  writing  in  smaller  vocal  and  instrumental  forms.  The  college  music 
organizations  serve  to  make  performance  possible.  Alternate  years. 

31  CONDUCTING 

A  study  of  the  fundamentals  of  conducting  with  frequent  opportunity  for 
practical  experience.  Alternate  years. 

97 


32  ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  I 

Largely  a  non-technical  introduction  to  electronic  music  designed  for  the 
major  and  non-major  alike.  The  course  traces  the  development  of  electronic 
music,  introduces  the  student  to  simple  tape-splicing  and  recorder  manipu- 
lation, and  progresses  to  the  present-day  synthesizer  and  multi-track 
techniques.  Students  will  work  collectively  and  individually  in  the  elec- 
tronic studios. 

33  ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  II 

An  in-depth  study  of  the  Moog  synthesizer  including  alternating  and  direct 
current,  signal  generators,  and  the  characteristics  of  their  waveforms, 
control  voltage  and  its  sources,  the  transient  and  periodic  modulations. 
Basic  mixing  and  filtering  techniques  will  be  examined.  Students  will  be 
assigned  studio  hours  to  complete  the  recording  assignments.  Prerequisite: 
Music  32. 

35  MUSIC  HISTORY  TO  J.  S.  BACH 

A  study  of  our  music  from  its  roots  to  the  early  18th  Century,  with  particular 
emphasis  on  late  Medieval,  Renaissance,  and  the  early  and  middle  Baroque. 

Prerequisite:  Music  15.  Alternate  years. 

36  MUSIC  HISTORY  OF  THE  18TH  CENTURY 

The  late  Baroque,  Rococo,  and  Classical  periods  are  examined  with  particu- 
lar emphasis  on  J.  S.  Bach,  Handel,  Mozart,  Haydn,  and  early  Beethoven  as 
well  as  Corelli,  Vivaldi,  the  sons  of  Bach  and  the  French  school.  Prerequisite: 
Music  15.  Alternate  years. 

42  ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  III 

An  introduction  to  acoustic  theory,  echo  technique,  location  modulation, 
application  of  equalization,  phasing,  and  microphones.  The  student  will 
write  and  perform  an  electronic  composition  utilizing  real-time  networks. 

Prerequisite:  Music  33.  Alternate  years. 

43  ELECTRONIC  MUSIC  IV 

A  study  of  major  compositions  and  genres  of  electronic  music.  The  student 
will  complete  an  original  composition  based  upon  a  study  of  these  tech- 
niques and  forms.  Prerequisite:  Music  42.  Alternate  years. 

45  MUSIC  OF  THE  19TH  CENTURY 

A  study  of  the  music  of  the  Romantic  period  with  emphasis  on  Beethoven, 
Schubert,  Chopin,  Berlioz,  Liszt,  Schumann,  Brahms,  Wagner,  Verdi, 
Tchaikovsky  and  others.  Close  examination  of  short  lyric  forms,  program 
music,  opera,  and  the  sonata  genre.  Prerequisite:  Music  15.  Alternate  years. 

46  MUSIC  OF  THE  20TH  CENTURY 

Beginning  with  Debussy,  Strauss,  Mahler,  and  Sibelius,  the  course  traces 
some  of  the  main  currents  in  the  music  of  our  time.  Emphasis  given  to  such 
composers  as  Stravinsky,  Bartok,  Ives,  Shostakovich,  Berg,  Gershwin,  and 
others.  Prerequisite:  Music  15.  Alternate  years. 

98 


APPLIED  MUSIC  AND  ENSEMBLE 

The  study  of  performance  in  Piano,  Voice,  Organ,  Strings,  Woodwinds,  and 
Percussion  is  designed  to  develop  sound  technique  and  a  knowledge  of  the 
appropriate  literature  for  the  instrument.  Student  recitals  offer  opportunities  to 
gain  experience  in  public  performance.  Music  majors  and  other  students 
qualified  in  performance  may  present  formal  recitals. 

Credit  for  Applied  Music  courses  (private  lessons)  and  ensemble  (choir  and 
band)  is  earned  on  a  fractional  basis.  For  a  description  of  this,  see  page  16.  An 
applied  course  or  ensemble  should  NOT  be  substituted  for  an  academic  course, 
but  should  in  every  case  be  in  addition  to  the  normal  four  academic  courses. 
Extra  fees  apply  for  private  lessons  (Music  60-66)  as  follows:  $75  per  semester  for 
a  half-hour  lesson  per  week,  and  $150  per  semester  for  an  hour  lesson  per  week. 
Private  lessons  are  given  for  thirteen  weeks. 

60  Piano  62  Strings  64  Brass  66  Percussion 

61  Voice  63  Organ  65  Woodwinds 

68  CHORAL  ENSEMBLE  (CHOIR) 

Participation  in  the  college  choir  is  designed  to  enable  any  student  possess- 
ing at  least  average  talent  an  opportunity  to  study  choral  technique. 
Emphasis  is  placed  upon  acquaintance  with  choral  literature,  tone  produc- 
tion, diction,  and  phrasing.  Students  desiring  credit  for  choir  are  allowed  a 
maximum  of  one  hour  per  semester.  A  student  who  is  enrolled  in  choir  and 
not  band  should  elect  Music  68-B  (one  hour  credit).  Students  enrolled  in 
both  band  and  choir  should  elect  68- A  and  69- A  (V2  hr.  in  each). 

69  INSTRUMENTAL  ENSEMBLE  (BAND) 

The  college  band  allows  students  with  some  instrumental  experience  to 
become  acquainted  with  good  band  literature  and  develop  personal  musi- 
cianship through  participation  in  group  instrumental  activity.  Students 
desiring  credit  for  ensemble  are  allowed  a  maximum  of  one  hour  per 
semester.  A  student  who  is  enrolled  in  band,  but  not  choir,  should  elect 
Music  69-B  (one  hour  credit).  A  student  enrolled  in  both  band  and  choir 
should  elect  68-A  and  69-B  (V2  hr.  in  each). 

70-79    INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80-89    INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

90-99    INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 


NEAR  EAST  CULTURE  AND  ARCHEOLOGY 

Professor:  Guerra  (Coordinator) 

The  Near  East  Culture  and  Archeology  interdisciplinary  major  is  designed  to 
acquaint  students  with  the  "cradle  of  Western  civilization",  both  in  its  ancient  and 
modern  aspects.  Majors  will  complete  a  minimum  of  eight  to  ten  courses  related 
to  the  Near  East. 

Required  courses  are  described  in  their  departmental  sections  and  include: 

1.      Four  courses  (semesters)  in  language  and  culture  from: 
History  and  Culture  of  the  Ancient  Near  East  (Religion  28) 

99 


History  of  Art  (Art  22) 

Ancient  History  (History  20) 

Old  Testament  Faith  and  History  (Religion  13) 

Judaism  and  Islam  (Religion  24) 

Two  semesters  of  foreign  language  (Hebrew  1,  2  or  Greek  1,  2) 

2.  Two  courses  (semesters)  in  archeology  from: 
Bible,  Archeology,  and  Faith  (Religion  46) 

Special  Archeology  courses,  such  as  independent  studies  or  in  May 
Term  or  summer  sessions  in  the  Near  East. 

3.  Two  courses  (semesters)  in  the  cooperating  departments  (Art,  History, 
Political  Science,  Religion,  and  Sociology  and  Anthropology)  or  related 
departments.  These  two  courses,  usually  taken  in  the  junior  or  senior  years, 
can  be  independent  study.  Topics  should  be  related  either  to  the  ancient  or 
the  modern  Near  East  and  must  be  approved  in  advance  by  the  committee 
supervising  the  interdisciplinary  program.  The  study  of  modern  Arabic  or 
Hebrew  is  encouraged. 

Other  courses  may  be  suggested  by  the  supervisory  committee  within  the 
limits  of  a  ten-course  major.  The  number  of  courses  taken  within  this  program 
applicable  toward  fulfilling  the  College  distribution  requirements  will  vary 
according  to  the  selection  of  courses  you  make. 


PHILOSOPHY 

Associate  Professor:  Griffith 

Assistant  Professor:  Herring  (Chairman),  Whelan 

The  study  of  philosophy  develops  a  critical  understanding  of  the  basic  concepts 
and  presuppositions  around  which  we  organize  our  thought  in  science,  religion, 
education,  morality,  the  arts,  and  other  human  enterprises.  A  major  in 
philosophy,  together  with  appropriate  other  courses,  can  provide  an  excellent 
preparation  for  policy-making  positions  of  many  kinds,  for  graduate  study  in 
several  fields,  and  for  careers  in  education,  law,  and  the  ministry.  The  major  in 
philosophy  consists  of  at  least  eight  courses  numbered  10  or  above,  of  which  six 
must  be  numbered  20  or  above  and  must  include  21  or  23,  22  or  24,  and  49.  In 
addition  to  the  courses  listed  below,  special  courses  are  often  offered. 

5     PRACTICAL  REASONING 

A  general  introduction  to  topics  in  logic  and  their  application  to  practical 
reasoning,  with  primary  emphasis  on  detecting  fallacies,  evaluating  induc- 
tive reasoning,  and  understanding  the  rudiments  of  scientific  method. 

10     INTRODUCTION  TO  PHILOSOPHICAL  PROBLEMS 

An  introductory  course  designed  to  show  the  nature  of  philosophy  by 
examination  of  several  examples  of  problems  which  have  received  extended 
attention  in  philosophical  literature.  These  topics  often  include  the  relation 
of  the  mind  to  the  body,  the  possibility  of  human  freedom,  arguments  about 
the  existence  of  God,  the  conditions  of  knowledge,  and  the  relation  of 
language  to  thought.  Some  attention  is  also  given  to  the  principles  of 
acceptable  reasoning. 

100 


14  PHILOSOPHY  AND  PERSONAL  CHOICE 

An  introductory  philosophical  examination  of  a  number  of  contemporary 
moral  issues  which  call  for  personal  decision.  Topics  often  investigated 
include  these:  the  "good"  life,  obligation  to  others,  sexual  ethics,  abortion, 
suicide  and  death,  violence  and  pacifism,  obedience  to  the  law,  the  relevance 
of  personal  beliefs  to  morality.  Discussion  centers  on  some  of  the  suggestions 
philosophers  have  made  about  how  to  make  such  decisions. 

15  PHILOSOPHY  AND  PUBLIC  POLICY 

An  introductory  philosophical  examination  of  the  moral  and  conceptual 
dimension  of  various  contemporary  public  issues,  such  as  the  relation  of 
ethics  to  politics  and  the  law,  the  enforcement  of  morals,  the  problem  of  fair 
distribution  of  goods  and  opportunities,  the  legitimacy  to  restricting  the  use 
of  natural  resources,  and  the  application  of  ethics  to  business  practice. 
Discussion  centers  on  some  of  the  suggestions  philosophers  have  made 
about  how  to  deal  with  these  issues. 

17  PHILOSOPHICAL  ISSUES  IN  EDUCATION 

An  examination  of  the  basic  concepts  involved  in  thought  about  education, 
and  a  consideration  of  the  various  methods  for  justifying  educational 
proposals.  Typical  of  the  issues  discussed  are  these:  Are  education  and 
indoctrination  different?  What  is  a  liberal  education?  Are  education  and 
schooling  compatible?  What  do  we  need  to  learn?  Alternate  years. 

18  PHILOSOPHICAL  ISSUES  IN  CRIMINAL  JUSTICE 

An  introductory  examination  of  various  philosophical  issues  and  concepts 
which  are  of  special  importance  in  legal  contexts.  Discussion  includes  both 
general  topics  such  as  the  justification  of  punishment,  and  more  specific 
topics  such  as  the  insanity  defense  and  the  rights  of  the  accused.  Readings 
are  arranged  topically,  and  include  both  classical  and  contemporary  sources. 

19  ETHICAL  ISSUES  IN  BIOLOGY  AND  MEDICINE 

A  philosophical  investigation  of  some  of  the  ethical  issues  which  arise  as  a 
result  of  contemporary  medical  and  biological  technology.  Typical  of  these 
issues  are  euthanasia,  behavior  control,  patient  rights,  experimentation  on 
humans,  fetal  research,  abortion,  genetic  engineering,  population  control, 
and  distribution  of  health  resources. 

20  SYMBOLIC  LOGIC 

A  study  of  modern  symbolic  logic,  and  its  application  to  the  analysis  of 
arguments.  Included  are  truth- functional  relations,  the  logic  of  propositional 
functions,  and  deductive  systems.  Attention  is  also  given  to  various  topics 
in  the  philosophy  of  logic. 

21  ANCIENT  GREEK  ETHICAL  AND  POLITICAL  PHILOSOPHY 

An  examination  of  the  ethical  and  political  views  of  Socrates,  Plato,  and 
Aristotle.  Considerable  attention  is  paid  to  the  relationship  between  these 
views  and  the  social  and  intellectual  milieu  out  of  which  they  developed. 
However,   the  primary  emphasis  is  on  understanding  the  philosophical 

101 


issues  raised  in  selected  Aristotelian  and  Platonic  texts.  Prerequisite:  Freshmen 
must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate  years. 

22  HISTORY  OF  MODERN  POLITICAL  PHILOSOPHY 

An  historical  survey  of  the  most  important  social  and  political  philosophers 
of  the  modern  period.  Particular  attention  is  paid  to  the  social  contract 
theories  of  Hobbes,  Locke,  and  Rousseau,  and  some  consideration  will  be 
given  to  the  political  philosophies  of  Hegel,  Marx,  and  Mill.  Prerequisite: 

Freshmen  must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate  years. 

23  ANCIENT  GREEK  SCIENCE  AND  METAPHYSICS 

An  historical  survey  of  the  first  attempts  to  understand  the  physical  universe 
scientifically.  Particular  attention  is  paid  to  the  common  origins  of 
philosophy  and  science  in  the  works  of  the  pre-Platonic  philosophers,  to  the 
question  of  how  scientific  and  philosophical  thinking  is  distinct  from 
mythological  and  technological  thinking,  and  to  the  interaction  between 
philosophy  and  science  in  formulating  the  fundamental  problems  about  the 
physical  universe  and  in  developing  and  criticizing  the  various  concepts 
introduced  in  attempts  to  solve  those  problems.  Prerequisite:  Freshmen  must 
have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate  years. 

24  EARLY  MODERN  SCIENCE  AND  METAPHYSICS 

An  historical  survey  of  the  early  modern  attempt  to  understand  the  physical 
universe.  Particular  attention  is  paid  to  the  continuities  and  discontinuities 
between  early  modern  science  and  metaphysics  and  ancient  Greek  science 
and  metaphysics,  to  the  rationalism-empiricism  dispute  in  science  and 
metaphysics,  and  to  the  interaction  between  philosophy  and  science  in 
formulating  fundamental  questions  about  the  physical  universe  and  in 
developing  and  criticizing  concepts  designed  to  answer  them.  Prerequisite: 
Freshmen  must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate  years. 

31  PHILOSOPHICAL  ISSUES  IN  CONTEMPORARY  PSYCHOLOGY 

Theories  in  psychology  which  attempt  to  explain  human  behavior  seem  to 
conflict  in  various  ways  with  religion,  with  common  ideas  about  morality, 
and  with  common-sensical  ways  of  explaining  human  behavior.  This  course 
examines  some  of  those  conflicts  philosophically.  Prerequisite:  Students 
without  previous  study  in  philosophy  must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate 
years. 

32  PHILOSOPHY  OF  RELIGION 

A  philosophical  examination  of  religion.  Included  are  such  topics  as  the 
nature  of  religious  discourse,  arguments  for  and  against  the  existence  of  God, 
and  the  relation  between  religion  and  science.  Readings  from  classical  and 
contemporary  sources.  Prerequisite:  Students  without  previous  study  in 
philosophy  must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate  years. 

33  PHILOSOPHY  OF  NATURAL  SCIENCE 

A  consideration  of  philosophically  important  conceptual  problems  arising 
from  reflection  about  natural  science,  including  such  topics  as  the  nature  of 
scientific  laws  and  theories,  the  character  of  explanation,  the  import  of 

102 


prediction,  the  existence  of  "non-observable"  theoretical  entities  such  as 
electrons  and  genes,  the  problem  of  justifying  induction,  and  various  puzzles 
associated  with  probability.  Prerequisite:  Students  without  previous  study  in 
philosophy  must  have  instructor's  permission.  Alternate  years. 

34  SOCIAL  AND  POLITICAL  PHILOSOPHY 

A  systematic  philosophical  investigation  of  the  relation  between  human 
nature  and  the  proper  social  and  political  order.  Topics  studied  include  the 
purpose  of  government,  the  nature  of  legitimate  authority,  the  foundation 
of  human  rights,  and  the  limits  of  human  freedom.  Emphasis  is  placed  on 
the  logic  of  social  and  political  thought  and  on  the  analysis  of  basic  principles 
and  concepts.  Prerequisite:  Students  without  previous  study  in  philosophy  must 
have  instructor's  permission. 

35  ETHICAL  THEORY 

An  inquiry  concerning  the  grounds  which  distinguish  morally  right  actions 
from  morally  wrong  actions.  Central  to  the  course  is  critical  consideration  of 
the  proposals  and  the  rationale  of  relativists,  egoists,  utilitarians,  and  other 
ethical  theorists.  Various  topics  in  metaethics  are  also  included.  Prerequisite: 
Students  without  previous  study  in  philosophy  must  have  instructor's  permission. 

49     DEPARTMENTAL  SEMINAR 

An  investigation,  carried  on  by  discussions  and  papers,  into  one 
philosophical  problem,  text,  philosopher,  or  movement.  A  different  topic  is 
selected  each  semester;  recent  topics  include  Sidgwick's  ethics,  religious 
language,  Kierkegaard,  legal  punishment,  Wittgenstein,  personal  identity, 
and  human  rights.  This  seminar  is  designed  to  provide  junior  and  senior 
philosophy  majors  and  other  qualified  students  with  more  than  the  usual 
opportunity  for  concentrated  and  cooperative  inquiry.  Prerequisite:  Consent  of 
the  instructor.  This  seminar  may  be  repeated  for  credit. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

80     INDEPENDENT  STUDY 

Recent  independent  studies  in  philosophy  include  Nietzsche,  moral  educa- 
tion, Rawls'  theory  of  justice,  existentialism,  euthanasia,  Plato's  ethics,  and 
philosophical  aesthetics. 

90     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS 


PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

Associate  Professor:  Burch  (Chairman) 
Assistant  Professor:  Whitehill 
Instructor:  Holmes 
Visiting  Instructor:  Hair 

1       PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 

Coeducational  physical  education  classes.  Basic  instructions  in  fundamen- 
tals, knowledge,  and  appreciation  of  sports  that  include  swimming,  tennis, 

103 


bowling,  volleyball,  archery,  field  hockey,  soccer,  golf,  badminton,  modern 
dance,  skiing,  elementary  games  (for  elementary  teachers),  toneastics, 
physical  fitness,  and  other  activities.  Orienteering  backpacking,  cross 
country  skiing,  alpine  skiing,  jogging,  and  cycling  are  offered  on  a  contract 
basis.  Beginning  swimming  is  required  for  all  nonswimmers.  Students  may 
select  any  activity  offered.  A  reasonable  degree  of  proficiency  is  required  in 
the  activities  in  which  students  choose  to  participate.  Emphasis  is  on  the 
potential  use  of  activities  as  recreational  and  leisure-time  interests.  Two 
semesters  of  physical  education  (two  hours  per  week)  are  required.  All 
physical  education  classes  are  open  to  both  men  and  women. 

POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

Associate  Professor:  Giglio  (Chairman),  Roskin 
Assistant  Professor:  Grogan 

The  major  is  designed  to  provide  a  systematic  understanding  of  government  and 
politics  at  the  international,  national,  state,  and  local  levels.  Majors  are  en- 
couraged to  develop  their  faculties  to  make  independent,  objective  analyses 
which  can  be  applied  to  the  broad  spectrum  of  the  social  sciences. 

Although  the  political  science  major  is  not  designed  as  a  vocational  major, 
students  with  such  training  may  go  directly  into  government  service,  journalism, 
teaching,  or  private  administrative  agencies.  A  political  science  major  can  provide 
the  base  for  the  study  of  law,  or  for  graduate  studies  leading  to  administrative 
work  in  federal,  state,  or  local  government,  international  organizations,  or  college 
teaching.  Students  seeking  certification  to  teach  secondary  school  social  studies 
may  major  in  political  science  but  should  consult  their  advisors  and  the  education 
department. 

A  major  consists  of  eight  political  science  courses,  including  Political 
Science  15  and  at  least  one  course  in  each  of  the  five  areas  (A  to  E)  below. 
Students  entering  the  major  as  juniors  or  seniors  may,  with  departmental 
permission,  substitute  Political  Science  20,  European  Politics,  for  Political 
Science  15.  To  encourage  familiarity  with  other  social  sciences,  at  least  two 
courses  must  be  completed  from  the  following:  American  Studies  10;  Business 
35  and  36  (recommended  for  pre-law);  Economics  10,  11,  32,  45;  History  24,  32, 
33,  34;  Philosophy  21,  22;  Sociology  and  Anthropology  26,  38. 

15     INTRODUCTION  TO  POLITICS 

The  behavior  and  misbehavior  of  the  political  animal,  man.  Why  he  forms 
political  communities,  how  he  may  improve  them,  and  how  he  may  destroy 
them.  Required  of  all  political  science  majors;  open  to  a  limited  number  of  other 
interested  students. 

A.  AMERICAN  GOVERNMENT 

10     GOVERNMENT  AND  POLITICS  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES 

An  introduction  to  American  national  government  which  emphasizes  both 
structural- functional  analysis  and  policymaking  processes.  In  addition  to  the 
legislative,  executive  and  judicial  branches  of  government,  attention  will  be 
given  to  political  parties  and  interest  groups,  elections  and  voting  behavior, 
and  constitutional  rights.  Recommended  to  all  Social  Science  Education 
majors  and  to  those  students  who  have  had  inadequate  or  insufficient 
preparation  in  American  government. 

104 


11     STATE  AND  LOCAL  GOVERNMENT 

An  examination  of  the  general  principles,  major  problems,  and  political 
processes  of  the  states  and  their  subdivisions,  together  with  their  role  in  a 
federal  type  of  government. 

30  THE  AMERICAN  CONSTITUTIONAL  SYSTEM 

An  analysis  of  the  Supreme  Court  in  the  American  system  of  government 
with  some  attention  paid  to  judicial  decisionmaking.  Topics  include:  judicial 
review,  federalism,  constitutional  limits  on  legislative  and  executive 
powers,  elections  and  representation.  Alternate  years. 

31  CIVIL  RIGHTS  AND  LIBERTIES 

What  are  our  rights  and  liberties  as  Americans?  What  should  they  be?  A 
frank  discussion  of  the  nature  and  scope  of  the  constitutional  guarantees. 
First  Amendment  rights,  the  rights  of  criminal  suspects  and  defendants, 
racial  and  sexual  equality,  and  equal  protection  of  the  laws.  Students  will 
read  and  brief  the  more  important  Supreme  Court  decisions.  Prerequisite: 
Junior  or  Senior  standing  or  consent  of  the  instructor 

33    BUREAUCRACY  AND  PUBLIC  ADMINISTRATION 

What  is  a  bureaucracy?  Why  and  how  do  bureaucracies  arise?  What  has 
been  the  political  impact  of  growth  of  bureaucracy  in  government?  These 
questions,  among  others,  will  be  considered  in  this  examination  of  public 
bureaucracies.  This  course  is  highly  recommended  to  students  planning  to 
take  an  internship  in  city  or  county  government  through  the  political 
science  department. 

B.  AMERICAN  POLITICS 

22  POLITICAL  PARTIES  AND  INTEREST  GROUPS 

An  examination  of  the  history,  organization,  functions,  and  methods  of 
American  political  parties.  Special  attention  is  devoted  to  the  role  of 
organized  interest  groups  in  the  political  process.  Alternate  years. 

23  AMERICAN  PRESIDENCY 

A  study  of  the  office  and  powers  of  the  president  with  analysis  of  his  major 
roles  as  chief  administrator,  legislator,  political  leader,  foreign  policy  maker, 
and  commander-in-chief.  Special  attention  is  given  to  those  presidents  who 
led  the  nation  boldly. 

24  THE  LEGISLATIVE  PROCESS 

A  study  of  the  role  of  the  legislature  in  the  framework  of  the  national  and 
state  governments.  Consideration  of  the  influence  of  the  parties,  pressure 
groups,  public  opinion,  constituencies,  the  "committee  system",  the  "ad- 
ministration" and  the  constitution  in  the  lawmaking  process.  Alternate  years. 

28     CONTEMPORARY  ISSUES  IN  PUBLIC  POLICY  I 

An  introduction  to  basic  principles  of  policy  analysis,  including  identi- 
fication of  contemporary  public  policy  problems,   alternative  solutions, 

105 


formal  government  and  other  participants  in  the  policy-making  process, 
and  evaluation  of  policy  impact.  Includes  a  detailed  case-study  analysis  of 
one  major  public  policy  controversy.  This  is  a  V2  unit  course  (first  seven 
weeks  of  semester).  Students  wishing  to  register  in  a  full  unit  course  should 
register  for  both  PS  28  and  PS  29;  those  wishing  to  register  for  a  V2  unit 
course  only  should  register  for  PS  28.  Alternate  years. 

29    CONTEMPORARY  ISSUES  IN  PUBLIC  POLICY  II 

A  continuation  of  PS  28  with  an  emphasis  on  the  variety  of  major  issues  in 
public  policy  confronting  American  government  and  society.  Includes  a 
detailed  case-study  analysis  of  one  major  public  policy  controversy  (will 
differ  from  that  analyzed  in  PS  28).  This  is  a  V2  unit  course  (second  seven 
weeks  of  semester).  Prerequisite:  PS  28.  Students  wishing  to  register  in  a  full  unit 
course  should  register  for  both  PS  28  and  PS  29.  Alternate  years. 

32    THE  POLITICS  OF  CITIES  AND  SUBURBS 

An  examination  of  the  history,  legal  basis,  power,  forms,  services,  and 
problems  of  the  cities  and  their  suburbs,  with  special  reference  to  current 
experiments  in  the  solution  of  the  problems  of  metropolitan  areas. 

C.  POLITICAL  THEORY  AND  METHODOLOGY 

35    LAW  AND  SOCIETY 

An  examination  into  the  nature,  sources,  functions,  and  limits  of  law  as  an 
instrument  of  political  and  social  control.  Included  for  discussion  are  legal 
problems  pertaining  to  the  family,  crime,  deviant  behavior,  poverty,  and 
minority  groups.  Prerequisite:  Junior  or  Senior  standing  or  consent  of  the 
instructor. 

46  CONTEMPORARY  POLITICAL  IDEOLOGIES 

The  growth,  development  and  current  status  of  liberalism,  conservatism, 
nationalism,  socialism,  communism,  and  fascism.  Alternate  years. 

47  THE  AMERICAN  POLITICAL  TRADITION 

An  examination  of  the  significant  ideas  which  have  shaped  the  American 
political  tradition  from  their  European  origins  to  the  present,  with  emphasis 
on  the  influence  of  these  ideas  in  the  development  of  American  democracy. 
Special  attention  will  be  paid  to  an  analysis  of  contemporary  ideological 
movements:  Black  Power,  New  Left,  and  Radical  Feminism.  Alternate  years. 

48  PUBLIC  OPINION  AND  POLLING 

A  course  dealing  with  the  general  topic  and  methodology  of  polling.  Content 
includes  exploration  of  the  processes  by  which  people's  political  opinions  are 
formed,  the  manipulation  of  public  opinion  through  the  uses  of  propaganda, 
and  the  American  response  to  politics  and  political  issues. 

D.  COMPARATIVE  POLITICS 

20    EUROPEAN  POLITICS 

A  study  of  the  political  systems  of  East  and  West  Europe  with  emphasis  on 
106 


comparison  and  patterns  of  government.  The  course  will  review  politics  in 
Northern  (Britain,  West  Germany,  Sweden),  Latin  (France,  Italy,  Spain) 
and  Eastern  (Soviet  Union,  East  Germany,  Yugoslavia)  Europe  and  attempt 
to  find  underlying  similarities  and  differences. 

26    POLITICAL  CULTURES 

An  exploration  of  the  "people"  aspects  of  political  life  in  several  countries. 
The  way  people  interact  with  each  other  and  with  government,  what  they 
expect  from  the  system,  how  they  acquire  their  political  attitudes  and  styles 
and  how  these  contribute  to  the  type  of  government.  Alternate  years. 

38    POLITICS  OF  DEVELOPING  AREAS 

The  causes  and  possible  cures  for  socio-political  backwardness  in  Asia, 
Africa,  and  Latin  America.  Alternate  years. 


E.  INTERNATIONAL  RELATIONS 

25    WORLD  POLITICS 

Why  is  there  war?  An  introduction  to  international  relations  with  emphasis 
on  the  varieties  of  conflicts  which  may  grow  into  war. 

27    CRISIS  AREAS  IN  WORLD  POLITICS 

The  study  of  several  current  areas  of  international  tension  and  conflict, 
including  relations  among  the  United  States,  Soviet  Union  and  China,  plus 
the  Middle  East  and  whatever  new  danger  spots  arise  over  time.  Alternate 
years. 

39    AMERICAN  FOREIGN  POLICY 

The  U.S.  role  in  the  world  in  geographic,  strategic,  historical,  and  ideol- 
ogical perspectives,  plus  an  examination  of  the  domestic  forces  shaping 
U.S.  policy.  Alternate  years. 


F.  NON-AREA  ELECTIVES 

34     POLITICAL  NEWSWRITING 

A  workshop  course  in  the  reporting  and  rewriting  of  public  affairs  at  the  local, 
national  and  international  levels.  There  will  be  neither  texts  nor  examina- 
tions, but  short  written  assignments  will  be  due  every  class  meeting.  Alternate 
years. 

G.  SPECIAL  PROGRAMS 

70-79     INTERNSHIPS  (See  Index) 

Students  may  receive  academic  credit  for  serving  as  interns  in  structured 
learning  situations  with  a  wide  variety  of  public  and  private  agencies  and 
organizations.  Students  have  served  as  interns  with  the  Public  Defender's 
Office,  the  Lycoming  County  Court  Administrator,  and  the  Williamsport 
City  Government. 

107 


80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Current  studies  relate  to  elections — local,  state,  and  federal — while  past 
studies  have  included  Soviet  and  world  politics. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


PSYCHOLOGY 

Professor:  Hancock 

Assistant  Professor:  Berthold  (Chairman),  Salley 

Visiting  Professor:  Vestermark 

A  major  consists  of  Psychology  10,  31,  32,  36,  and  four  other  psychology 
courses.  Mathematics  13  is  also  required.  In  addition  to  the  departmental 
requirements,  majors  are  urged  to  include  courses  in  Animal  Physiology, 
Sociology,  and  the  Mathematics  option  of  the  distribution  requirements. 

10    INTRODUCTORY  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  empirical  study  of  human  and  other  animal 
behavior.  Areas  considered  may  include:  learning,  personality,  social, 
physiological,  sensory,  cognition,  and  developmental. 

15  ORGANIZATIONAL  AND  INDUSTRIAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  application  of  the  principles  and  methods  of  pscyhology  to  selected 
organizational  and  industrial  situations.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

16  ABNORMAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  patterns  of  deviant  behavior  with  emphasis  on 
cause,  function,  and  treatment.  The  various  models  for  the  conceptualiza- 
tion of  abnormal  behavior  are  critically  examined.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

17  DEVELOPMENTAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

A  study  of  the  basic  principles  of  early  human  growth  and  development. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

18  ADOLESCENT  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  study  areas  will  include  theories  of  adolescence;  current  issues  raised 
by  as  well  as  about  the  "generation  of  youth";  research  findings  bearing  on 
theories  and  issues  of  growth  beyond  childhood;  and  self-exploration. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

24     SOCIAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  examination  of  behavior  in  social  contexts  including  motivation,  per- 
ception, group  processes  and  leadership,  attitudes,  and  methods  of  re- 
search. Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

108 


31  LEARNING  EXPERIMENTAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

Learning  processes.  The  examination  of  the  basic  methods  and  principles  of 
animal  and  human  learning.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10;  Mathematics  13. 

32  SENSORY  EXPERIMENTAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  examination  of  psychophysical  methodology  and  basic  neu- 
rophysiological  methods  as  they  are  applied  to  the  understanding  of 
sensory  processes.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10;  Mathematics  13. 

33  PHYSIOLOGICAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  physiological  psychologist's  method  of  approach  to 
the  understanding  of  behavior  as  well  as  the  set  of  principles  that  relate  the 
function  and  organization  of  the  nervous  system  to  the  phenomena  of 
behavior.  The  course  emphasis  is  on  the  relationship  between  brain 
function  and  the  physiological  bases  of  learning,  perception,  and  motiva- 
tion. Laboratory  experience  includes  both  behavioral  testing  and  basic 
small-animal  neurosurgical  technique  as  well  as  histological  methodology. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  20  or  Biology  23,  and  Mathematics  13. 

34  PRINCIPLES  OF  MEASUREMENT 

Psychometric  methods  and  theory,  including  scale  transformation,  norms, 
standardization,  validation  procedures  and  estimation  of  reliability.  Prere- 
quisite: Psychology  10,  Mathematics  13. 

35  HISTORY  AND  SYSTEMS  OF  PSYCHOLOGY 

The  growth  of  scientific  psychology  and  the  theories  and  systems  that  have 
accompanied  its  development.  Prerequisite:  4  courses  in  Psychology. 

36  PERSONALITY  THEORY 

Theories  of  personality.  A  comparison  of  different  theoretical  views  on  the 
development  and  functioning  of  personality.  Examined  in  detail  are  three 
general  viewpoints  of  personality:  psychoanalytic,  stimulus-response  (be- 
havioristic),  and  phenomenological.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

37  COGNITION 

An  investigation  of  human  mental  processes  along  the  two  major  dimensions 
of  directed  and  undirected  thought.  Topic  areas  include:  recognition, 
attention,  conceptualization,  problem-solving,  fantasy,  language,  dreaming, 
and  creativity.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  10. 

38  EDUCATIONAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  empirical  study  of  the  teaching-learning  process. 
Areas  considered  may  include  educational  objectives,  pupil  and  teacher 
characteristics,  concept  learning,  problem  solving  and  creativity,  attitudes 
and  values,  motivation,  retention  and  transfer,  and  evaluation  and  meas- 
urement. Prerequisite:  Psychology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

109 


39  BEHAVIOR  MODIFICATION 

A  detailed  examination  of  the  applied  analysis  of  behavior.  Focus  will  be  on 
the  application  of  experimental  method  to  the  individual  clinical  case.  The 
course  will  cover  targeting,  behavior,  base-rating,  intervention  strategies  and 
outcome  evaluation.  Learning  based  modification  techniques  such  as  con- 
tingency management,  counter-conditioning,  extinction,  discrimination 
training,  aversive  conditioning  and  negative  practice  will  be  examined. 
Prerequisite:  Psychology  21. 

40  ADVANCED  EXPERIMENTAL  DESIGN 

Consideration  of  a  variety  of  designs  currently  used  in  Psychology  with 
emphasis  on  the  appropriate  statistical  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  20  and 
21. 

48-49     PRACTICUM  IN  PSYCHOLOGY 

An  off-campus  involvement  in  the  application  of  psychological  skills  and 
principles  in  institutional  settings.  The  experience  includes  training  in 
behavior  modification  and  traditional  counseling  techniques  as  applied  in 
prisons,  mental  health  centers,  and  schools  for  the  mentally  retarded. 
Classroom  training  focuses  on  various  therapeutic  techniques  and  on  the 
students'  understanding  of  themselves  in  the  counselor  role.  Prerequisite: 
Consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Internships  give  students  an  opportunity  to  relate  on-campus  academic 
experiences  to  society  in  general  and  to  their  post-baccalaureate  objectives 
in  particular.  Our  students  have,  for  example,  worked  in  prisons,  public  and 
private  schools,  county  government,  and  the  American  Red  Cross. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Independent  Study  is  an  opportunity  for  students  to  pursue  special  interests 
in  areas  for  which  courses  are  not  offered.  In  addition,  students  have  an 
opportunity  to  study  a  topic  in  more  depth  than  is  possible  in  the  regular 
classroom  situation.  Studies  in  the  past  have  included  child  abuse,  counsel- 
ing of  hospital  patients,  and  research  in  the  psychology  of  natural  disasters. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

Honors  in  Psychology  require  original  contributions  to  the  literature  of 
Psychology  through  independent  study.  The  most  recent  honors  project  was 
a  study  of  the  relationship  between  socio-economic  status  and  visual  vs. 
auditory  learning. 

RELIGION 

Professor:  Guerra 

Assistant  Professor:  Hughes  (Chairman),  Robinson 

A  major  consists  of  ten  courses  including  11, 12, 13,  and  14.  At  least  seven  courses 
must  be  taken  in  the  department.  The  following  courses  may  be  counted  toward 
fulfilling  the  major  requirements:  Greek  11  and  12,  Hebrew  11  and  12,  History 
39  and  41,  Philosophy  32,  and  Sociology  33. 

110 


11  DEATH  AND  DYING 

A  study  of  death  from  personal,  social,  and  universal  standpoints,  with 
emphasis  upon  what  the  dying  may  teach  the  living.  Principal  issues  are  the 
stages  of  dying,  bereavement,  suicide,  funeral  conduct,  and  the  religious 
doctrines  of  death  and  immortality.  Course  includes,  as  optional,  practical 
projects  with  terminal  patients  under  professional  supervision. 

12  RELIGION  AND  THE  SPIRIT  OF  SCIENCE 

A  comparison  of  the  approaches  taken  by  religion  and  science  towards  such 
topics  as:  evolution,  psychic  phenomena,  primitive  creation  myths,  modern 
astronomy,  depth  psychology,  and  the  concept  of  "revelation."  The  role  of 
"faith,"  "fact,"  and  "intuition"  in  each  discipline  will  be  examined. 
Scientists,  engineers,  and  technicians  will  be  invited  to  share  their  views 
informally  with  the  class. 

13  OLD  TESTAMENT  FAITH  AND  HISTORY 

A  critical  examination  of  the  literature  within  its  historical  setting  and  in  the 
light  of  archeological  findings  to  show  the  faith  and  religious  life  of  the 
Hebrew-Jewish  community  in  the  biblical  period,  and  an  introduction  to  the 
history  of  interpretation  with  an  emphasis  on  contemporary  Old  Testament 
criticism  and  theology. 

14  NEW  TESTAMENT  FAITH  AND  HISTORY 

A  critical  examination  of  the  literature  within  its  historical  setting  to  show  the 
faith  and  religious  life  of  the  Christian  community  in  the  biblical  period,  and 
an  introduction  to  the  history  of  interpretation  with  an  emphasis  on 
contemporary  New  Testament  criticism  and  theology. 

22  PROTESTANTISM  IN  THE  MODERN  WORLD 

An  examination  of  changing  Protestant  thought  and  life  from  Luther  to  the 
present,  against  the  backdrop  of  a  culture  itself  rapidly  changing  from  the 
Seventeenth  century  scientific  revolution  to  Marxism,  Darwinism,  and  depth 
psychology.  Special  attention  will  be  paid  to  the  constant  interaction  between 
Protestantism  and  the  world  in  which  it  finds  itself. 

23  AFRICAN  RELIGIONS 

An  examination  of  the  integrated  life  of  the  Black  man  in  Africa  before  it  was 
altered  by  Western  imperialism.  We  will  emphasize  the  "religious"  side  of 
the  African's  life,  examining  the  way  in  which  it  is  interwoven  with  his  daily 
activities,  from  before  his  birth  to  after  his  death.  Some  attention  will  be  given 
to  Western  influences  on  this  traditional  lifestyle. 

24  JUDAISM  AND  ISLAM 

An  examination  of  the  rise,  growth,  and  expansion  of  Judaism  and  Islam, 
with  special  attention  given  to  the  theological  contents  of  the  literatures  of 
these  religions  as  far  as  they  are  normative  in  matters  of  faith,  practice,  and 
organization.  Also  a  review  of  their  contributions  to  the  spiritual  heritage  of 
mankind. 

Ill 


25     ORIENTAL  RELIGION 

A  phenomenological  study  of  the  basic  content  of  Hinduism,  Buddhism,  and 
Chinese  Taoism  with  special  attention  to  social  and  political  relations, 
mythical  and  aesthetic  forms,  and  the  East-West  dialogue. 

28     HISTORY  AND  CULTURE  OF  THE  ANCIENT  NEAR  EAST 

A  study  of  the  history  and  culture  of  Mesopotamia,  Anatolia,  Syria-Palestine, 
and  Egypt,  from  the  rise  of  the  Sumerian  culture  to  Alexander  the  Great. 
Careful  attention  will  be  given  to  the  religious  views  prevalent  in  the  Ancient 
Near  East  as  far  as  these  views  interacted  with  the  culture  and  faith  of  Biblical 


30  PSYCHOLOGY  OF  RELIGION 

A  study  into  the  broad  insights  of  psychology  in  relation  to  the  phenomena 
of  religion  and  religious  behavior.  The  course  concentrates  on  religious 
experience  or  manifestations  rather  than  concepts.  Tenative  solutions  will  be 
sought  to  questions  such  as:  What  does  it  feel  like  to  be  religious  or  to  have 
a  religious  experience?  What  is  the  religious  function  in  human  develop- 
ment? How  does  one  think  psychologically  about  theological  problems? 

31  CHRISTIAN  SOCIAL  ETHICS 

A  study  of  Christian  ethics  as  a  normative  perspective  for  contemporary 
moral  problems  with  emphasis  upon  the  interaction  of  law  and  religion, 
decision-making  in  the  field  of  biomedical  practice,  and  the  reconstruction 
of  society  in  a  planetary  civilization. 

32  CONTEMPORARY  PROBLEMS  IN  CHRISTIAN  SOCIAL  ETHICS 

An  examination  of  the  approach  of  religion  and  other  disciplines  to  an  issue 
of  current  concern;  current  topics  include  the  theological  significance  of  law, 
the  ethics  of  love,  and  the  holocaust.  The  course  may  be  repeated  for  credit. 

33  ROMAN  CATHOLIC  THOUGHT 

The  development  of  Thomism,  Neo-Thomism,  and  Transcendental  Thom- 
ism;  limited  attention  given  to  pastoral  and  ecclesiological  issues  in  the  post- 
conciliar  era  after  Vatican  II. 

37     BIBLICAL  TOPICS 

An  in-depth  study  of  Biblical  topics  related  both  to  the  Old  Testament  and 
the  New  Testament.  Topics  include  prophecy,  wisdom,  literature,  the  Dead 
Sea  Scrolls,  the  teachings  of  Jesus,  Pauline  theology,  Judaism  and  Christian 
origips,  redaction  criticism — the  way  the  Synoptic  Gospels  and  John  give 
final  form  to  their  message.  Course  will  vary  from  year  to  year  and  may  be  taken 
for  credit  a  second  time  if  the  topic  is  different  from  one  previously  studied. 

41     CONTEMPORARY  RELIGIOUS  ISSUES 

A  study  of  the  theological  significance  of  some  contemporary  intellectual 
developments  in  western  culture.  The  content  of  this  course  will  vary  from 
year  to  year.  Subjects  studied  in  recent  years  include  the  following:  the 

112 


theological  significance  of  Freud,  Marx,  and  Nietzsche;  Christianity  and 
existentialism;  theology  and  depth  psychology;  and  the  religious  dimension 
of  contemporary  literature. 

42  THE  NATURE  AND  MISSION  OF  THE  CHURCH 

A  study  of  the  nature  of  the  Church  as  "The  People  of  God"  with  reference 
to  the  Biblical,  Protestant,  Orthodox  and  Roman  Catholic  traditions. 

43  THE  EDUCATIONAL  MINISTRY  OF  THE  CHURCH 

A  study  of  religious  education  as  a  function  of  the  church  with  special 
attention  given  to  the  nature  and  objectives  of  Christian  education,  methods 
of  teaching  religion,  and  the  relations  between  faith  and  learning. 

46     BIBLE,  ARCHEOLOGY,  AND  FAITH 

A  study  of  the  role  of  archeology  in  reconstructing  the  world  in  which  the 
Biblical  literature  originated,  with  special  attention  given  to  archeological 
results  that  throw  light  on  the  clarification  of  the  Biblical  text.  Also  an 
introduction  to  basic  archeological  method,  and  a  study  in  depth  of  several 
representative  excavations  along  with  the  artifacts  and  material  culture 
recovered  from  different  historical  peiods. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  religion  usually  work  in  local  churches  under  the  supervision  of 
the  pastor  and  a  member  of  the  faculty. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Current  study  areas  are  in  the  biblical  languages,  New  Testament  theology, 
comparative  religions,  and  the  ethics  of  technology. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 

A  recent  project  was  on  the  Theology  of  Hope  with  reference  to  the  thought 
of  Ernst  Bloch  and  Alfred  North  Whitehead. 


SOCIOLOGY— ANTHROPOLOGY 

Professor:  McCrary 

Associate  Professor:  Wilk 

Assistant  Professor:  Jo  (Chairman),  Strauser  -   , 

Part-time  Instructor:  Slotter 

A  major  consists  of  Sociology- Anthropology  10,  14,  16,  44,  47  and  three  other 
courses  within  the  department  with  the  exception  of  15,  23.  Religion  46  may  also 
be  counted  toward  the  major.  Sociology- Anthropology  majors  are  encouraged  to 
participate  in  the  internship  program. 

10     INTRODUCTION  TO  SOCIOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  problems,  concepts,  and  methods  in  sociology  today, 

113 


including  analysis  of  stratification,  organization  of  groups  and  institutions, 
social  movements,  and  deviants  in  social  structure. 

14  INTRODUCTION  TO  ANTHROPOLOGY 

An  introduction  to  the  subfields  of  anthropology;  its  subject  matter, 
methodology,  and  goals.  Examination  of  biological  and  cultural  evolution, 
the  fossil  evidence  for  human  evolution  and  questions  raised  in  relation  to 
human  evolution.  Other  topics  include  race,  human  nature,  primate 
behavior,  and  prehistoric  cultural  development. 

15  INTRODUCTION  TO  AMERICAN  CRIMINAL  JUSTICE  SYSTEM 

An  introduction  to  the  role  of  law  enforcement,  courts,  and  corrections  in  the 
administration  of  justice;  the  historical  development  of  police,  courts  and 
corrections;  jurisdiction  and  procedures  of  courts;  an  introduction  to  the 
studies,  literature,  and  research  in  criminal  justice;  careers  in  criminal  justice. 

16  CULTURAL  ANTHROPOLOGY 

An  examination  of  cultural  and  social  anthropology  designed  to  familiarize 
the  student  with  the  analytical  approaches  to  the  diverse  cultures  of  the 
world.  The  relevancy  of  cultural  anthropology  for  an  understanding  of  the 
human  condition  will  be  stressed.  Topics  to  be  covered  include:  the  nature 
of  primitive  societies  in  contrast  to  civilizations,  the  concept  of  culture  and 
cultural  relativism,  the  individual  and  culture,  the  social  patterning  of 
behavior  and  social  control,  an  anthropological  perspective  on  the  culture  of 
the  United  States. 

20  MARRIAGE  AND  THE  FAMILY 

The  history,  structure,  and  functions  of  modern  American  family  life, 
emphasizing  dating,  courtship,  factors  in  marital  adjustment,  and  the 
changing  status  of  family  members.  Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  10  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

21  JUVENILE  DELINQUENCY 

A  multidisciplinary  approach  to  the  study  of  the  constellation  of  factors  that 
relate  to  juvenile  delinquency  causation,  handling  the  juvenile  delinquent  in 
the  criminal  justice  system,  treatment  strategies,  prevention  and  community 
responsibility.  Prerequisite:  Sociology -Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

22  PEOPLES  AND  CULTURES  OF  MEXICO 

Examination  of  the  diverse  cultures  of  Mesoamerica  from  preconquest 
indigenous  peoples  to  modern  Mexican  state,  including  the  rise  and  fall  of 
Aztec  and  Maya  civilization,  transformation  from  Primitive  agriculturalist  to 
peasant,  concepts  of  folk  society  and  culture  of  poverty;  an  analysis  of 
contemporary  problems  of  rural  Mexico  and  the  role  of  peasants  in  modern 
revolutionary  movements.  Offered  at  least  once  every  three  years. 

23  INTRODUCTION  TO  LAW  ENFORCEMENT 

Principles,  theories  and  doctrines  of  the  law  of  crimes,  elements  in  crime, 
analysis  of  criminal  investigation,  important  case  law.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  15  or  consent  of  instructor. 

114 


24     RURAL  AND  URBAN  COMMUNITIES 

The  concept  of  community  is  treated  as  it  operates  and  affects  individual  and 
group  behavior  in  rural,  suburban,  and  urban  settings.  Emphasis  is  placed 
upon  characteristic  institutions  and  problems  of  modern  city  life.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

26  SOCIAL  MOVEMENTS 

An  analysis  of  the  dynamics,  structure,  and  reaction  to  social  movements 
with  focus  on  contemporary  social  movements.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

27  SOCIALIZATION  THROUGH  THE  LIFE  SPAN 

Examination  of  the  relationship  between  the  individual  and  society  in  the 
development  of  behavior  potentials  of  groups  and  cultures.  The  course  will 
study  the  continual  process  of  learning  how  to  be  "human"  which  occurs 
throughout  the  life  span.  A  cross  cultural  approach  is  utilized  to  examine  the 
process  of  acquisition  of  skills,  motives,  and  attitudes  necessary  for  role 
performance  in  childhood,  adolescence,  with  an  emphasis  on  young 
adulthood,  adulthood,  middle  age,  and  old  age.  Life  span  developmental 
theory  will  be  used  in  conjunction  with  socialization  theory  and  role  theory. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

28  AGING  AND  SOCIETY 

Analysis  of  cross  cultural  characteristics  of  the  aged  as  individuals  and  as 
members  of  groups.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  variables:  health,  housing, 
socio-economic  status,  personal  adjustment,  retirement  and  social  partici- 
pation. Sociological,  social  psychological  and  anthropological  frames  of 
reference  utilized  in  analysis  and  description  of  aging  and  its  relationship  to 
society,  culture,  and  personality. 

29  TWENTIETH  CENTURY  CHINESE  SOCIETY 

An  analysis  of  the  interaction  between  the  individual  and  society  undergoing 
rapid  social  change  in  the  Chinese  cultural  context.  Topics  include  Confucian 
examination  system  and  social  mobility,  the  traditional  Chinese  village  and 
family,  origins  of  Chinese  Marxism  and  how  it  has  been  implemented  in 
social  institutions  of  The  People's  Republic  of  China.  Alternate  years. 

30  CRIMINOLOGY 

Analysis  of  the  sociology  of  law,  conditions  under  which  criminal  laws 
develop,  etiology  of  crime,  epidemiology  of  crime  including  explanation  of 
statistical  distribution  of  criminal  behavior  in  terms  of  time,  space,  and  social 
location.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

31  SOCIOLOGY  OF  WOMEN 

A  sociological  examination  of  the  role  of  women  in  American  society  through 
an  analysis  of  the  social  institutions  which  affect  their  development.  Role 
analysis  theory  will  be  applied  to  the  past,  present  and  future  experience  of 
women  as  it  relates  to  the  role  options  of  the  society  as  a  whole.  Students 
will  do  an  original  research  project  on  the  role  of  women  as  part  of  the 

115 


requirements  for  the  course.  Prerequisite:  Sociology -Anthropology  10.  Alternate 
years. 

32  INSTITUTIONS 

Introduces  the  student  to  the  sociological  concept  of  social  institution,  the 
types  of  social  institutions  to  be  found  in  all  societies,  and  the  interrela- 
tionships between  the  social  institutions  within  a  society.  The  course  is 
divided  into  two  basic  parts:  1.  That  aspect  which  deals  with  the  systematic 
organization  of  society  in  general,  and  2.  The  concentration  on  a  particular 
social  institution:  economic,  political,  educational,  or  social  welfare.  Prere- 
quisite: Sociology- Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

33  SOCIOLOGY  OF  RELIGION 

An  examination  of  the  major  theories  of  the  relationship  of  religion  to  society, 
and  a  survey  of  sociological  studies  of  religious  behavior.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology- Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

34  RACIAL  AND  CULTURAL  MINORITIES 

Study  of  racial,  cultural  and  national  groups  within  the  framework  of 
American  cultural  values.  Culture  conflict  and  its  resolution  will  be  examined 
for  selected  minority  groups. 

35  CULTURE  AND  PERSONALITY 

Introduction  to  psychological  anthropology,  its  theories  and  methodologies. 
Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  relationship  between  individual  and  culture, 
national  character,  cognition  and  culture,  culture  and  mental  disorders,  and 
cross  cultural  considerations  of  the  concept  of  self.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- 
Anthropology  16  or  consent  of  instructor.  Offered  at  least  once  every  three  years. 

36  THE  ANTHROPOLOGY  OF  PRIMITIVE  RELIGIONS 

The  course  will  familiarize  the  student  with  the  wealth  of  anthropological 
data  on  the  religions  and  world  views  developed  by  primitive  peoples.  The 
functions  of  primitive  religion  in  regard  to  the  individual,  society  and  various 
cultural  institutions  will  be  examined.  Subjects  to  be  surveyed  include  myth, 
witchcraft,  vision  quests,  spirit  possession,  the  cultural  use  of  dreams  and 
revitalization  movements.  Particular  emphasis  will  be  given  to  shamanism, 
transcultural  religious  experience,  and  the  creation  of  cultural  realities 
through  religions.  Both  a  social  scientific  and  existentialist  perspective  will 
be  employed.  Prerequisite:  Sociology -Anthropology  16  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Alternate  years. 

37  THE  ANTHROPOLOGY  OF  AMERICAN  INDIANS 

An  ethnographic  survey  of  native  North  American  Indian  and  Eskimo 
cultures,  such  as  the  Iroquois,  Plains  Indians,  Pueblos,  Kwakiutl,  and 
Netsilik.  Changes  in  native  lifeways  due  to  European  contacts  and  United 
States  expansion  will  be  considered.  Recent  cultural  developments  among 
American  Indians  will  be  placed  in  an  anthropological  perspective.  Offered 
at  least  once  every  three  years. 

116 


38  LEGAL  AND  POLITICAL  ANTHROPOLOGY 

The  course  is  designed  to  familiarize  the  student  with  the  techniques  of 
conflict  resolution  and  the  utilization  of  public  power  in  primitive  society  as 
well  as  the  various  theories  of  primitive  law  and  government.  The  rise  of  the 
state  and  an  anthropological  perspective  on  modern  law  and  government 
will  be  included.  The  concepts  of  self-regulation  and  social  control,  legit- 
imacy, coercion,  and  exploitation  will  be  the  organizing  focus.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology  16  or  consent  of  instructor.  Alternate  years. 

39  THE  AMERICAN  PRISON  SYSTEM 

Nature  and  history  of  punishment,  evolution  of  the  prison  and  prison 
methods  with  emphasis  on  prison  community,  prison  architecture,  institu- 
tional programs,  inmate  rights  and  sentences.  Review  of  punishment  vs. 
treatment,  detention  facilities,  jails,  reformatories,  prison  organization  and 
administration,  custody  and  discipline.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology 
15. 

41  SOCIAL  STRATIFICATION 

An  analysis  of  the  nature  of  stratification  systems,  with  special  reference  to 
American  social  structure.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology  10  or  consent  of 
instructor.  Alternate  years. 

42  INTRODUCTION  TO  SOCIAL  WORK 

Consideration  of  basic  social  work  concepts,  principles  and  techniques  of 
interviewing,  individual  case  work,  group  work,  and  community  organiza- 
tion, development  of  skills  and  techniques  of  social  work  applied  to  the 
correctional  setting.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. 

43  ALTERNATIVE  LIFE  STYLES 

Analysis  of  new  life  styles  in  American  Society:  life  styles  of  minority  groups 
and  others  who  are  considered  by  society  to  be  nonconforming.  Examination 
of  the  challenges  to  conformity  and  ramifications  of  nonconformity  in 
American  Society.  Will  include  an  inquiry  into  behavior  which  has  historical- 
ly been  labeled  deviant  covering  such  topics  as:  mental  illness,  addiction  to 
alcohol  and  narcotics,  homosexuality,  and  prostitution.  Prerequisite: 
Sociology- Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

44  SOCIAL  THEORY 

The  history  of  the  development  of  sociological  thought  from  its  earliest 
philosophical  beginnings  is  treated  through  discussions  and  reports.  Em- 
phasis is  placed  upon  sociological  thought  since  the  time  of  Comte. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology-Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

45  ANTHROPOLOGICAL  THEORY 

The  history  of  the  development  of  anthropological  thought  from  the 
eighteenth  century  to  the  present.  Emphasis  is  placed  upon  anthropological 
thought  since  1850.  Topics  include  evolutionism,  historical-particularism, 
cultural  idealism,   cultural  materialism,    functionalism,   structuralism  and 

117 


ethnoscience.  Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology  16  or  consent  of  instructor. 
Offered  at  least  once  every  three  years. 

47    RESEARCH  METHODS  IN  SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Study  of  the  research  process  in  sociology  and  anthropology,  including 
formation  of  research  design  (theory,  methodology,  and  techniques),  and 
practical  application  in  the  investigation  of  a  research  problem.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  13  and  Sociology- Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

48-49     PRACTICUM  IN  SOCIOLOGY 

Introduces  the  student  to  a  practical  work  experience  involving  community 
agencies  in  order  to  effect  a  synthesis  of  the  student's  academic  course  work 
and  its  practical  applications  in  a  community  agency.  Specifics  of  the  course 
to  be  worked  out  in  conjunction  with  department,  student  and  agency. 
Prerequisite:  Sociology- Anthropology  10  or  consent  of  instructor. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  Sociology- Anthropology  typically  work  off-campus  with  social 
service  agencies  under  the  supervision  of  administrators.  However,  other 
internship  experiences  such  as  with  the  Lycoming  County  Historical 
Museum  are  available. 

Interns  in  criminal  justice  work  off-campus  in  criminal  justice  agencies 
such  as  penal  institutions  and  probation  and  parole  departments  under  the 
supervision  of  administrative  personnel. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Typical  examples  of  recent  studies  in  Sociology- Anthropology  are  American 
Indian  world  views  and  religions  and  program  evaluation  in  the  human 
services  area.  Recent  studies  in  the  criminal  justice  area  are  the  status  of 
women  in  the  criminal  justice  system  and  model  correctional  legislation  and 
standards. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 


THEATRE 

Professor:  Falk  (Chairman) 
Assistant  Professor:  Dartt 

The  major  consists  of  eight  courses,  except  Theatre  1,  wth  a  concentration  in 
Acting,  Directing,  or  Design.  The  Fine  Arts  requirement  may  be  satisfied  by 
selecting  any  two  courses,  except  Theatre  1.  In  addition  to  the  departmental 
requirements,  majors  are  urged  to  include  courses  in  Art,  Music,  Psychology,  and 
English. 

1     FUNDAMENTALS  OF  ORAL  COMMUNICATION 

The  dynamics  of  oral  communication.  The  development  of  elementary 
principles  of  simple  oral  communication  through  lectures,  prepared  assign- 
ments in  speaking,  and  informal  class  exercises.  Utilizes  video  tape  se- 
quences for  "instant  feedback"  to  students. 

118 


10  INTRODUCTION  TO  THEATRE 

Designed  as  a  comprehensive  introduction  to  the  aesthetics  of  theatre.  From 
the  spectator's  point  of  view,  the  nature  of  theatre  will  be  explored  including 
dramatic  literature  and  the  integrated  functioning  of  acting,  directing,  and 
all  production  aspects. 

11  INTRODUCTION  TO  FILM 

A  basic  course  in  understanding  the  film  medium.  The  class  will  investigate 
film  technique  through  lectures  and  by  viewing  regular  weekly  films  chosen 
from  classic,  contemporary,  and  experimental  short  films. 

12  HISTORY  OF  THEATRE  I 

A  detailed  study  of  the  development  of  theatre  from  the  Greeks  to  the 
Restoration.  Alternate  years. 

13  HISTORY  OF  THEATRE  II 

The  history  of  the  theatre  from  1660.  Alternate  years. 

14  ORAL  INTERPRETATION  OF  LITERATURE 

The  fundamental  principles  and  methods  of  oral  reading  and  the  interpreta- 
tion of  literature  are  introduced.  Materials  will  be  chosen  from  poetry,  prose, 
the  novel,  and  drama.  Alternate  years. 

15  PLAYWRITING  AND  DRAMATIC  CRITICISM 

An  investigation  of  the  techniques  of  playwriting  with  an  emphasis  on 
creative  writing,  culminating  in  a  written  one-act  play,  plus  an  historical 
survey  of  dramatic  criticism  from  Aristotle  to  the  present,  with  emphasis 
upon  developing  the  student's  ability  to  write  reviews  and  criticism  of 
theatrical  productions  and  films.  Alternate  years. 

18     PLAY  PRODUCTION  FOR  COMMUNITY  AND  SECONDARY  SCHOOLS 

Stagecraft  and  the  various  other  aspects  of  play  production  are  introduced. 
Through  material  presented  in  the  course  and  laboratory  work  on  the  Arena 
Theatre  stage,  the  student  will  acquire  experience  to  produce  theatrical 
scenery  for  community  and  secondary  school  theatre. 

24     INTRODUCTION  TO  ACTING 

An  introductory  study  of  the  actor's  preparation,  with  emphasis  on 
developing  the  actor's  creative  imagination  through  improvisations  and 
scene  study. 

26     INTRODUCTION  TO  DIRECTING 

An  introductory  study  of  the  function  of  the  director  in  preparation, 
rehearsal,  and  performance.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  developing  the  student's 
ability  to  analyze  scripts  and  on  the  development  of  the  student's  imagina- 
tion. 

119 


28  INTRODUCTION  TO  SCENE  DESIGN  AND  STAGECRAFT 

An  introduction  to  the  theatre  with  an  emphasis  on  stagecraft.  The 
productions  each  semester  serve  as  the  laboratory  to  provide  the  practical 
experience  necessary  to  understand  the  material  presented  in  the  classroom. 

29  MARIONETTE  PRODUCTION 

Introduces  the  construction,  costuming,  and  performing  of  a  play  through 
the  medium  of  string  puppets.  Alternate  years. 

31     ADVANCED  TECHNIQUES  OF  PLAY  PRODUCTION 

A  detailed  consideration  of  the  interrelated  problems  and  techniques  of  play 
analysis,  production  styles,  and  design.  Offered  summer  only. 

34  INTERMEDIATE  STUDIO:  ACTING 

Instruction  and  practice  in  character  analysis  and  projection,  with  emphasis 
on  vocal  and  body  techniques. 

35  THEORIES  OF  THE  MODERN  THEATRE 

An  advanced  course  exploring  the  philosophical  roots  of  the  modern  theatre 
from  the  birth  of  realism  to  the  present,  and  the  influences  on  modern  theatre 
practice.  Selected  readings  from  Nietzsche,  Marx,  Jung,  Freud,  Whitehead, 
Kierkegaard,  Sartre,  Camus,  as  well  as  Antoine,  Copeau,  Stanislavski, 
Shaw,  Meyerhold,  Artaud,  Brecht,  Brook,  Grotowski.  Alternate  years. 

36  INTERMEDIATE  STUDIO:  DIRECTING 

Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  student's  ability  to  function  in  preparation  and 
rehearsal.  Practical  experience  involves  the  directing  of  two  one-act  plays 
from  the  contemporary  theatre. 

38     INTERMEDIATE  STUDIO:  SCENE  AND  LIGHTING  DESIGN 

The  theory  of  stage  and  lighting  design  with  emphasis  on  their  practical 
application  to  the  theatre. 

40     MASTERS  OF  WORLD  DRAMA 

An  intensive  and  detailed  analysis  of  the  plays,  and  related  works,  including 
criticism  of  great  authors,  that  have  shaped  world  theatre.  Authors  to  be 
selected  on  the  basis  of  interest  of  students  and  faculty.  At  times,  more  than 
one  author  will  be  treated  in  a  term.  Ibsen,  Brecht,  Moliere,  Williams,  Albee. 
Alternate  years.  May  be  accepted  toward  English  major  with  consent  of  English 
Department. 

42  ADVANCED  STUDIO:  COSTUME  DESIGN 

The  theory  of  costuming  for  the  stage,  elements  of  design,  planning, 
production,  and  construction  of  costumes  for  the  theatre.  Students  will 
participate  in  the  design  of  a  production. 

43  ADVANCED  STUDIO:  PROPERTIES  DESIGN 

The  theory  of  properties  design  for  the  stage  including  the  production  of 

120 


specific  properties  for  staging  use.  Elements  of  design,  fabrication,  and  the 
construction  of  properties  employing  a  variety  of  materials  and  the  applica- 
tion of  new  theatrical  technology. 

44     ADVANCED  STUDIO:  ACTING 

Preparation  of  monologues  and  two-character  scenes,  contemporary  and 
classical.  The  student  will  appear  in  major  campus  productions. 

46     ADVANCED  STUDIO:  DIRECTING 

Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  student's  ability  to  produce  a  major  three- 
act  play  from  the  script  to  the  stage  for  public  performance. 

48     ADVANCED  STUDIO:  DESIGN 

Independent  work  in  conceptual  and  practical  design.  The  student  will 
design  one  full  production  as  his  major  project. 

70-79     INTERNSHIP  (See  Index) 

Interns  in  theatre  work  off-campus  in  such  theatres  as  the  Guthrie  Theatre, 
Minneapolis,  and  the  New  Jersey  Shakespeare  Festival. 

80-89     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  (See  Index) 

Some  recent  independent  studies  have  been  the  roles  of  women  as  characters 
in  drama,  scene  design  and  lighting  design  for  an  Arena  production. 

90-99     INDEPENDENT  STUDY  FOR  DEPARTMENTAL  HONORS  (See  Index) 
A  typical  study  could  be  the  writing  and  production  of  an  original  play. 


COOPERATIVE  PROGRAMS 

Lycoming  has  developed  several  cooperative  programs  in  order  to  provide 
students  with  opportunities  to  extend  their  knowledge,  abilities,  and  talents  in 
selected  areas  through  access  to  the  specialized  academic  programs  and  facilities 
of  other  colleges,  universities,  academies,  and  hospitals.  Although  thorough 
advisement  and  curricular  planning  are  provided  for  each  of  the  cooperative 
programs,  admission  to  Lycoming  and  registration  in  the  program  of  choice  does 
not  guarantee  students  admission  to  the  cooperating  institution.  The  prerogative 
of  admitting  students  to  the  cooperative  aspect  of  the  program  rests  with  the 
cooperating  institution.  Students  who  are  interested  in  a  cooperative  program 
should  contact  the  coordinator  during  the  first  week  of  the  first  semester  of  their 
enrollment  at  Lycoming  in  order  to  plan  their  course  programs  in  a  manner  that 
will  insure  completion  of  required  courses  according  to  the  schedule  stipulated 
for  the  program.  All  cooperative  programs  require  special  coordination  of  course 
scheduling  at  Lycoming. 

Drama — Lycoming's  affiliation  with  the  American  Academy  of  Dramatic 
Arts  provides  for  advanced  standing  status  at  the  Academy  for  a  Lycoming 
graduate  who  is  recommended  by  the  Lycoming  Theatre  faculty  and  admitted  to 
the  Academy.  An  Academy  graduate  who  is  recommended  by  the  faculty  of  the 
Academy  and  who  has  successfully  completed  two  years  of  study  at  an  accredited 
college  or  university  may  earn  a  bachelor  of  arts  degree  at  Lycoming  by  working 
two  summers  with  The  Arena  Theatre  and  completing  two  consecutive  semesters 
of  course  work  during  the  regular  academic  year.  Summer  course  work  may  be 
required  in  individual  cases. 

Engineering — Combining  the  advantages  of  a  liberal  arts  education  and  the 
technical  training  of  an  engineering  curriculum,  this  program  is  offered  in 
conjunction  with  Bucknell  University  and  The  Pennsylvania  State  University. 
Students  complete  three  years  of  study  at  Lycoming  and  two  years  at  the 
cooperating  university.  Upon  satisfactory  completion  of  the  first  year  of  engineer- 
ing studies,  Lycoming  awards  the  bachelor  of  arts  degree.  When  students 
successfully  complete  the  second  year  of  engineering  studies,  the  cooperating 
university  awards  the  bachelor  of  science  degree  in  engineering. 

At  Lycoming,  students  complete  the  distribution  program  and  courses  in 
physics,  mathematics,  and  chemistry.  Engineering  specialities  offered  at  Bucknell 
University  include  chemical,  civil,  electrical,  and  mechanical,  whereas  The 
Pennsylvania  State  University  offers  aeronautical,  civil,  electrical,  industrial, 
mechanical  and  sanitary  engineering. 

Forestry  or  Environmental  Studies — Lycoming  College  offers  a  cooperative 
program  with  Duke  University  in  environmental  management  and  forestry. 
Qualified  students  can  earn  the  bachelor's  and  master's  degrees  in  five  years, 
spending  three  years  at  Lycoming  and  two  years  at  Duke.  All  Lycoming 
distribution  and  major  requirements  must  be  completed  by  the  end  of  the  junior 
year.  At  the  end  of  the  first  year  at  Duke,  the  B.A.  degree  will  be  awarded  by 
Lycoming.  Duke  will  award  the  professional  degree  of  Master  of  Forestry  or 
Master  of  Environmental  Management  to  qualified  candidates  at  the  end  of  the 
second  year. 

The  major  program  emphases  at  Duke  are  forest  resource  production, 
resource  science,  and  resource  policy  and  economics;  however,  the  program  is 
flexible  enough  to  accommodate  a  variety  of  individual  designs.  An  under- 
graduate major  in  one  of  the  natural  sciences,  social  sciences,  or  business  may 
provide  good  preparation  for  the  programs  at  Duke,  but  a  student  with  any 
undergraduate  concentration  will  be  considered  for  admission.  All  students  need 
at  least  two  courses  each  in  biology,  mathematics,  and  economics. 

122 


Students  begin  the  program  at  Duke  in  August  following  their  junior  year 
at  Lycoming  with  a  one-month  session  of  field  work  in  natural  resource 
measurements,  and  must  complete  a  total  of  60  units  which  generally  takes  four 
semesters. 

Some  students  prefer  to  complete  the  bachelor's  degree  before  undertaking 
graduate  study  at  Duke.  The  master's  degree  requirements  for  these  students  are 
the  same  as  those  for  students  entering  after  the  junior  year,  but  the  60-unit 
requirement  may  be  reduced  for  completed  relevant  undergraduate  work  of 
satisfactory  quality.  All  credit  reductions  are  determined  individually  and 
consider  the  student's  educational  background  and  objectives. 

Medical  Technology — Students  desiring  a  career  in  medical  technology  may 
either  complete  a  bachelor  of  arts  program  followed  by  a  clinical  internship  at  any 
American  Medical  Association  accredited  hospital  or  they  may  complete  the 
cooperative  program.  Students  electing  the  cooperative  program  normally  study 
for  three  years  at  Lycoming,  during  which  time  they  complete  24  unit  courses, 
including  the  college  distribution  requirements,  a  major,  and  requirements  of  the 
National  Accrediting  Agency  for  Clinical  Laboratory  Sciences  (NAACLS).  The 
current  requirements  of  the  NAACLS  are  as  follows:  four  courses  in  chemistry 
(one  of  which  must  be  either  organic  or  biochemistry);  four  courses  in  biology 
(including  courses  in  microbiology  and  immunology);  and  one  course  in 
mathematics. 

Students  in  the  cooperative  program  usually  major  in  biology,  following  a 
modified  major  of  six  unit  courses  that  exempts  them  from  Ecology  (Biology  24) 
and  Plant  Sciences  (Biology  25).  Students  must  take  either  Animal  Physiology 
(Biology  23)  or  Cell  Physiology  (Biology  35).  The  cooperative  program  requires 
successful  completion  of  a  one-year  internship  at  an  American  Medical  Associa- 
tion accredited  hospital.  Lycoming  is  affiliated  with  the  following  accredited 
hospitals:  Williamsport,  Divine  Providence,  Robert  Packer,  Lancaster,  and 
Abington.  Students  in  the  cooperative  program  receive  credit  at  Lycoming  for 
each  of  eight  unit  courses  in  biology  and  chemistry  successfully  completed  during 
the  clinical  internship.  Successful  completion  of  the  Registry  Examination  is  not 
considered  a  graduation  requirement  at  Lycoming  College. 

Students  entering  a  clinical  internship  for  one  year  following  graduation 
from  Lycoming  must  complete  all  of  the  requirements  of  the  cooperative 
program,  but  are  not  eligible  for  the  biology  major  exemptions  indicated  above. 
Upon  graduation,  such  students  may  apply  for  admission  to  a  clinical  program 
at  any  hospital. 

Podiatry — Students  interested  in  podiatry  may  either  seek  admission  to  a 
college  of  podiatric  medicine  upon  completion  of  the  bachelor  of  arts  degree  or 
through  the  Accelerated  Podiatric  Medical  Education  Curriculum  Program 
(APMEC).  The  latter  program  provides  an  opportunity  for  students  to  qualify  for 
admission  to  the  Pennsylvania  College  of  Podiatric  Medicine  (PCPM)  after  three 
years  of  study  at  Lycoming.  At  Lycoming,  students  in  the  APMEC  program  must 
successfully  complete  24  unit  courses,  including  the  distribution  program  and  a 
basic  foundation  in  biology,  chemistry,  physics,  and  mathematics.  During  the 
first  year  of  study  at  PCPM,  students  must  successfully  complete  the  equivalent 
of  48  semester  hours  of  basic  science  courses  in  addition  to  a  program  in 
introduction  to  podiatry.  Successful  completion  of  the  first  year  of  professional 
training  will  contribute  toward  the  fulfillment  of  the  course  requirements  for  the 
bachelor  of  arts  degree  at  Lycoming. 

Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps  Program  (R.O.T.C.) — The  program  pro- 
vides a  voluntary  opportunity  for  Lycoming  students  to  enroll  on  a  non-credit 
basis  in  the  Bucknell  University  R.O.T.C.  unit.  Lycoming  notes  enrollment  in  and 

123 


successful  completion  of  the  program  on  student  transcripts.  Military  Science  is 
a  four-year  program  divided  into  a  basic  course  given  during  the  freshman  and 
sophomore  years  and  an  advanced  course  given  during  the  junior  and  senior 
years.  Students  who  have  not  completed  the  basic  course  may  qualify  for  the 
advanced  course  by  completing  summer  camp  between  the  sophomore  and 
junior  years.  Students  enrolled  in  the  advanced  course  receive  a  monthly  stipend 
of  $100  for  up  to  ten  months  a  year.  Students  successfully  completing  the 
advanced  course  and  advanced  summer  camp  between  the  junior  and  senior 
years  will  qualify  for  a  commission  as  a  Second  Lieutenant  in  the  United  States 
Army  upon  graduation  and  will  incur  a  service  obligation  in  the  active  Army  or 
Army  Reserves.  The  only  expense  to  the  student  for  this  program  is  the  deposit 
referred  to  in  Chapter  III  under  "Entry  Fee  and  Deposits." 

Student  Enrichment  Semester — This  voluntary  program  is  designed  to 
expand  academic  and  life  opportunities  for  students  and  to  provide  for  partici- 
pation in  specialized  programs  and  courses  not  available  at  Lycoming.  Other 
members  of  the  program  are  Bucknell  and  Susquehanna  Universities,  the 
Williamsport  Area  Community  College,  and  Bloomsburg,  Lock  Haven,  and 
Mansfield  State  Colleges.  Students  other  than  freshmen  enroll  full  time  for  credit, 
normally  for  one  semester  or  term,  at  any  participating  institution  in  selected 
courses.  Students  in  the  program  remain  fully  enrolled  as  degree  candidates  at 
their  home  institutions.  A  special  opportunity  within  the  program  is  the  cross- 
registration  arrangement  with  the  Williamsport  Area  Community  College  where- 
by students  may  enroll  for  less  than  a  full-time  course  load  while  remaining 
enrolled  in  courses  at  Lycoming. 

Washington,  United  Nations,  and  London  Semesters — With  the  consent  of 
the  Political  Science  Department,  selected  students  are  permitted  to  study  in 
Washington,  D.C.  at  The  American  University  for  one  full  semester  and  may 
choose  from  seven  different  programs:  Washington  Semester,  Urban  Semester, 
Foreign  Policy  Semester,  International  Development  Semester,  Economic  Policy 
Semester,  Science  and  Technology  Semester,  American  Studies  Semester. 

With  the  consent  of  either  the  Department  of  History  or  Political  Science, 
selected  students  may  enroll  at  Drew  University  in  Madison,  N.J.,  in  the  United 
Nations  Semester,  which  is  designed  to  provide  a  first-hand  acquaintance  with 
the  world  organization.  Students  with  special  interests  in  world  history, 
international  relations,  law,  and  politics  are  eligible  to  participate. 

The  London  Semester  programs  of  Drew  and  The  American  University 
emphasize  European  history,  politics  and  culture.  Interested  students  participate 
with  the  consent  of  either  the  History  or  Political  Science  Departments. 

Normally  the  above  special  semester  programs  are  open  only  to  juniors. 

Lycoming  College  cannot  assume  responsibility  for  the  health,  safety,  or  welfare  of  any 
student  engaged  in  or  en  route  to  or  from  any  off -campus  studies  or  activities  which  are 
not  under  the  exclusive  jurisdiction  of  this  institution. 


124 


CHAPTER  VII 
COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 


BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 

OFFICERS 

W.  Gibbs  McKenney,  LL.D Chairman 

Nathan  W.  Stuart,  J.D Vice  Chairman 

Paul  G.  Gilmore  Secretary 

William  L.  Baker Treasurer 

Fred  A.  Pennington,  LL.D Chairman  Emeritus 

HONORARY  TRUSTEES 

Bishop  Hermann  W.  Kaebnick,  D.D.,  L.H.D.,  LL.D Hershey 

Ralph  E.  Kelchner Jersey  Shore 

Arnold  A.  Phipps,  II  Williamsport 

Mrs.  Donald  G.  Remley  Williamsport 

George  L.  Stearns,  II Williamsport 

TRUSTEES 

Term  Expires  1980 
Elected 

1974        J.  Robert  Fahnestock Williamsport 

1974        Daniel  G.  Fultz Pittsford,  NY 

1974        Mrs.  Fred  S.  Gorman  York 

1965        James  G.  Law,  D.  Text.  Sci Bloomsburg 

1977        Robert  L.  Morris,  Ph.D Indiana 

(Alumni  Representative) 

1970  John  E.  Person,  Jr Williamsport 

1965        Hon.  Herman  T.  Schneebeli Williamsport 

1972        Donald  E.  Shearer,  M.D Montoursville 

1961         Nathan  W.  Stuart,  J.D Williamsport 

1971  Willis  W.  Willard,  III,  M.D Hershey 

1958         W.  Russell  Zacharias  Allentown 


Term  Expires  1981 
Elected 

1978  Howard  C.  Beach  Sarasota,  FL 

1969  Samuel  H.  Evert Bloomsburg 

1972  The  Rev.  Brian  A.  Fetterman  Harrisburg 

1978  Harold  D.  Hershberger,  Jr Williamsport 

1969  Kenneth  E.  Himes  Williamsport 

1978  John  C.  Lundy  Williamsport 

1978  Ms.  Onalee  R.  Sabin  Elmira,  NY 

(Alumni  Representative) 

1978  John  Y.  Schreyer Little  Falls,  NJ 

1978  M.  L.  Sharrah,  Ph.D New  Canaan,  CT 

1972  Harold  H.  Shreckengast,  Jr Jenkintown 

125 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

Term  Expires  1982 
Elected 

1979  David  Y.  Brouse Williamsport 

1951  Paul  G.  Gilmore  Williamsport 

1978  Mrs.  Robert  B.  Jones  Caledonia,  NY 

1973  Robert  G.  Little,  M.D Harrisburg 

1979  David  J.  Loomis,  Ph.D Troy 

(Alumni  Representative) 

1964        W.  Gibbs  McKenney,  LL.D Baltimore,  MD 

1973        G.  Jackson  Miller Altoona 

1958        Fred  A.  Pennington,  LL.D Mechanicsburg 

1979        The  Rev.  Walter  M.  Schell  Montoursville 

1961         The  Rev.  Wallace  F.  Stettler,  HH.D Kingston 


ADMINISTRATIVE  STAFF 

FREDERICK  E.  BLUMER  (1976)  President 

B.A.,  Millsaps  College;  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Emory  University 
SHIRLEY  VAN  MARTER  (1979) Dean  of  the  College 

B.A.,  Mundelein  College;  M. A.,  Northwestern  University 

M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago 
WILLIAM  L.  BAKER  (1965)  Treasurer 

B.S.,  Lycoming  College 
JACK  C.  BUCKLE  (1957)  Dean  of  Student  Services 

A.B.,  Juniata  College;  M.S.,  Syracuse  University 
GEORGE  P.  FLINT  (1977) Director  of  Institutional  Relations 

A.B.,  Bowdoin  College;  A.M.,  P.D.,  Columbia  University 
DALE  V.  BOWER  (1968)  Director  of  Alumni  Affairs 

B.S.,  Lycoming  College;  B.D.,  United  Theological  Seminary 

RUSSELL  A.  BLOODGOOD  (1969)  Manager  of  Food  Services 

CLARENCE  W.  BURCH  (1962) Director  of  Athletics 

B.S,  M.Ed.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
LOUISE  A.  CALIGIURI  (1978)  Assistant  Dean  of  Student  Services 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Duquesne  University 
ROBERT  L.  CURRY,  JR.  (1972)  Assistant  in  Athletics 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College 
DEBRA  A.  D'AGUILLO  (1976)  Associate  Dean  of  Student  Services 

B.A.,  SUNY  at  Binghamton;  M.S.,  SUNY  at  Albany; 

Ed.S.,  SUNY  at  Albany 
ROBERT  A.  DOYLE  (1978)  Director  of  Admissions 

B.A.,  Juniata  College 

ROBERT  L.  EDDINGER  (1967)  Director  of  Buildings  &  Grounds 

ROBERT  J.  GLUNK  (1965) Registrar  and  Assistant  to  the  Dean 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
THOMAS  J.  HENNINGER  (1966)  Director  of  Computer  Services 

B.S.,  Wake  Forest  College;  M.A.,  University  of  Kansas 
MARY  E.  HERRING  (1978)  Assistant  Director  of  Admissions 

B.A.,  Albright  College 
RICHARD  A.  HUGHES  (1970)  Chaplain  of  the  College 

B.A.,  Indiana  Central  College;  S.T.B.,  Ph.D.,  Boston  University 

126 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

HAROLD  H.  HUTSON  (1969)  President  Emeritus 

B.A.,  LL.D.,  Wofford  College;  B.D.,  Duke  University 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago;  L.H.D.,  Ohio  Wesleyan  University 
DOUGLAS  j.  KEIPER  (1970)  Assistant  Director  of  Admissions 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
LAWRENCE  W.  MAYES  (1979) Assistant  in  Athletics 

B.S.,  Lock  Haven  State  College;  M.S.,  SUNY  at  Albany 
ROBIN  J.  NEWMAN  (1979)  Assistant  Director  of  Admissions 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College 
WILLIAM  H.  RUPP  (1979)  Director  of  Public  Relations 

B.A.,  M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

DOROTHY  J.  STREETER  (1946)  Book  Store  Manager 

BETTY  JUNE  SWANGER  (1961)  Director  of  Accounting  Services 

CHARLES  E.  WEYANT  (1971)  Director  of  Library  Services 

B.A.,  The  American  University;  M.S.,  Simmons  College 
THOMAS  P.  WOZNIAK  (1979)  Assistant  Dean  of  Student  Services 

B.A.,  Merrimack  College;  M.Ed.,  Worcester  State  College 

MEDICAL  STAFF 

FREDERIC  C.  LECHNER,  M.D College  Physician 

B.S.,  Franklin  and  Marshall  College; 

M.D.,  Jefferson  Medical  College 
RICHARD  MAYS,  M.D Psychiatrist 

B.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University; 

M.D.,  Jefferson  Medical  College 
ROBERT  S.  YASUI,  M.D College  Surgeon 

M.D.,  Temple  University 
EMALINE  W.  DEIBERT,  R.N College  Nurse 

Williamsport  Hospital  School  of  Nursing 
EVELYN  L.  SEAMAN,  R.N College  Nurse 

Williamsport  Hospital  School  of  Nursing 

UNITED  CAMPUS  MINISTRY 

ROGER  ALLING,  JR.  (1978) Chaplain  to  Episcopal  Students 

B.A.,  Kenyon  College;  B.Ltt.,  Diploma  in  Theology,  Oxford  University 
PETER  S.  ELY  (1978) Chaplain  to  Baptist  Students 

B.S.,  Muhlenberg  College;  M.Div.,  Vanderbilt  University 
JAMES  W.  GRUBB  (1977) Chaplain  to  United  Methodist  Students 

A.B.,  Albright  College;  M.Div.,  United  Theological  Seminary 
DALE  E.  JOHNSON  (1978) Chaplain  to  Lutheran  Students 

B.A.,  Thiel  College;  M.Div.,  Lutheran  Theological  Seminary 
DAVID  L.  REED  (1977) Chaplain  to  United  Methodist  Students 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.Div.,  United  Theological  Seminary 
WILLIAM  J.  RUMSEY  (1978) Chaplain  to  Presbyterian  Students 

B.A.,  Maryville  College;  M.Div.,  Pittsburgh  Theological  Seminary 
DERWOOD  A.  STRUNK,  JR.  (1977)  ..  Chaplain  to  United  Methodist  Students 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.Div.,  Lancaster  Theological  Seminary 
JOHN  J.  TAMALIS  (1976) Chaplain  to  Roman  Catholic  Students 

B.S.,  University  of  Scran  ton 

127 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

FACULTY 

EMERITI 

MABEL  K.  BAUER Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 

B.S.,  Cornell  University;  M.S.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

DAVID  G.  BUSEY  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of 

Physical  Education 

B.S.,  M.S.,  University  of  Illinois 
LEROY  F.  DERR Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

A.B.,  Ursinus  College;  M.A.,  Bucknell  University 

Ed.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
ROBERT  H.  EWING  Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

A.B.,  College  of  Wooster;  M.  A.,  University  of  Michigan 

HH.D.,  Lycoming  College 
W.  ARTHUR  FAUS  Professor  Emeritus  of  Philosophy 

A.B.,  Dickinson  College;  S.T.B.,  Ph.D.,  Boston  University 
PHIL  G.  GILLETTE  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Spanish 

A.B.,  Ohio  University;  M.A.,  Columbia  University 
JOHN  P.  GRAHAM  Professor  Emeritus  of  English 

Ph.B.,  Dickinson  College;  M.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

HAROLD  W.  HAYDEN  Librarian  Emeritus 

and  Professor  Emeritus  of  Library  Services 

A.B.,  Nebraska  State  Teachers  College;  B.S.,  University  on  Illinois; 

M.A.  inl.S.,  University  of  Michigan 
GEORGE  W.  HOWE  Professor  Emeritus  of  Geology 

A.B.,  M.S.,  Syracuse  University;  Ph.D.,  Cornell  University 
M.  RAYMOND  JAMISON  Assistant  Professor  Emeritus  of  Physics 

B.S.,  Ursinus  College;  M.S.,  Bucknell  University 
WALTER  G.  McIVER  Professor  Emeritus  of  Music 

Mus.B.,  Westminster  Choir  College; 

A.B.,  Bucknell  University;  M.A.,  Neiv  York  University 
LORING  B.  PRIEST Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

LITT.B.,  Rutgers  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Harvard  University 

DONALD  G.  REMLEY  Assistant  Professor  Emeritus  of 

Mathematics  and  Physics 

A.B.,  Dickinson  College;  M.A.,  Columbia  University 
MARY  LANDON  RUSSELL  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Music 

Mus.B.,  Susquehanna  University  Conservatory  of  Music; 

M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
LOUISE  R.  SCHAEFFER Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.A.,  Bucknell  University 

D.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
GEORGE  S.  SHORTESS Professor  Emeritus  of  Biology 

A.B.,  Johns  Hopikins  University;  M.A.,  Columbia  University; 

Ph.D.,  Johns  Hopkins  University 
FRANCES  K.  SKEATH Professor  Emeritus  of  Mathematics 

A.B.,  M.A.,  Bucknell  University 

D.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
JOHN  A.  STUART  Professor  Emeritus  of  English 

B.A.,  William  Jewell  College;  M.A. ,  Ph.D.,  Northwestern  University 
HELEN  B.  WEIDMAN  Professor  Emeritus  of  Political  Science 

A.B.,  M.A.,  Bucknell  Universih/;  Ph.D.,  Syracuse  University 

128 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 
PROFESSORS 

ROBERT  F.  FALK  (1970)  Theatre 

B.A.,  B.D.,  Drew  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Wayne  State  University 
MORTON  A.  FINEMAN  (1966)  Physics 

A.B.,  Indiana  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
EDUARDO  GUERRA  (1960) Religion 

B.D.,  Southern  Methodist  University; 

S.T.M.,  Ph.D.,  Union  Theological  Seminary 
JOHN  G.  HANCOCK  (1967) Psychology 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Bvcknell  University; 

Ph.D.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

JOHN  G.  HOLLENBACK  (1952)  Business  Administration 

Marshal  of  the  College 

B.S.,  M.B.A.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 
JAMES  K.  HUMMER  (1962)  Chemistry 

B.N.S.,  Tufts  University;  M.S.,  Middlebury  College; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  North  Carolina 
JACK  S.  McCRARY  (1969)  Sociology 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Southern  Methodist  University; 

Ph.D.,  Washington  University 
ROGER  W.  OPDAHL  (1963)  Economics 

A.B.,  Hofstra  University;  M.A.,  Columbia  University; 

D.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
ROBERT  W.  RABOLD  (1955)  Economics 

B.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University; 

M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
JOHN  A.  RADSPINNER  (1957) Chemistry 

B.S.,  University  of  Riclnnond;  M.S.,  Virginia  Polytechnic  Institute; 

D.Sc,  Carnegie-Mellon  University 
LOGAN  A.  RICHMOND  (1954)  Accounting 

B.S.,  Lycoming  College;  M.B.A.,  New  York  University; 

C.P.A.  (Pennsylvania) 

SHIRLEY  A.  VAN  MARTER  (1979)  Dean  of  the  College 

English 

B.A.,  Mundelein  College;  M. A.,  Nortliwestern  University; 

M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago 
MARY  J.  VESTERMARK  (1977)  Psychology 

A.B.,  Oberlin  College;  M. A.,  Stetson  University; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill 


ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS 

ROBERT  B.  ANGSTADT  (1967)  Biology 

B.S.,  Ursinus  College;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Cornell  University 
CLARENCE  W.  BURCH  (1962) Physical  Education 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
BERNARD  P.  FLAM  (1963)*  Spanish 

A.B.,  New  York  University;  M.A.,  Harvard  University; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Wisconsin 

*  On  Sabbatical  Fall  Semester  1979-80 

129 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

DAVID  A.  FRANZ  (1970)  Chemistry 

A.B.,  Princeton  University;  M.A.T.,  The  Johns  Hopkins  University; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Virginia 
CHARLES  L.  GETCHELL  (1967) Mathematics 

B.S.,  University  of  Massachusetts;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Harvard  University 
ERNEST  D.  GIGLIO  (1972)  Political  Science 

B.A.,  Queens  College;  M.A.,  SUNY  at  Albany; 

Ph.D.,  Syracuse  University 
STEPHEN  R^  GRIFFITH  (1970)**  Philosophy 

A.B.,  Cornell  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
JOHN  R.  HUBBARD  (1975)  Mathematics 

A.B.,  University  of  Rochester;  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Michigan 
EMILY  R.  JENSEN  (1969)  English 

B.A.,  Jamestown  College;  M.A.,  University  of  Denver; 

Ph.D.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
FORREST  E.  KEESBURY  (1970)*  Education 

B.S.,  Defiance  College;  M.A.,  Bowling  Green  State  University; 

Ed.D.,  Lehigh  University 
ROBERT  H.  LARSON  (1969)  History 

B.A.,  The  Citadel;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Virginia 
PAUL  A.  MacKENZIE  (1970)** German 

A.B.,  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  Boston  University 
GERTRUDE  B.  MADDEN  (1958)  English 

A.B.,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M. A.,  Bucknell  University 
ROBERT  J.  B.  MAPLES  (1969)  French 

A.B.,  University  of  Rochester;  Ph.D.,  Yale  University 
JOHN  F.  PIPER,  JR.  (1969)  History 

A.B.,  Lafayette  College;  B.D.,  Yale  University;  Ph.D.,  Duke  University 
DAVID  J.  RIFE  (1970)  English 

B.A.,  University  of  Florida; 

M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Southern  Illinois  University 
MICHAEL  G.  ROSKIN  (1972)***  ' Political  Science 

A.B.,  University  of  California  at  Berkeley; 

M.A.,  University  of  California  at  Los  Angeles; 

Ph.D.,  The  American  University 
ROGER  D.  SHIPLEY  (1967)**  Art 

B.A.,  Otterbein  College;  M.F.A.,  Cranbrook  Academy  of  Art 
WILLY  SMITH  (1966)t  Physics 

M.S.E.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Michigan 
STANLEY  T.  WILK  (1973)  Anthropology 

B.A.,  Hunter  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 


*  On  Sabbatical  Fall  Semester  1979-80 
**  On  Sabbatical  Spring  Semester  1979-80 
***  On  Sabbatical  Academic  Year  1979-80 
t  On  Leave  Academic  Year  1979-80 

130 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS 

SUSAN  K.  BEIDLER  (1975)  Library  Services 

B.A.,  University  of  Delaware;  M.L.S.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 
HOWARD  C.  BERTHOLD,  JR.  (1976) Psychology 

B.A.,  Franklin  and  Marshall  College;  M.A.,  The  University  of  Iowa; 

Ph.D.,  The  University  of  Massachusetts 
GARY  M.  BOERCKEL  (1979)  Music 

B.M.,  Oberlin  College;  M.M.,  Ohio  University; 

D.M.A.,  University  of  Iowa 
JON  R.  BOGLE  (1976) Art 

B.F.A.,  B.S.,  M.F.A.,  Tyler  School  of  Art,  Temple  University 
JOHN  H.  CONRAD  (1959)' Education 

B.S.,  Mansfield  State  College;  M.A.,  New  York  University 
GARY  E.  DARTT  (1969) Theatre 

B.S.,  Augustana  College;  M.F.A.,  University  of  Minnesota 
JACK  D.  DIEHL,  JR.  (1971) Biology 

B.S.,  M.A.,  Saw  Houston  State  College; 

M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Connecticut 
RICHARD  R.  ERICKSON  (1973)  Astronomy  and  Physics 

B.A.,  University  of  Minnesota;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Chicago 
WILLIAM  D.  FORD  (1972)***  English 

B.A.,  Occidental  College;  M.A.,  M.F.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Iowa 
ROBERT  H.  FOREMAN  (1976)  Mathematics 

B.S.,  Youngstown  State  University; 

M.S.,  Illinois  Institute  of  Technology 
EDWARD  G.  GABRIEL  (1977)  Biology 

B.A.,  M.S.,  Alfred  University;  Ph.D.,  The  Ohio  State  University 
FRED  L.  GROGAN  (1977)  ' Political  Science 

A.B.,  Bates  College;  M.A.  Arizona  State  University 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Missouri 

THOMAS  J.  HENNINGER  (1966)  Director  of  Computer  Services 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  Wake  Forest  College;  M.A.,  University  of  Kansas 

RICHARD  A.  HUGHES  (1970) Religion 

B.A.,  Indiana  Central  College;  S.T.B.,  Pli.D.,  Boston  University 
DAVID  N.  JEX  (1978) Music 

B.M.,  University  of  Toledo;  M.M.,  Bowling  Green  State  University; 

D.M.A.,  Cleveland  Institute  of  Music 
MOON  H.  JO  (1975)  Sociology 

B.A.,  Valparaiso  University;  M.A.,  Howard  University; 

Ph.D.,  New  York  University 
DAN  O.  KING  (1977)  Biology 

B.A.,  University  of  South  Florida;  M.A. ,  Ph.D.,  Indiana  University 
ELIZABETH  H.  KING  (1956)  Business  Administration 

B.S.,  Geneva  College;  M.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
ELDON  F.  KUHNS,  II  (1979) Accounting 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College;  M. Accounting,  University  of  Oklahoma; 

C.P.A.  (Pennsylvania) 
RICHARD  J.  MORRIS  (1976)  History 

B.A.,  Boston  State  College;  M.A.,  Ohio  University; 

Ph.D.,  New  York  University 

131 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

STEPHEN  E.  ROBINSON  (1979) Religion 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Brigham  Young  University;  Ph.D.,  Duke  University 
KAREN  L.  SALLEY  (1976)  Psychology 

B.S.,  Arkansas  State  University;  M.A.,  Pli.D.,  University  of  Arkansas 
LARRY  R.  STRAUSER  (1973)  Sociology 

A.B.,  Lycoming  College;  M.P.A.,  University  of  Arizona 
CATHERINE  E.  STUDIER  (1978) Education 

B.S.,  SUNY  at  Oneonta;  Ed.M.,  Ed.D.,  University  of  Georgia 
FRED  M.  THAYER,  JR.  (1976) Music 

A.B.,  Syracuse  University;  B.M.,  Ithaca  College; 

MM.,  SUNY  at  Binghamton;  DM. A.,  Cornell  University 
MARY  ELLEN  VERZARO  (1979)  Library  Services 

B.A.,  Ithaca  College;  M.L.S.,  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill 
H.  BRUCE  WEAVER  (1974) Business  Administration 

B.B.A.,  Stetson  University;  J. D.,  Vanderbilt  University; 

M.B.A.,  Florida  Technological  University 
CHARLES  E.  WEYANT  (1971)  " Library  Services 

B.A.,  The  American  University;  M.S.,  Simmons  College 
JOHN  M.  WHELAN,  JR.  (1971) Philosophy 

B.A.,  University  of  Notre  Dame; 

Ph.D.,  The  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 
BUDD  F.  WHITEHILL  (1957)  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  Lock  Haven  State  College; 

M.Ed.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
FREDERIC  M.  WILD,"  JR.  (1978) English 

B.A.,  Etnory  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Ohio  State  Univeristy; 

M.Div.,  Yale  Divinity  School 
ROBERT  A.  ZACCARIA  (1973)  Biology 

B.A.,  Bridgeioater  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Virginia 
MELVIN  C.  ZIMMERMAN  (1979)  Biology 

B.S.,  SUNY  at  Cortland;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Miami  University 


INSTRUCTORS 

DEBORAH  J.  HOLMES  (1976)  Physical  Education 

B.S.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 
DIANE  M.  LESKO(1978) Art 

B.A.,  M.A.,  SUNY  at  Binghamton 
STEVEN  J.  McGUIRE  (1979)  Sociology 

B.A.,  University  of  Iowa;  M.A.,  SUNY  at  Stony  Brook 
JACK  D.  MURPHY  (1978)  Mathematics 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Drexel  University 
SYED  Q.  SHAREEF  (1979) Business  Administration 

B.S.,  Middle  East  Technical  University  (Turkey); 

M.B.A.,  University  of  Cincinnati 
LOUISE  M.  STONE  (1978)  English 

B.A.,  M.A.,  University  of  Michigan 


*  On  Sabbatical  Fall  Semester  1979-80 
t  On  Sabbatical  Spring  Semester  1979-80 
t  On  Sabbatical  Academic  Year  1979-80 

132 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

NICOLAS  J.  TOSCANO  (1979)  Modern  Language 

Bachiller  en  letras,  Granada  University  (Spain); 

Law  degree,  University  of  Madrid 
RICHARD  D.  TROXEL  (1978)  Mathematics 

B.A.,  Oberlin  College;  M.A.,  Indiana  University 


LECTURER 

DON  M.  LARRABEE  II  (1972)  Lecturer  in  Law 

A.B.,  Franklin  and  Marshall;  LL.B.,  Fordham  University 

PART-TIME  INSTRUCTORS 

MARY  P.  BAGGETT  (1977)  Chemistry 

B.A.,  Regis  College;  M.A.,  Wellesley  College 
CATHLEEN  H.  HUFFORD  (1977)  .... Library  Services 

B.A.,  The  College  ofWooster;  M.L.S.,  Columbia  University 
BARRY  W.  SLOTTER  (1978)  Sociology 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College 
ANITA  H.  SOMERS  (1977)  Mathematics 

B.S.,  University  of  Tennessee; 

M.S.,  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill 
LINDA  L.  TOSCANO  (1979)  Spanish 

B.A.,  Middlebury  College;  M.S.,  Syracuse  University 
TERRY  WILD  (1972) Art 

B.A.,  Lycoming  College;  B.F.A.,  Art  Center  College  of  Design 

APPLIED  MUSIC  TEACHERS 

WALTER  G.  McIVER  (1979)  Voice 

M.B.,  Westminster  Choir  College 

A.B.,  Bucknell  University 

M.A.,  New  York  University 
ALBERT  J.  NACINOVICH  (1972)  Brass 

B.S.  in  Music  Education,  Mansfield  State  College; 

M.S.  in  Music  Education,  Ithaca  College 
SALLY  G.  NAGEL  (1979)  Percussion 

B.A.,  University  of  Toledo 

M.M.,  Cleveland  Institute  of  Music 
MARY  L.  RUSSELL  (1936)  Piano 

M.B.,  Susquehanna  University 

M.A.,  The  Pennsylvania  State  University 

JUANITA  M.  SERANG  (1975)  Strings 

IRENE  PECKHAM  VELEY  (1968)  Piano 

B.M.,  Curtis  Institute  of  Music 


133 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

ADMINISTRATIVE  ASSISTANTS 

Louise  S.  Banks Periodicals  Assistant  in  Library 

Betty  S.  Beck Assistant  Bookstore  Manager 

Emily  C.  Biichle Secretary  to  the  Treasurer 

Pauline  M.  Brungard Student  Loan  Coordinator 

(B.S.,  Lycoming  College) 

Shirley  M.  Campbell Assistant  in  Treasurer's  Office 

Marie  A.  Compton Secretary,  Residence  Life 

Richard  L.  Cowher Office  Services  Coordinator 

Elizabeth  G .  Cowles Career  Development  Secretary 

Margaret  A.  Dewar Secretary  in  Admissions  Office 

June  L.  Evans Secretary  in  Education  Office 

Irene  Everdale Secretary  to  Director  of  Buildings 

and  Grounds 

Ruby  M.  Freezer Faculty  Secretary 

S.  Jean  Gair Secretary,  Music  and  Art  Departments 

Mary  A.  Gardner Secretary  to  Athletic  Director 

Anne  S.  Gibbon Secretary,  Biology  and 

Chemistry  Departments 

Kitty  S.  Glosser Secretary  to  Director  of  Admissions 

Ralph  W.  Hellan  Computer  Operations  Programmer 

(A.B.,  Lycoming  College) 

Helen  C.  Heller Secretary  to  the  Registrar 

Mary  C.  Hendricks Supervisor  of  Housekeeping 

Isabel  C.  Hess Library  Assistant 

Bernadine  G.  Hileman Bulk  Mailing  Coordinator 

Phyllis  M.  Holmes Secretary  to  the  President 

Barbara  E.  Horn Secretary  to  Athletic  Department 

Dee  A.  Horn Secretary  to  Business  Manager/Student 

Aid  Director 

Naomi  E.  Kepner Switchboard  Operator 

Doris  F.  McCoy  Secretary  in  Institutional  Relations  Office 

JoAnn  McFadden Secretary  in  Admissions  Office 

Vivian  Meikrantz Secretary  to  the  Dean  of  the  College 

Marilyn  Mullings Faculty  Secretary 

Phyllis  B.  Myers  Records  Clerk 

Marion  R.  Nyman  Cashier/Bookkeeper 

Esther  Parent Computer  Center  Secretary 

Betty  J.  Paris Secretary  to  Director  of  Institutional  Relations 

(A.B.,  Lycoming  College) 

Marian  L.  Rubendall Secretary  to  Dean  of  Student  Services 

Patricia  J.  Triaca  Cataloging  Assistant  in  Library 

Helen  I.  Vincent Library  Assistant 

June  Wagner Faculty  Secretary 

Deborah  E.  Weaver Damage  Assessment  Clerk 

Geraldine  H.  Wescott Secretary  to  the  Librarian 

Loretta  M.  Whipkey Secretary  to  Director  of  Public  Relations 

Margaret  Wise Secretary  in  Admissions  Office 

Cheryl  A.  Yearick Library  Assistant 


134 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

THE  ALUMNI  ASSOCIATION 

The  Alumni  Association  of  Lycoming  College  has  a  membership  of  more  than 
8,000  men  and  women.  It  is  governed  by  an  Executive  Board  consisting  of 
four  officers  and  21  members-at-large,  elected  through  mail  ballot  by 
the  membership  of  the  Association.  The  board  also  has  members  representing 
specific  geographic  areas  of  alumni  concentration,  the  senior  class  president,  the 
student  body  president,  and  a  representative  of  the  last  graduating  class.  The 
Association  annually  nominates  one  alumni  representative  for  a  three-year  term 
on  the  College  Board  of  Trustees.  The  Director  of  Alumni  Affairs  directs  the 
activities  of  the  Alumni  Office. 

The  Alumni  Association  has  the  following  purpose  as  stated  in  its  constitu- 
tion: "As  an  off-campus  constituency,  the  Association's  purpose  is  to  seek  ways 
of  maintaining  an  active  and  mutually  beneficial  relationshp  between  the  college 
and  its  alumni,  utilizing  their  talents,  resources  and  counsel  to  further  the 
objective  and  program  of  Lycoming  College." 

All  former  students  of  Williamsport  Dickinson  Seminary  and  all  former 
students,  who  have  successfully  completed  one  year  of  study  at  Williamsport 
Dickinson  Junior  College  or  Lycoming  College  shall  be  members  of  the  Associa- 
tion. Any  person  who  leaves  Lycoming  College  after  successfully  completing 
one  year  and  re-enters  as  a  student  within  four  years  of  his/her  initial 
matriculation,  shall  not  be  a  member  of  the  Alumni  Association  while  enrolled 
as  a  student  at  Lycoming  College. 

Acting  as  the  representative  of  alumni  on  the  campus,  and  working  also 
with  undergraduates,  the  Alumni  Office  aids  in  keeping  alumni  informed  and 
interested  in  the  program,  growth,  and  activities  of  the  college  through  regular 
publications  mailed  to  all  alumni  on  record.  Arrangements  for  Homecoming, 
Alumni  Day,  Class  Reunions,  club  meetings  and  similar  activities  are  coordi- 
nated through  this  office.  The  Alumni  Association  promotes  group  travel 
programs,  supplies  back-year  class  rings,  sells  water  colors  and  bronze  etchings 
of  the  campus  and  alumni  chairs. 

Through  The  Lycoming  College  Fund,  the  alumni  office  is  closely  associated 
with  the  development  program  of  the  college.  Lycoming  College  holds  member- 
ship in  the  Council  for  Advancement  and  Support  of  Education.  Communica- 
tions to  the  Alumni  Association  should  be  addressed  to  the  Alumni  Office. 

ALUMNI  ASSOCIATION  OFFICERS  AND  EXECUTIVE  BOARD 

President— Mr.  John  B.  Ernst  '58—211  Belmont  Ave.,  Doylestown,  PA  18901 
Vice-President  for  Campus  Affairs — Mr.  Kent  T.  Baldwin  '64, 

2446  Waldman  Drive,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 
Vice-President  for  Regional  Affairs — Mr.  Ralph  Zeigler  '70, 

350  Rural  Ave.,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 
Secretary — Mrs.  David  Loomis  (Eleanor  Lay  ton  '60), 

R.D.  #1,  Box  167A,  Troy,  PA  16947 
Last  Retiring  President — Mr.  George  Nichols  '59, 

RD  #2,  Newton  Rd.,  Clarks  Summit,  PA  18411 

Term  Expires  (June,  1980) 

Mrs.  Debra  Crabbe  Hackett  '76,  P.O.  Box  28160,  Philadelphia,  PA  19131 

Dr.  Ray  D.  Fravel  '58,  11  E.  Union  St.,  Canton,  PA  17724 

Mr.  Seth  D.  Keller  '65,  149  Huffman  Ave.,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 

Mrs.  Frances  Gleason  Levegood  '52,  214  Kendall  Ave.,  Jersey  Shore,  PA  17740 

135 


COLLEGE  DIRECTORY 

Rev.  David  L.  Phillips  '63,  Star  Route  #2,  Shippensburg,  PA  17257 
Mr.  Carl  E.  Snyder  '69,  R.D.  #3,  Box  39,  Cogan  Station,  PA  17728 
Miss  Ona  R.  Weimer  '49,  Box  225,  Woolrich,  PA  17779 

Term  Expires  (June,  1981) 

Rev.  H.  Emerson  Abram  '53,  Hillcrest  Road,  Newtown  Square,  PA  19073 
Mr.  N.  Mark  Achenbach  '58,  2156  Prospect  St.,  Penfield,  NY  14526 
Mrs.  Barry  L.  Boyer  (Nancy  Snyder  '64), 

2901  Orchard  Ave.,  R.D.  #3,  Montoursville,  PA  17754 
Mr.  Andrew  J.  Fedore  '77,  710  Prospect  Street,  Portage,  PA  15946 
Miss  Doris  T.  Heller  '54,  716  Grampian  Blvd.,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 
Dr.  Hess  S.  Wertz,  Jr.  '62,  1195  Sheridan  Street,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 
Rev.  Jay  E.  Zimmerman  '74,  R.D.  #3,  Box  111,  Tyrone,  PA  16686 

Term  Expires  (June,  1982) 

Mrs.  Howard  F.  Chambers  (Amy  Gehron  '70), 

48  Ross  St.,  Williamsport,  PA  17701 
Mrs.  Herman  S.  Horn  (Nancy  Dorrance  '57), 

201  N.  Broad  St.,  Honeybrook,  PA  19344 
Mr.  Charles  K.  Post,  '57,  9403  Victoria  Court,  Upper  Marlboro,  MD  20870 
Miss  Andrea  D.  Seuren  '76,  117  Warfield  Road,  Cherry  Hill,  NJ  08034 
Mrs.  Larry  R.  Strauser  (Keigh  Cronauer  '58),  R.D.  #3,  Montoursville,  PA  17754 
Miss  Karen  A.  Suplee  '74,  101  Broad  St.,  Mt.  Holly,  NJ  08060 
Mr.  Daniel  P.  Wright  '74,  1204  Tule  St.,  Montoursville,  PA  17754 

Members  of  the  Board  Serving  a  One-Year  Term 

Student  Association  of  Lycoming  College,  President — David  G.  Argall  '80 
Senior  Class  President — Miss  Donna  Petrizzi  '80 
Representative  of  the  Class  of  1979 — Miss  Kimberly  Kramer  '79, 

1154  East  Cedar  St.,  Allentown,  PA  18103 

Alumni  Representative  to  Li/coming  College  Board  of  Trustees 

1980— Dr.  Robert  L.  Morris  '55,  545  Oak  Street,  Indiana,  PA  15701 

1981— Ms.  Onalee  R.  (Barton  '62)  Sabin,  513  W.  Gray  Street,  Elmira,  NY  14905 

1982— Dr.  David  J.  Loomis  '61,  R.D.  #1,  Box  167A,  Troy,  PA  16947 


136 


COMMUNICATION  WITH  THE  COLLEGE 

This  document  contains  pertinent  information  about  the  college,  its  philosophy, 
programs,  policies,  regulations,  and  offerings.  All  students  and  prospective 
students  are  urged  to  read  it  carefully  and  completely. 

Inquiries  of  a  specific  nature  should  be  addressed  as  follows: 

Director  of  Admissions: 

Admission  to  the  freshman  class. 
Admission  with  advanced  standing. 
Re-entry  of  students  to  Lycoming  College. 
Request  for  catalogs. 

Treasurer: 

Payment  of  college  bills. 
Inquiries  concerning  expenses. 

Director  of  Student  Aid: 

Scholarships  and  loan  funds  for  students  in  college. 
Financial  assistance  for  entering  students. 

Dean  of  the  College: 

Information  about  faculty  and  faculty  activities. 
Academic  work  of  students  in  college. 

Dean  of  Student  Services: 
Student  activities. 
Residence  Halls. 
Religious  life. 
Health  services. 
Academic  support  services. 

Registrar: 

Student  records. 
Transcript  requests. 
Academic  policies. 

Career  Development  Center: 

Career  Counseling  and  employment  opportunities. 

Director  of  Institutional  Relations: 

Development,  publications,  annual  fund  and  gift  programs. 

Director  of  Alumni  Affairs 

Director  of  Public  Relations 

Address:  LYCOMING  COLLEGE,  Williamsport,  Pennsylvania  17701 
Telephone:  326-1951,  Area  Code  717 

All  of  the  provisions  in  this  catalog  are  effective  July  1,  1979. 

Lycoming  College  resents  the  right  to  make  any  necessary  changes  in  the  academic  calendar, 
charges,  courses  or  any  other  section  of  tliis  catalog. 


137 


ACADEMIC  CALENDAR— 1979-1980 


August 

26 

Sunday 

27 

Monday 

28 

Tuesday 

31 

September 

3 
4 
10 


October 


Friday 


Monday 
Tuesday 
Monday 


Monday 


12,  13,  14 
15 

Fri.,  Sat.,  Sun 
Monday 

19,  20,  21 

Fri.,  Sat.,  Sun 

November 

12-16 
16 

Mon.-Fri. 
Friday 

17 
26 

Saturday 
Monday 

December 

14 
15 

Friday 
Saturday 

January 

6 

7 
8 

Sunday 
Monday 
Tuesday 

11 


Friday 


FALL  SEMESTER 

-  Residence  Halls  open  10  a.m.  to  8  p.m. 

-  Classes  begin  8  a.m. 

-  Processing  of  drop/add  begins. 

-  Last  day  for  payment  of  tuition  and  fees 
without  late  charge. 

-  Last  day  for  drop/add  without  instructor's 
approval. 

-  Labor  Day  Recess.  Classes  suspended. 

-  Classes  resume  8  a.m. 

-  Last  day  for  drop/add — instructor's  approval 
required  for  the  add. 

-  Last  day  to  elect  audit  and 
satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grades. 

-  Last  day  for  submission  of  final  grades  for 
courses  for  which  Incomplete  grades  were 
recorded  in  Spring,  May  and  Summer 
terms. 

-  Homecoming  Weekend. 

-  Mid-Semester  Deficiency  Reports  for 
Freshmen  due  in  Registrar's  Office  at  12 
noon. 

-  Parents'  Weekend. 


Preregistration. 

Last  day  to  withdraw  from  courses  with  W, 
WP,  WF  grades. 

Thanksgiving  Recess  and  Review  Period  be- 
gins 5  p.m. 

Residence  Halls  close  10  a.m. 
Classes  resume  8  a.m. 


-  Semester  ends  5  p.m. 

-  Residence  Halls  close  10  a.m. 

SPRING  SEMESTER 

-  Residence  Halls  open  12  noon. 

-  Classes  begin  8  a.m. 

-  Processing  of  drop/add  begins. 

-  Last  day  for  payment  of  tuition  and  fees 
without  late  charge. 

-  Last  day  for  drop/add  without  instructor's 
approval. 


138 


18 


Friday 


February 

15 

Friday 

25 

Monday 

29 

Friday 

March 

1 

10 

24-28 

Saturday 

Monday 

Mon.-Fri 

April 

4 

Friday 

25 
26 

May 

2 


Tuesday 

Friday 

Saturday 

Friday 
Sunday 


Last  day  for  drop/add — instructor's  approval 
required  for  the  add. 
Last  day  to  elect  audit  and 
satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grades. 


Last  day  for  submission  of  final  grades  for 

courses  for  which  Incomplete  grades  were 

recorded  in  the  Fall  Semester. 

Mid-Semester  Deficiency  Reports  for 

Freshmen  due  in  Registrar's  Office  at  12 

noon. 

Spring  Recess  begins  5  p.m. 

Residence  Halls  close  10  a.m. 
Classes  resume  8  a.m. 
Preregistration. 


Last  day  to  withdraw  from  courses  with  W, 

WP,  WF  grades. 

Good  Friday.  Afternoon  classes  suspended. 

Honors  Day. 

Semester  ends  5  p.m. 

Residence  Halls  close  10  a.m. 


Residence  Halls  open  12  noon  for  partici- 
pants in  Commencement. 
Commencement. 


May 

5 
6 
9 


23 


27 
30 


Monday 
Tuesday 
Friday 


Friday 

Tuesday 
Friday 


MAY  TERM 

-  Residence  Halls  open  10  a.m. 

-  Classes  begin. 

-  Last  day  for  drop/add — instructor's  approval 
required  for  the  add. 

-  Last  day  to  elect  audit  and 
satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grades. 

-  Last  day  to  withdraw  from  courses  with  W, 
WP,  WF  grades. 

-  Memorial  Day  recess  begins  5  p.m. 

-  Classes  resume  8  a.m. 

-  Term  ends.  Residence  Halls  close  9  p.m. 


June 

1 

2 


SUMMER  TERM 

Sunday  -  Residence  Halls  open  12  noon. 

Monday  -  Classes  begin. 


139 


6 

Friday 

-  Last  day  for  drop/add — instructor's  approval 
required  for  the  add. 

-  Last  day  to  elect  audit  and 

27 

Friday 

satisfactory/unsatisfactory  grades. 
-  Last  day  to  withdraw  from  courses  with  W, 
WP,  WF  grades. 

July 

3 
7 
11 

Thursday 

Monday 

Friday 

-  Independence  Day  recess  begins  5  p.m. 

-  Classes  resume  8  a.m. 

-  Term  ends.  Residence  Halls  close  9  p.m. 

140 


ACADEMIC  CALENDAR  1979-1980 


Sun 

Mon 

6 
13 
20 

AUGUST 

Tues     Wed     Thur 

1        2 
7       8       9 
14     15     16 
21      22     23 

Fn 

3 
10 
17 
24 

Sat 

4 
11 
18 
25 

Sun 

2 

Mon 

3 

SEPTEMBER 

Tues     Wed     Thur 

Fn 

Sat 

1 

5 

4       5       6 
11      12     13 
18     19     20 
25     26     27 

7 

14 
21 
28 

8 
15 
22 
29 

12 
19 

9 
16 

23 
30 

10 
17 
24 

26 

27 

28     29     30 

31 

Sun 

Mon 

OCTOBER 

Tues     Wed     Thur 

Fn 

Sal 

Sun 

Mon 

NOVEMBEF 

Tues     Wed     Thur 

Fn 

Sat 

1 

8 
15 
22 
29 

2       3       4 
9      10     11 
16     17     18 
23     24     25 

5 
12 
19 
26 

6 
13 
20 
27 

1 

2 
9 
16 

3 

10 
17 
24 

7 

14 
21 
28 

4 
11 

5 
12 

6       7       8 

13     14     15 

18 

19 

20     21      22 

23 

30     31 

25 

26 

27     28     29 

30 

Sun 

Mon 

DECEMBER 

Tues     Wed     Thur 

Fri 

Sat 
1 

8 

15 
22 
29 

Sun 

Mon 

JANUARY 

Tues     Wed     Thur 

1        2       3 

Fn 
4 

Sat 
5 

2 

9 

3 

10 

4       5       6 
11      12     13 

7 

14 

6 

13 
20 
27 

7 

14 
21 
28 

8       9      10 
15     16     17 
22     23     24 
29     30     31 

11 

18 
25 

12 
19 
26 

16 

17 

24 

31 

18     19     20 
25     26     27 

21 
28 

30 

Sun 

Mon 

FEBRUARY 

Tues     Wed     Thur 

Fri 

Sat 

Sun 

2 

Mon 

3 

MARCH 

Tues     Wed     Thur 

4       5       6 

Fn 

7 

Sat 
1 

8 

1 

8 
15 
22 

2 
9 
16 
23 

3 

10 
17 
24 

4 
11 

18 
25 

5       6       7 
12     13     14 
19     20     21 
26     27     28 

9 
16 

23 
30 

10 

17 

24 
31 

11      12     13 
18     19     20 
25     26     27 

14 
21 
28 

15 
22 
29 

29 

Sun 

Mon 

APRIL 

Tues     Wed     Thur 

1        2       3 

Fri 
4 

Sat 

5 

Sun 
4 

Mon 
5 

MAY 

Tues     Wed     Thur 
1 

Fn 

2 

Sat 

3 

6 
13 
20 

7 

14 
21 

8       9      10 
15     16     17 
22     23     24 

11 
18 

25 

12 
19 
26 

6       7       8 
13     14     15 
20     21      22 
27     28     29 

9 

16 
23 

30 

10 
17 
24 
31 

11 

18 

12 
19 

27 

28 

29     30 

25 

26 

Sun 
1  J 

Mon 

JUNE 

Tues     Wed     Thur 

Fri 

Sat 

Sun 

Mon 

JULY 

Tues    Wed     Thur 
1          2         3 

8       9      10 

Fn 

4 

Sat 
5 

12 
19 
26 

9 
16 
23 
30 

10     11      12 
17     18     19 
24     25     26 

ft          7 

13     14 
20     21 
27     28 

8 

15 
22 
29 

13 

20 
27 

14 
21 
28 

15     16     17 
22     23     24 
29     30     31 

18 

25 

D   =   Fall  and  Spring  Semesters 
D   =  May  Term 
I   =  Summer  Session 


141 


CAMPUS  FACILITIES 

RESIDENTIAL 

*/\.  North  Hall  (1965) — 146  students  in  two-room  suites  with  bath. 

4.  East  Hall  (1962) — Houses  chapters  of  national  fraternities  and  other  students.  The  fraternity  units, 

distinct  self-contained,  provide  dormitory  facilities,  lounge,  and  a  chapter  room  for  each  group. 

All  students  share  a  large  social  area  on  the  ground  floor. 
•  5.  Forrest  Hall  (1968) — 92  students  in  two-room  suites  with  bath.  Honors  Dr.  and  Mrs.  Fletcher  Bliss 

Forrest  and  Anna  Forrest  Burfiendt  '30,  the  parents  and  sister  of  Katherine  Forrest  Mathers  '28, 

whose  generosity  established  the  memorial. 

6.  Crever  Hall  (1962) — 126  students  in  two-room  suites  with  bath.  Honors  the  College's  founder  and 

first  financial  agent,  the  Rev.  Benjamin  H.  Crever,  who  helped  persuade  the  Baltimore  Conference 
to  purchase  the  institution  from  the  Williamsport  Town  Council  in  1848. 

8.  Wesley  Hall  (1956) — 144  students.  Honors  the  Founder  of  Methodism. 

9.  Rich  Hall  (1948) — 105  students  in  two-room  suites  with  bath.  Honors  the  Rich  family  of  Woolrich, 

Pennsylvania.  Houses  the  college  health  service  and  the  Sara  J.  Walter  non-residents  lounge. 

11.  Asbury  Hall  (1962) — 154  students.  Honors  Bishop  Francis  Asbury,  the  father  ofThe  United  Methodist 

Church  in  America,  who  made  the  circuit  through  the  upper  "Susquehanna  District"  in  1812,  the 
year  the  Williamsport  Academy  (now  Lycoming)  opened  its  doors. 
18.  Skeath  Hall  (1965) — 212  students.  Honors  the  late].  Milton  Skeath,  professor  of  psychology  and  four- 
time  dean  of  the  institution  from  1921  to  1967. 

ACADEMIC 

12-15.  The  Academic  Center  (1968) 

12.  Laboratories  and  Arena  Theatre — Language,  business,  mathematics,  and  physics  laboratories; 

Detwiler  Planetarium;  204  seat  thrust-stage  arena  theatre;  90  seat  Alumni  Lecture  Hall. 

13.  Faculty  Office  Building — 69  faculty  offices,  seminar  rooms,  735  seat  lecture  hall. 

14.  Wendle  Hall — Spacious  Pennington  Lounge  is  an  informal  meeting  place  for  students  and  faculty. 

Psychology  laboratories,  20  classrooms. 

15.  Library— Can  accommodate  700  students  in  a  variety  of  study  and  reading  situations,  has  a  capacity 

of  250,000  volumes,  computer  center  and  photographic  laboratories. 

2.  Art  Center  (1965) — Studios  and  art  gallery. 

3.  Fine  Arts  Building  (1940)— Art  Studios. 

21.  Science  Building  (1957) — Chemistry  and  biology  lecture  rooms,  laboratories,  offices. 

CHAPEL 

17.  Clarke  Chapel  (1939) — Worship  services  and  other  events  in  auditorium;  classrooms,  studios  and 
music  department  faculty  offices  on  ground  floor. 

ADMINISTRATION 

10.  John  W.  Long  Hall  (1951) — College  administration  offices:  President,  College  Deans,  Treasurer, 
Registrar,  Admissions,  Alumni  Affairs,  Public  Relations,  Career  Development  Center,  Publica- 
tions, Development,  and  Financial  Aid.  Reception  area,  central  communications,  printing  and 
bulk  mail  services. 

22.  Maintenance. 

RECREATION 

7.  Wertz  Student  Center  (1959) — Dining  room,  Burchfield  Lounge,  recreation  area,  game  room,  music 

room,  book  store,  post  office,  and  student  organization  offices.  Honors  Bishop  D.  Frederick  Wertz, 
president  of  Lycoming  from  1955  until  1968. 

16.  Gymnasium  (1923) — Basketball  and  other  courts,  swimming  pool,  bowling  alleys,  physical  education 

offices. 


142 


"e  Si 

■2  g       « 

X  _  13  x  m 

£  .§  S  JT  w 

13   j"   oi  ^ 
OJ   >^ei 

_*    X    U- 

en  c 


oi   u  S  X 
-   S   c  T 


d  & 


oc 

01 
A3 

01 

c 
£  2 

-C 

O  I 

.2   b' 

H 
C 

3     C 

10 

re 

c    <^ 

— 
< 

U     0) 

re  •> 

U  u 

(N    M    ^    If)    vO    N 


01 

C 

H 

OJ 

U 

2 

w 

c 

u 

01 

nj 

^y 

3 

PC 

— 

RJ 

X  2 

55 

N 

> 

X 

PC 

Oi      01 

5 

be 

c 

0 

3  < 

<  < 

* 

* 

* 
in 

t-v. 

X 

cr 

— 

PH     (N 

CD 

w 

1— 1 

H 

hJ 

U 

< 

u- 

"^3 

DC 

H 

"« 

.2  "<3 
x  X 

cn 

£ 

<  <  X 

?    <5 
oi    S; 
>-    r 

-      Ol 

u,  u 

3 

Oh 

0 

Z 

<u 

c 

u 

c 

(0 

s 

< 

U 

* 

* 

*    * 

i— i 

r-i 

t*3 

-r 

in  so 

143 


INDEX 


Academic  Advisement 19 

Academic  Calendar 138 

Academic  Honesty 22 

Academic  Honors 23 

Academic  Program 15 

Academic  Standing 22 

Accounting  Curriculum  39 

Accounting-Mathematics  (EIM)  42 

Accreditation  5 

Administrative  Assistants 134 

Administrative  Staff 126 

Admissions 7-8 

Admissions  Deposit 8,  10 

Admissions  Office 8 

Admission  Policy  7 

Admission  Standards  7 

Advanced  Placement 22 

Advanced  Standing  by  Transfer 8 

Advisory  Committees  19 

Health  Professions 19 

Legal  Professions 19 

Medical  Technology  19 

Theological  Professions 19 

Allopathic   Medicine,    Advisement    for    ...    19 

Alumni  Association 135 

American  Studies  (EIM)  42 

Anthropology  Curriculum  113 

Application  Fee  and  Deposits 10 

Application  Procedure  7 

Applied  Music  Requirements  16 

Art  Curriculum 44 

Astronomy  and  Physics  Curriculum 48 

Attendance,  Class 22 

Audit 26 

Awards 23 

Basic  Educational  Opportunity 

Grants  (BEOG) 13 

Biology  Curriculum  52 

Board  of  Trustees 125 

Books  and  Supplies 10 

Building  Descriptions 142 

Business  Administration  Curriculum 56 

Calendar,  Academic 138 

Campus  Map  143 

Career  Development  Services 34 

Chemistry  Curriculum 59 

Christian  Ministry,  Advisement  for 19 

Class  Attendance 22 

College  and  the  Church  37 

College  Directory 125 

College  Level  Examination  Program 

(CLEP)  22 

Communication  with  the  College  137 

Community  Scholarships  14 

Conduct,  Standards  of 36 

Contents  3 

Contingency  Deposit  9,  10 

Cooperative  Programs  122 

Drama  122 

Engineering 122 

Environmental  Studies 122 

Foresty 122 

Medical  Technology  123 

Military  Science 123 

144 


Podiatry  123 

Counseling,  Academic 19 

Counseling,  Personal 33 

Course  Credit  by  Examination 22 

Course  Descriptions  39 

Criminal  Justice  (EIM)  62 

Curriculum  39 

Damage  Charges 11 

Degree  Programs 15 

Degree  Requirements 15 

Dental  School,  Advisement  for 19 

Departmental  Honors 23 

Departmental  Majors 18 

Deposits 9 

Deposit  Refund 8,  10 

Discrimination  Compliance  Statement 7 

Distribution  Requirements 15 

English 16 

Fine  Arts  16 

Foreign  Language  16 

History  and  Social  Science 17 

Mathematics  16 

Natural  Science 17 

Philosophy 16 

Religion  16 

Drama,  Cooperative  Program 122 

Early  Admission  Procedure 7 

Economics  Curriculum 63 

Education  Curriculum  66 

Education  Financing  Plans 14 

Educational  Opportunity  Grants 13 

Engineering,  Cooperative  Program 122 

English  Curriculum  69 

English  Requirement 16 

Entrance  Examinations  (CEEB)  22 

Entry  Fees  and  Deposits  10 

Environmental  Studies 122 

Established  Interdisciplinary 

Major  (EIM)  18 

Expenses 9 

Faculty  128 

Facilities 142 

Federal  Grants  and  Loans  13 

Fees 9 

Financial  Aid  12 

Financial  Assistance  12 

Financial  Information 9 

Fine  Arts  Requirements 16 

Foreign  Language  Requirement 16 

Foreign  Languages  and  Literatures 

Curriculum 75 

Forestry,  Cooperative  Program 122 

French  Curriculum  75 

General  Expenses 9 

German  Curriculum  77 

Grading  System 20 

Graduation  Requirements 15 

Grants-in-Aid  12 

Greek  Curriculum 80 

Handbooks  for  Students 
(Guidepost,  Pathfinder, 

Residence  Halls)  35 

Health  Professions  Careers 19 

Health  Services 33 

Hebrew  Curriculum  80 

History  Curriculum  82 

History  of  the  College  5 


History  Requirement  17 

Honor  Societies 23 

Honors,  Academic 23 

Honors,  Departmental  23 

Independent  Study  25 

Interdisciplinary  Majors  18 

Established  Majors  (EIM)  18 

Individual  Majors  (IIM)  18 

International  Studies  (EIM)  87 

Internship  Program 25 

Interviews 8 

Legal  Professions,  Advisement  for 19 

Life  Long  Learning 27 

Literature  (EIM) 89 

Loans 13 

Location 5 

London  Semester 124 

Lycoming  Experimental  Audit 

Program  (LEAP) 27 

Lycoming  Scholar  Program 27 

Major 17 

Admission  to  17 

Departmental  18 

Interdisciplinary  (EIM,  IIM)  18 

Mass  Communications  (EIM)  89 

Mathematics  Curriculum  92 

Mathematics  Requirement 16 

May  Term  26,  139 

Medical  School,  Advisement  for 19 

Medical  History  34 

Medical  Staff 127 

Medical  Technology 123 

Military  Science  123 

Ministerial  Grants-in-Aid  12 

Music  Curriculum  96 

National  Defense  Student  Loans 

(NDSL)  13 

Natural  Science  Requirement 17 

Near  East  Culture  and 

Archeology  (EIM) 99 

Non-Payment  of  Fees  Penalty  12 

Objectives  and  Purpose 5 

Optometry  School,  Advisement  for 19 

Orientation 37 

Osteopathy  School,  Advisement  for 19 

Overseas  Studies  Opportunities 26 

Part-time  Student  Opportunities 27 

Lycoming  Experimental  Audit 
Program  (LEAP)  27 

Regular  Audit 26 

Special  Student 

(Part-time  for  Credit)  27 

Payment  of  Fees 9 

Payments,  Partial 10 

Penalty  for  Non-Payment  of  Fees 12 

Personal  Counseling 33 

Philosophy  Curriculum  100 

Philosophy  Requirement  16 

Physical  Education  Curriculum 103 

Physics  Curriculum  48 

Placement  Services  34 

Podiatry,  Cooperative  Program  123 

Political  Science  Curriculum 104 

Principal  Aim  of  the  College 5 


Psychology  Curriculum 108 

Purpose  and  Objectives  5 

Quick  Look  at  Lycoming 2 

Reading  Improvement  Course 34 

Refunds 10 

Registration  19 

Regulations  (Standards  of  Conduct) 36 

Religion  Curriculum 110 

Religion  Requirement  16 

Religious  Life 37 

Requirements,  Distribution  15 

Requirements  for  Admission 7 

Requirements  for  Graduation  15 

Reserve  Officer  Training  Corps 

Program  (ROTC) 123 

Scholarships  (ROTC) 14 

Residence  35 

Residence  Halls 35 

Residential 35 

Russian  Curriculum  80 

Scholarships 12 

Selection  Process 7 

Social  Science  Requirement  17 

Sociology- Anthropology 

Curriculum  113 

Spanish  Curriculum  81 

Special  Features  25 

Departmental  Honors 23 

Independent  Study 25 

Internship  Program  25 

London  Semester 124 

Lycoming  Scholar  Program 27 

May  Term 26 

Overseas  Studies  Opportunities 26 

Student  Enrichment  Semester 124 

United  Nations  Semester 124 

Washington  Semester 124 

Special  Student,  Admission  as 27 

Standards  of  Admission  7 

Standards  of  Conduct 36 

State  Grants  and  Loans 14 

Student  Activities 38 

Student  Enrichment  Semester  (SES)  124 

Student  Records 27 

Student  Services 33 

Study  Abroad 26 

Study  Program 34 

Summer  Session  Calendar 139 

Supplemental  Educational  Opportunity 

Grants  (SEOG) 13 

Theatre  Curriculum 118 

Theological  Professions  Advisement  for  ....  19 

This  is  Lycoming 5 

Transfer 8 

Trustees 125 

Unit  Course  System 20 

United  Campus  Ministry  127 

United  Nations  Semester 124 

Veterans,  Approval 7 

Veterinary  School,  Advisement  for 19 

Washington  Semester 124 

Withdrawal  from  College  10 

Withdrawing  from  Courses 19 

Work-Study  Grants 14